Contents

Actors

Animated Movies

Backgrounds

Basics

Buttons

Charts

Color and Object Attributes

Datasheets

Distribution and Playback

Drawing Objects

Editing Objects

Exporting

Importing

Interactivity

Libraries

Masters and Templates

OLE

Outlines

Pictographs

Pictures

Preferences

Printing

Selecting Objects

Shortcut Keys

Sound

Speaker Notes

Tables

Text

Timelines

Transitions

Video


Procedures

Actors

Animated Movies

Backgrounds

Basics

Buttons

Charts

Color and Object Attributes

Datasheets

Distribution and Playback

Drawing Objects

Editing Objects

Exporting

Importing

Interactivity

Libraries

Masters and Templates

OLE

Outlines

Pictographs

Pictures

Preferences

Printing

Selecting Objects

Shortcut Keys

Sound

Speaker Notes

Tables

Text

Timelines

Transitions

Video


Concepts

Actor

Amplitude

Animated Movie

Animation

Axis

Background

Bitmap

Bounce

Brightness

Bullet Text

Burst

Button

Categories

Cell

Channel

Chart

Chart Format

Color Scheme

Column

Datasheet

Decibel

Digital Video

Distribution Time

Duration

Entry Time

Exit Time

Gradient Fills

Grid Lines (Chart)

Grid Lines (Slide View)

Handouts

Highlight

Hue

Interactivity

Label

Legend

Levels

Library

Loop

Marker

Master Slide

MIDI Sound

Mono

Narration

OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

On-Screen Presentation

Outline View

Palette

Panels

Paths

Patterns

Pica

Player Application

Point

Presentation

Resources

Rotation

Row

Sample Rate

Sample Resolution

Saturation

Self-Contained Presentation

Self-Running Presentation

Series

Slide

Slide View

Slide Sorter

Slide Show

Sound Editor

Sound Sample

Speaker Notes

Stereo

Template

Timeline

Tools

Transition

Value

Wave Sound


Opening a Presentation Within Astound

Once you have started Astound, you can open an existing presentation or slide file.

To open a presentation

1.	Choose File/Open...

The Open Presentation dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the presentation you want.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The selected presentation will appear.

Related Topics:

Creating a New Presentation


 Creating a New Presentation

You can create a new presentation from within Astound. You can apply a template to your new presentation, or create it without a template.

To create a new presentation

1.	Choose File/New...

Select Template dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the desired template.

3.	Click on the OK button, or if you do not want to use a template, click on the No Template button.

The first master of the selected template or an empty slide will appear.

Related Topics:

Opening a Presentation within Astound


Moving Between Views

As you create or edit a presentation, you can easily move between the Slide View window, Outline View window, and Slide Sorter window by simply clicking on the appropriate button. For example, you may want to create an outline in the Outline View, add graphics in the Slide View and then arrange slides in the Slide Sorter. You can also open the Timeline window and a Speaker Notes window. Once opened, the Speaker Notes and Timeline windows will remain open on top of any view until you close them.

To move between views

1.	Choose the appropriate view from the View menu or click on the button for the window you want to use.

Slide View button

Outline View button

Slide Sorter button

Timeline button

Speaker Notes button


Playing Slides

As you create and edit your slides, you may want to see the slides in progress. You can preview the current slide, all slides, or from the current slide onward. You also have the option of specifying how your presentation will preview.

To preview the current slide

To preview a single slide, you can use the Preview Slide button or the Slideshow command in the File menu.

1.	Choose File/Slideshow/Play Current Slide or click on the Play Current Slide button.

The current slide will play on your full screen. Playing will allow animation, transitions, videos, sound, etc., to be previewed.

2.	Press [Esc] to stop the preview.

To preview the entire slideshow

1.	Choose File/Slideshow/Play Entire Presentation or click on the Play Presentation button.

The entire slideshow will run.

2.	Press [Esc] to stop the preview.

To preview the slideshow from the current slide onward

You can preview your presentation starting with the current slide using the Slideshow command in the File menu.

1.	Choose File/Slideshow/Play From Current Slide.

The presentation will run beginning with the current slide.

2.	Press [Esc] to stop the preview.

Related Topics:

Setting Slide Preview Options


Setting Slide Preview Options

You can set options for viewing your slides using the File/Slideshow/Options... command. These options include: how long each slide is displayed, if the animation is played, whether or not the cursor is shown, and how the presentation will advance from one slide to the next.

NOTE: These options override options set elsewhere and will affect final playback of a presentation as well as previewing.

To set slideshow options

1.	Choose File/Slideshow/Options...

The Slideshow Options dialog box will appear.

2.	In the Play box, select the portion of the presentation you want to preview.

3.	In the Options box, select the playback options you want to use.

4.	In the Slide duration box, set the duration for the preview.

5.	The Advance Slides box, specifies how you want the slides to advance during your preview.

6.	In the Show Mouse Cursor box, select if and when you would like the cursor to be displayed during the preview.

7.	Click on the OK button to accept your settings, or click on the Play button to preview your presentation using these settings.

Related Topics:

Previewing Slides


Moving Between Slides

As you edit your presentation, you can move quickly and easily between the slides within your presentation.

 To move between slides using the menu command

1.	Choose Slide/Go To.

The Go To submenu will appear.

2.	Select the slide that you want.

You can go to the next, previous, first, or the last slide. You can also choose a slide to display by its name.

The slide you select will appear.

To move between slides using the pop-up menu

1.	Press and hold on the Slide pop-up menu.

A pop-up list of slides in your current presentation will appear.

2.	Select the slide you want.

The slide you select will appear.

You can also move between slides in the Slide Sorter by double clicking on the slide you want to go to.


View Magnification

Astound allows you to magnify the view of your slide to see finer details, or to see the overall effect of the slide. You can choose the magnification you want (25%-400%) from the View menu or specify an exact magnification with the Other... command. From the Magnification button, you can choose basic magnifications or fit the slide to the Slide View window, as well as being able to increase or decrease the magnification.

To magnify from the menu

1.	Choose View/Magnification or click on the Magnification button.

The Magnification submenu will appear.

25% to 400%: Sets magnification to the specified percentage.

100% (Actual Size): Displays the slide at 100% of its size.

Fit in Window: Displays the entire slide as large as possible within the current window.

Increase: Increases the magnification one level above the current magnification. (A level is defined for each magnification percentage shown in the magnification submenu.)

Decrease:  Decreases the magnification one level below the current magnification. (A level is defined for each magnification percentage shown in the magnification submenu.)

Other...  :  Displays the  Slide Magnification dialog box in which you can type any number (between 10% and 2000%) to set a custom magnification.

2.	Select the magnification you want.

The slide will appear in the magnification you select.


Preferences

You can customize Astound by specifying various display and file preferences. The display preferences allow you to display or hide the tool bar and status bar, set units of measurement, and add a grid to your slides to help you place objects.

The file preferences allow you to specify whether files are compressed by default when they are saved, if backup files are made, if Astound automatically saves files, and what type of preview to save with a file by default.

If you enable the Save Settings on Exit command, whatever preference options you have specified in your current work session will be saved with Astound and will be used the next time you run the program.

To save Preferences Settings On Exit

1.	Choose View/Preferences/Save Settings On Exit.

Your display and file preference settings will be saved as defaults for use in every Astound presentation created thereafter, unless you change the settings again.


Display Preferences

You can specify some preferences that will dictate toe way your window looks and what options you have available in Astound

To set display preferences

1.	Choose View/Preferences/Display...

 The Display Preferences dialog box appears.

2.	Specify the appropriate display options.

3.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

File Preferences


File Preferences

You can specify some preferences for how your files are saved.

To specify file preferences

1.	Choose View/Preferences/File...

 The File Preferences dialog box will appear.

2.	Specify the appropriate file options.

3.       Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Display Preferences


Setting Slide Sizes

As you prepare your presentation, you will probably want to select specific dimensions for your slides depending on whether you are printing the presentation or playing it back on a computer.

To set slide dimensions

1.	Choose Slide/Dimensions...

The Slide Dimensions dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the appropriate dimension name from the Available Dimensions drop-down list box.

Select the screen size you want in the pop-up menu. You have a choice of a monitor size, a paper page size, or 35mm slides. You can also create custom slide sizes.

If you are setting up slides for an on-screen presentation, be sure to select the slide size that matches the monitor on which you will be playing the presentation.

3.	Enable the Adjust Object Positions checkbox if you want to scale the placement of objects currently on your slide.

This will move all objects on the slide so that they keep their relative positions in the new slide size. The objects themselves are not scaled.

4.	Click on OK  when you are finished.

The slide will appear in the dimensions you have selected.

Related Topics:

Removing Slide Dimensions from the List


Setting Custom Slide Sizes

You can specify a custom slide size and add it to the list of slide sizes.

To add a custom slide dimension

You can specify a custom slide size and add it to your list of available slide dimensions.

1.	Choose Slide/Dimensions...

The Slide Dimensions dialog box  will appear.

2.	Type a name for your slide dimensions in the Name field.

3.	In the Width and Height edit boxes, type the dimensions you want to use.

If you want to set the slide dimensions in measurement units other than those displayed in the dialog box, you will have to change the units of measurement in the Display Preferences dialog box.

4.	Click on the Add button to add the new set of dimensions to the Available Dimensions drop-down list.

Related Topics:

Setting Slide Sizes

Removing Dimensions from the Slide Dimension List


Removing Dimensions from the Slide Dimension List

If you have slide dimensions saved that you don't use, you can remove them from the list.

To remove a set of dimensions from the Available Dimensions list

If you do not use a set of slide dimensions that are listed in the Available Dimensions drop-down list box, you can remove the dimensions from the list.

1.	Choose Slide/Dimensions...

The Slide Dimensions dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the dimension name you want to remove from the Available Dimensions drop-down list.

3.	Click on the Remove button.

A dialog box will appear asking you to confirm that you want to remove the selected dimensions.

4.	Click on the OK button.

You will be returned to the Slide Dimension dialog box and the dimensions will be removed from the list of available slide dimensions.


Adding Slides

You can create as many new slides as you want in your presentation. You can also rename any slide.

To create new slides

1.	Choose Slide/New...

Create New Slide dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the master you want from the pop-up list.

Your selection will be displayed.

3.	In the Name edit box, type the name of your new slide.

If you do not enter a slide name, a default will be used.

4.	In the No. of Slides edit box, type the number of slides you want to create.

If you create multiple slides, each slide created will have the same name, followed by a number.

5.	Click on the OK button.

You can also create a new slide by pressing and holding on the New Slide pop-up menu, and selecting the master you want to use from the pop-up list.

Related Topics:

Renaming Slides


Renaming Slides

You can rename any of the slides in your presentation.

To rename the current slide from the Slide menu

1.	Choose Slide/Name...

Slide Name dialog box appears asking you to rename the slide.

2.	Type in a new name.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The current slide will be renamed, and the new name will appear in the Slide pop-up menu.


Slide Sorter

As you prepare your presentation, you may decide that you want to reorder your slides. This can be done using the Slide Sorter window. The Slide Sorter window can also be used to perform some actions on multiple slides.

You can customize the display of your presentation within the Slide Sorter by specifying how large the slide preview is, and whether information such as the slide name, duration and the slide transition is displayed or not.

To customize the Slide Sorter display

1.	Click on the Slide Sorter button.

Slide Sorter window will appear.

2.	Choose the desired slide preview size from the Sorter menu, or click on the appropriate slide preview size button.

You can choose to have small, medium or large previews.

The slide previews will change to reflect the preview size you have chosen.

3.	Enable or disable Sorter/Show Information or click on the Show Information button in the Slide Sorter window.

When this command is enabled, the slide previews will include the slide name, duration, and a transition icon if there is a transition attached to the slides.

Related Topics:

Selecting Multiple Slides in the Slide Sorter

Reordering Slides

Enhancing Colors in the Slide Sorter


Selecting Multiple Slides in the Slide Sorter Window

There are several ways to select slides for reordering and editing slides in the Slide Sorter:

·	After clicking on the first slide to select it, hold down the [Ctrl] key and click on individual slides to select multiple, independent slides.

·	After clicking on the first slide to select it, hold down the [Shift] key and click on the last slide in  the range of slides you want to select.

·	Hold down the [Shift] key and use the arrow keys or [Page Up], [Page Down], [Home], and [End] keys to select a range of slides.

Once you have multiple slides selected, you can move them all to one position within the presentation, apply certain editing actions such as adding a background, transition, or spell checking the selected slides.

Related Topics:

Slide Sorter

Reordering Slides

Enhancing Colors in the Slide Sorter


Reordering Slides

The Slide Sorter is ideal for rearranging the order of your slides.

To reorder slides in your presentation

1.	Click on the Slide Sorter button.

Miniatures of the slides in your presentation will appear in the Slide Sorter window. You may change their sizes by clicking on the Small, Medium or Large Size Previews buttons.

2.	Click the pointer on the slide you wish to move.

3.	Drag the slide to the desired location.

4.	Release the mouse button when the line appears at the appropriate location.

Related Topics:

Slide Sorter

Selecting Multiple Slides in the Slide Sorter

Enhancing Colors in the Slide Sorter


Enhancing the Color of a Range of Slides

You can select a range of slides and select the best palette for them. You can also select slides and choose the Sorter/Enhance Color/Reset command to return slides to their original palette.

To enhance the palette of a selection of slides

1.	In the Slide Sorter, select the range of slides you want to enhance.

2.	Choose Sorter/Enhance Color/Selected Slides.

Related Topics:

Slide Sorter

Selecting Multiple Slides in the Slide Sorter

Reordering Slides


Saving

As you are working on your presentation, you should save often. If you make a mistake, you can revert to a previously saved copy. You can save your presentation under its current filename, or under an alternate filename.

To save your file the first time

1.	Choose File/Save As...

The Save Presentation As dialog box will appear.

2.	Type in the name you wish to save your presentation as, and/or select a different directory in which to save the presentation.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The presentation is saved, and its name will appear in the title bar of the Slide window.

Once you have named a presentation you can use the File/Save command to quickly save your presentation under the same name. When you choose File/Save your presentation file will be updated automatically.

Related Topics:

Reverting to a Saved Copy


Reverting to a Saved Copy

If you make a mistake, you can easily revert to the last saved copy of your presentation.

To revert to a saved copy

1.	Choose File/Revert to Saved.

A warning will appear asking you to confirm that you really do want to revert to the previously saved version.

2.	If this warning appears, click on Yes if you want to discard your modifications since the last time you saved the presentation.

The last saved version of your presentation will appear.

Related Topics:

Saving


Exiting

You can end your Astound session anytime.

To exit Astound

1.	Choose File/Exit.

A warning will appear if changes have been made that have not been saved.

2.	If this warning appears, click on Yes, if you wish to save your changes, or on No, if you want to discard your modifications.

Your session with Astound  will end, and you will be returned to the Windows Program Manager.


Using Master Slides

Master slides anchor certain objects that you don't want to have repositioned or altered, and also contain placeholders that you can fill with your information. You can use master slides as part of a template, or by themselves. To use a master, you simply create a slide based on the master, and fill the placeholders.

Once you have created a slide using masters, you cannot move the master slide objects on the slide, but you can move the master slide placeholders and their contents on the slide. However, if you change the master slide, the changes will appear on all slides using that master.

NOTE: Master slides that are part of templates included with Astound may already contain transition effects that are attached to the slide itself, or to some of the objects on the slide.

Related Topics:

Creating Slides with a Master

Attaching a Master to a Slide

Filling Placeholders

Switching Masters

Unlinking Master Slides

Removing Masters from Slides

Editing Master Slides

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Templates


Creating Slides with a Master Slide
Creating Slides with a Master

When you create a new slide, you can specify that you want to use a master slide. There are two ways to create a new slide using a master.

To choose a master for new slide(s) using the Slide menu

1.	Choose Slide/New...

Create New Slide dialog box will appear.

2.	Choose the master you want to use from the Master drop-down list.

The drop-down list contains the names of the currently loaded masters.

A preview of the master slide you choose will appear in the Preview box.

3.	Enter a name for your new slide(s) in the Name field.

4.	Enter the number of new slides you want in the No. of Slides edit box.

If you create multiple slides, each slide created will have the same name, followed by a number.

5.	Click on the OK button.

Your new slide(s) will appear and be listed in the Slide pop-up menu.

You can also use the New Slide button and pop-up menu to choose a new slide. Simply press and hold on the New Slide button and choose the master that you want to use.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides

Attaching a Master to a Slide

Filling Placeholders

Switching Masters

Unlinking Master Slides

Removing Masters from Slides

Editing Master Slides

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Templates


Attaching a Master to a Slide

If you create a slide without linking it to any master, but later decide that you want to, you can attach a master to it using the Slide/Switch Master... command.

To attach a master to an existing slide

1.	Choose Slide/Switch Master...

Switch Master dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the master you want from the Master drop-down list.

A preview of the selected master will appear in the Preview box.

You can load additional masters by clicking on the Open... button and selecting the master(s) you want in the Open Master Slide dialog box.

3.	Click on the Select button.

The selected master slide will be linked to the current slide, and will appear behind the other objects on the slide.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates


Filling Placeholders

The master slide has all the basics and the structure that you need for your slide. When you have loaded a master slide or template, you will need to add specific components to the slide to convey your information. You need to fill placeholders and place objects on the slide where you want them to appear. The placeholders are the only elements on a master slide that can be moved or resized from a presentation slide.

To fill placeholders

The slides will contain placeholders linked to master slides that you need to fill to customize the slide for your presentation.

1.	Double-click on the placeholder you want to fill.

Depending on the type of placeholder you double-clicked on, you will be able to enter text or data, or choose the object you want to fill the placeholder with.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates


Switching Masters

While you are working on a presentation, you can replace the master slide behind your presentation slide with a different master. Astound will automatically transfer your data into the appropriate placeholders on the new master.

To switch to a different master slide

1.	Choose Slide/Switch Master...

Switch Master dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Master drop-down list, select the master slide you want to use.

3.	Click on the Select button.

The new master will be attached to your slide, which will change to reflect the setup of the new master.

You can also load a new master by clicking on the Open... button and selecting the master you want to load into memory in the Open Master Slide dialog box. Clicking on the Remove button will remove the currently selected master from memory, and from the list.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates


Unlinking Master Slides

When you choose a master slide, it automatically becomes linked to the slide it accompanies. As long as the master is linked, it will appear with the slide every time you view it. You can move and resize placeholders and the objects they contain, but you cannot move anything else on a master slide (unless you specifically edit the master, which will affect all the slides containing that master). However, if you decide that you want to keep the master slide objects on your presentation slide, and you also want to edit them, then you can unlink the master.

To unlink a master slide

1.	Choose Slide/Unlink Master.

No changes are apparent, and the master slide objects are copied onto the presentation slide. You can now move and edit any of your slide objects, even those which were previously part of the master slide. Your presentation slide is no longer associated with the master. Any changes to the master slide now will have no effect on the presentation slide.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates


Removing a Master from Slides

You can remove a master slide and all of its attributes from your current slide.

To remove the master slide from the current slide

If you decide you don't want to use a master slide, you can remove it.

1.	Choose Slide/Remove Master.

Objects on your master slide will disappear from the current slide.


Using Templates

Templates serve as guides with which you can ensure design continuity within a presentation. Templates help ensure that styles, colors, and other attributes remain consistent throughout a presentation. Each template is a set of master slides. You can choose a master to accompany each slide.

Astound comes with a series of professionally designed templates. You can choose one of these, or you can create your own templates. You may want a template to include your company logo on each slide, or you may want to create a unique style and use it for all of your presentations.

Related Topics:

Applying a Template to an Existing Presentation

Creating Presentations with a Template

Switching Templates

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Master Slides


Applying a Template to an Existing Presentation

You may have started to create a presentation without using a template, and then realized that you have a template that would make your task easier. You can apply a template to an existing presentation.

To apply a template to an existing presentation within Astound

1.	Choose File/Template/Apply...

The Select Template dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the template you want to use.

3.	If you want to see how the template looks, enable the Preview checkbox.

4.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Master Slides


Creating a New Presentation with a Template

When you create a new presentation you can choose a template to base it on.

To create a new presentation with a template from within Astound

1.	Choose File/New...

The Select Template dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the template you want to use.

3.	If you want to see how the template looks, enable the Preview checkbox.

4.	Click on the OK button.

A slide based on the first master in the template is created, and displayed in the Astound main window.

If you click on the No Template button in the Select Template dialog box, you will be placed in the Astound main window without a template in place.

Related Topics:

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Master Slides


Switching Templates

Using a template allows you to set the tone of your presentation and maintain a consistent look for all presentations that you create with that template. You can change the look of a presentation by switching templates. If you use the same names for your master slides in both templates, Astound will attach the masters in the new template to the slides that had masters of the same name in the original template.

All objects that you placed on the slides themselves will still appear as you placed them. The background objects of the new masters will replace the background objects of the original masters. Any objects that filled placeholders from the original master will be used to fill placeholders from the new masters, where possible. Astound recognizes that different masters can have different types, locations, and numbers of placeholders, and uses the objects on a slide to fill them as logically as possible.

Nothing will be deleted from any slides when you switch templates. Even if a slide has no matching master in the new template, you will be asked if you want to add its original master to the new presentation template. If you don't, the slide will be left as it was, but it will no longer be linked to any master.

To switch templates

1.	Choose File/Template/Switch...

The Select Template dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the template you want to use.

3.	Click on the OK button.

Astound will convert each slide in the presentation to the new template.

Related Topics:

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Master Slides


Editing Master Slides

Astound lets you edit master slides at any time. To make changes to the contents of a master slide, choose Slide/Edit Master, and select the master you want to edit. Any changes made to a master slide will affect all slides that are based on that master.

To edit your master slide

1.	Choose Slide/Edit Master.

Edit Master submenu will appear.

2. 	Select the master you want to edit.

3.	Edit the master slide to suit your needs.

You can edit the objects on the master slide like you would any other objects.

4.	Return to your presentation by choosing Slide/Go To.

When you finish editing the master slide, use Slide/Go To and choose the presentation slide you want to return to.

Related Topics:

Using Templates

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Master Slides


Creating Masters and Templates

You can create your own masters and templates so that your presentations use your own design ideas or follow company standards. Since a template is made up of a set of masters, you must first create master slides and then save them as a template.

Masters may contain objects, text, pictures, actors, movies, charts, placeholders, and attributes such as color, size and font. You can set a background and choose a consistent color scheme for the template. When creating templates, you should keep in mind the importance of design continuity in a presentation.

Astound allows you to choose names for your master slides, making it easier to switch templates when you have masters of the same name in each template. If you choose a different template while you are creating a presentation, Astound matches slides with new masters if the new masters have the same name as the masters in the original template.

To create master slides

1.	Select Slide/Edit Master/New...

The Create Master dialog box will appear.

2.	Choose a name for your master slide from the Master Slide Name drop-down list.

3. 	Click on the OK button.

You will now have an empty master slide.

4.	Create any objects, and add any effects that you want permanently attached to your slide.

5.	Choose Slide/Add Placeholder and select a placeholder type.

6.	Set text attributes for any title or body text placeholders you have created.

Select the placeholder and choose the attributes you to want set from the Text menu. You can also click on the Text tool and click in the placeholder with the text cursor. You will enter text edit mode, in which you can set default text level formats that will define the text levels when you fill the placeholders.

7.	Edit the placeholders.

You move placeholders around the slide, size them by dragging handles, align them, center them and edit them so they appear the way you want.

8.	Use or save the master slide.

Related Topics:

Making Existing Slides into Masters

Saving Master Slides

Creating Templates

Using Templates

Using Master Slides


Making Existing Slides into Masters

You can make any slide from your presentation into a master slide.

To make an existing slide into a master

1.	When your slide looks the way you desire, choose Slide/Make Into Master....

Create Master dialog box will appear.

2.	Choose a name for your master slide.

Select a name from the Master Slide Name drop-down list. Consistent names will allow you to switch templates and have slides attached to the correct master slide.

3. 	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Templates

Using Master Slides


Saving Master Slides

You can export the master slide on its own so that it can be opened in other presentations.

To save a master for use with other presentations

1.	Choose Slide/Edit Master and the master name.

This will make the master slide the current slide.

2.	Choose File/Export/Current Slide...

The Save Slide As dialog box will appear.

3.	Type a name for the master slide.

4.	Click on the Save button.

The master will be saved on its own so that you can load it in other presentations.

Related Topics:

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Templates

Using Master Slides


Creating Templates

A template is a set of master slides. When you create a template from within an existing presentation, only the objects contained on the master slides will be included as part of the master within the template. Any slides that are not based on a master will not be included in the template, and any objects that are on the actual slide, but not the master, will not be included.

To create a template

1.	Design a set of master slides that you want to include in your template.

Only the master slides currently listed in the New Slide pop-up list will be included in the new template.

2.	When you are finished making all the master slides you want to include in your template, choose File/Template/Save....

The Save Template As dialog box will appear.

3.	In the Template File box, specify a location and a name for your template .

4.	If you want to embed any video, animation, sound, or other resources that you have used on the master slides, enable the Make self-contained checkbox.

When you save the template with this option, the information necessary to maintain the resources you have used will be embedded in the template file.

5.	If you want to save the template for use on Astound version 1.0 (Macintosh), enable the Save as Version 1.00 checkbox.

6.	Click on the OK button.

Only master slides are saved as part of the template. Presentation slides are not included in templates.

Related Topics:

Creating Masters and Templates

Using Templates

Using Master Slides


Creating an Outline

Once you are in the Outline View, you can enter the text you want on your slides. The Outline View will help you organize your presentation's content before organizing your slides' layout and design.

You may also have created the text for your slides in the Slide View or have imported text. In these cases, the Outline View is useful for rearranging text, editing large portions of the text, and viewing all of the text in the presentation.

The Outline View displays your text without any attributes; only the format levels are indicated by the amount of indentation at the beginning of each line of text. Each new slide has a Slide Marker in the margin of its first line of text. Each text block is surrounded by dark lines, and has a Text Block Marker in the margin. Each new point has its own Line Marker in the margin.

You can set the formatting levels for text from the Outline menu, using the Move Line Right and Move Line Left buttons, or by pressing the [Tab] key at the beginning of a line. There are four formatting levels that allow you to set standard text styles. Level 1 is intended as a title level, and levels 2 through 4 as bullet levels. There is also normal text which allows you to create text without any associated text format level  so that you can format each line of  normal text separately.

To add or enter text in the outline

1.	Click on the Outline View button.

The Outline View window will appear with your slides listed.

If you have already created some slides, they will be listed in the outline, and any text you've placed on them will be displayed. If you haven't created any slides yet, Astound will display a title placeholder for the first slide.

2.	If you are creating a new presentation, or entered the Outline View from a slide that does not contain text, type the title of the slide.

The placeholder text will be selected, and will automatically be replaced with the text you type. If you want a second line in your title, press [Ctrl][Enter] to start the second line. This creates a soft return allowing you to add more than one line of text to a title placeholder.

3.	Press [Enter].

If you start typing immediately after pressing [Enter] when the cursor is in the title, you will begin adding a title to a new slide. Typing immediately after pressing [Enter] in a bullet list will create a new bullet at the same level as the previous one.

If you press the [Tab] key after pressing [Enter] when the cursor is in the title, you will create a new text block on the slide and the text you type will be a bullet that uses format level one attributes. Pressing [Tab] immediately after pressing [Enter] in a bullet list will create a new bullet, one format level lower than the previous one.

4.	Type the line of text.

5.	Choose Outline/New Line or press [Enter] to start a new point on your slide.

This starts a new point at the current format level.

6.	Continue to type the text you want in that text block.

When you return to the Slide View, you can resize and reposition the text block.

Related Topics:

Changing the Format Level of a Line of Text

Specifying Format Levels in the Outline View

Adding Text Blocks in the Outline View

Adding Slides to Presentation in the Outline View

Moving Lines of Text

Moving Text Blocks

Collapsing Sections of Text

Displaying Collapsed Text

Reordering Slides in The Outline View

Text

Format Levels


Changing the Format Level of a Line of Text

There are several ways to change the format level of a point or sub-point in the Outline View.

·	The Promote and Demote commands in the Outline menu will move selected text in or out one format level. For example, Promote will change a level 3 point to a level 2 point. Demote will change the level 3 point to a level 4 point.

·	The Move Line Left and Move Line Right buttons change the indent level. Move Line Left will change a level 3 point to a level 2 point. The Move Line Right button will change the level 3 point to a level 4 point.

·	Pressing the [Tab] key at the beginning of the line. Each time you press the [Tab] key, you move one level deeper. For example, if you press the [Tab] key once, your text will be formatted with the attributes of text level 1. If you press the [Tab] key twice, you will have text level 2 attributes.

·	Pressing the [Shift] and [Tab] keys while the cursor is at the beginning of a line of text will move the line one format level upward.

Each indent level displayed in the Outline View corresponds to one of the text format levels.

Related Topics:

Specifying Format Levels in the Outline View

Creating an Outline

Format Levels

Text


Specifying Format Levels in the Outline View

You can specify format levels in the outline view in a variety of ways.

To specify a format level before typing a new point

1.	Ensure that your cursor is at the beginning of a new point.

2.	Change the format level with the menu, buttons, or [Tab] key combinations listed above.

To change the format level using the Outline menu or the buttons

1.	Select an existing line of text by clicking on the line marker at the beginning of the line.

You can select multiple lines of text. To select a range of text, hold down the [Shift] key and click on  the line markers for first and last line in the range to be selected.

2.	Choose Outline/Promote or Outline/Demote or click on the Move Line Left or Move Line Right button.

Each time you choose one of the commands, or click on one of the buttons the text will move left or right one indent level of its current position. Each indent level corresponds to a format level.

To change the format level using the [Tab] key

1.	Place the cursor at the beginning of a line of text.

2.	Press the [Tab] key to move the text up one level, press [Shift][Tab] to move the text down one format level.

Related Topics:

Changing the Format Level of a Line of Text

Creating an Outline

Format Levels

Text


Adding Text blocks in the Outline View

You can add text blocks to your slide from within the Outline View as well as adding slides to the presentation from this view. When you add a text block in the Outline View you may need to resize and place the text block once you return to the Slide View.

To add additional text blocks to a specific slide

You can create more than one text block on a slide while in Outline View.

1.	With the cursor at the end of the text block after which you want to add a new text block, choose Outline/New Block or press [Shift][Ctrl][Enter] at the same time.

A line will appear between text blocks on that slide and a text block marker will be located beside the first line in the new text block.

When you switch to Slide View you can reposition and resize the text blocks so that they appear on your slide the way you want them.

Related Topics:

Creating an Outline

Text


Adding Slides to Presentations in the Outline View

You can add slides to your presentation from within the Outline View.

To add another slide to the presentation

There are several ways to add slides to your presentation:

·	Press and hold on the New Slide pop-up menu at the bottom of the screen. You are able to choose a master or No Master to accompany your slide, although you won't be able to see the master in this view. You can always move from Outline View to Slide View to see how your slide looks.

··	Choose Outline/New Slide or press [Shift][Enter]. This will add a new slide after the current slide.

··	Choose Slide/New and specify the slides you want to create in the resulting dialog box.

·	With the cursor at the end of the title of the slide after which you want to add a new slide, press [Enter].

The new slide(s) will appear in your outline. This slide will be based on the 1 Column master if there is one in your template, and you did not specifically choose a master using the Slide/New command.

Related Topics:

Creating an Outline

Adding Slides

Slide Sorter


Moving Lines of Text

The Outline menu contains commands that allow you to move selected lines of text, or text blocks up or down through the presentation outline. You can move lines of text and text blocks anywhere in the presentation. You can also use the Move Line Up and Move Line Down buttons or drag the selected text to a new position. When you use either of these methods, any sub-points associated with the selected title or points will always move with the selected text.

The clipboard commands will allow you to cut or copy a portion of text and then paste it elsewhere within the text outline.

To move text using the Outline menu

1.	Select a line of text by clicking on the line marker at the beginning of the line.

The line of text and all of it's subpoints will be selected.

2.	Choose  Outline/Move Up or Outline/Move Down.

Any sub-points associated with the selected point(s) will always move with the selected text.

To move text with the Move Line Up and Move Line Down buttons

1.	Select a line of text by clicking on the line marker at the beginning of the line.

The line of text and all of it's subpoints will be selected.

2.	Click on the Move Line Up or Move Line Down button.

Any sub-points associated with the selected point(s) will always move with the selected text.

To move text by dragging it

1.	Select a line of text by clicking on the line marker at the beginning of the line.

The line of text and all of it's subpoints will be selected.

2.	Drag the line marker to where you want to move the line of text.

3.	When the text is in the right place, release the mouse button.

Any sub-points associated with the selected point(s) will always move with the selected text.

You can also use the Clipboard to cut, copy and paste text in your outline.

Related Topics:

Creating Outlines

Moving Blocks of Text

Text


Moving Text Blocks

You can move text blocks in the same way you move lines of text. Simply click on the text block marker for the text you want to move, instead of on a line marker. This will select the entire block of text for moving.

To remove a text block

1.	Click on the text block marker and press the [Delete] key.

The text block will be removed from the outline and the slide.

Related Topics:

Creating Outlines

Moving Lines of Text

Text


Collapsing Sections of Text

When you are creating a presentation with several slides, you may not be able to see all of the text in the Outline View. However, you can collapse slides so that only the title is visible, collapse the text so that only certain format levels are visible, or collapse some points so that their sub-points are not visible in the Outline View.

Normal text will always be displayed unless you collapse the entire slide so that only the slide title or if there is no title or title placeholder, the first point on the slide is shown.

To collapse text below a point

1.	Click on the line marker beside the line of text whose sub-points you want to hide.

The line of text will be selected.

2.	Choose Outline/Collapse or click on the Collapse button.

The sub-points for this point will be hidden and a + sign will be displayed in the line marker that you selected.

To collapse the presentation to slide titles only

1.	Click on the line marker for one of the slide titles.

2.	Choose Outline/Collapse All or click on the Collapse All button.

Only the slide titles will be displayed giving you an overview of your entire presentation.

To collapse all text below a certain format level in the presentation

1.	Choose Outline/Expand To Level and the lowest level that you want displayed.

All of the text at or above the selected level will be visible. For example, if you choose Outline/Expand To Level/Level 3 all text at level 1, 2, or 3 will be displayed, and only level 4 will be hidden. Any text without a format level (normal text) will still be displayed on the slide.

Related Topics:

Displaying Collapsed Text

Creating Outlines

Text


Displaying Collapsed Text

There are several ways to redisplay collapsed text. You can display all hidden text or only some of it, leaving some text still hidden.

To re-display text below a single point

1.	Click on the line marker for the point you want to expand.

Line markers with hidden sub-points will have a + sign on their line markers.

2.	Choose Outline/Expand or click on the Expand button.

You can also double click on any line marker that has a + sign on it to display the hidden sub-points below this point.

To re-display all hidden text

1.	Choose Outline/Expand All or click on the Expand All button.

All text in your presentation will be displayed in the Outline View.

Related Topics:

Creating Outlines

Collapsing Text

Text


Reordering Slides in the Outline View

You can rearrange your slides by clicking on the slide marker, and then dragging it to a different position in your presentation. If you have Outline/Auto Renumber enabled, the slides will be renumbered to reflect their new order automatically. If you do not have this command enabled, the slides will retain their original numbering.

Related Topics:

Creating Outlines

Reordering Slides in the Slide Sorter


Menus

File Menu

Edit Menu

View Menu

Slide Menu

Object Menu

Text Menu

Chart Menu

Window Menu


Keyboard Shortcuts

Drawing Objects

Selecting Objects

Moving, Resizing, Cropping, and Distorting Objects

Dialog Boxes

Text Attributes

Timelines

Scrolling

Playback


File Menu

New...

Open...

Save

Save As...

Revert To Saved

Template

Import

Export

Slideshow

Page Setup...

Print...

Printer Setup...

Exit


Edit Menu

Undo

Cut

Copy

Paste

Paste Special...

Clear

Select All

Duplicate

Links

Insert OLE Object

Object

Purge Unused Resources...


View Menu

Slide View

Outline View

Sorter View

Show Frames

Show Rulers

Show Paths

Show Grid

Snap To Grid

Preferences

Magnification


Slide Menu

New...

Name...

Duplicate

Delete

Dimensions...

Color Schemes...

Background

Duration...

Transition...

Set Next Slide...

Go To

Add Placeholder

Edit Master

Switch Master...

Make Into Master

Remove Master

Unlink Master


Object Menu

Information

Transition...

Path Animation...

Interaction...

Edit...

Resize...

Display...

Line

Enhance Color

Layer

Align

Center on Slide

Flip

Group

Ungroup

Convert to Bitmap...


Text Menu

Type Specs...

Typeface

Size

Style

Color

Format Text Levels...

Remove Overrides...

Paragraph Spacing

Character Spacing

Line Spacing

Alignment

Show Text Rulers

Find

Spell Check


Chart Menu

New Chart...

Edit Chart...

Edit Datasheet...

Edit Animation...

Chart Type

Format

Define Pictographs...

Edit Pictographs...

Auto Replot


Window Menu

Timeline

Speaker Notes

Datasheet

Sound Editor

Library


Basics

Opening a Presentation within Astound

Creating a New Presentation

Moving Between Views

Playing Slides

Setting Slide Previews

Moving Between Slides

View Magnifications

Setting Slide Sizes

Adding Slides

Page Setup

Printing

Renaming Slides

Slide Sorter

Saving

Reverting to A Saved Copy

Exiting


Backgrounds

Adding A Solid Color Background

Creating a Gradient Background

Creating Multi-Color Gradients

Adding a Pattern Background

Using a Picture as Your Background

Removing Backgrounds


Charts

Creating a New Datasheet

Selecting Data to be Charted

Charting Options

Chart Options Dialog Box

Chart Formats

Chart Types

Setting Chart Display Options

Setting Chart Text Specifications

Setting Attributes for Numbers on Charts

Adding a Legend

Changing Chart Colors

Setting Segment Attributes

Three-Dimensional Charts

Defining Timing for Animated Charts

Selecting Entry and Exit Distribution for Charts

Chart Transitions

Adding Pauses to the Chart's Entry

Editing Charts

Replotting Data

Editing Chart Options

Replotting Charts Automatically

Creating Pictographs

Creating Tables from your Datasheet


Color and Object Attributes

Enhancing the Color of a Range of Slides

Color Schemes

Selecting Colors

Using the Color Mixer

Using the Color Spectrum

Using the Eyedropper

Displaying Object Fills

Solid Colors

Filling Objects Using the Object Display Dialog Box

Patterns

Creating and Editing a Gradient Fill

Creating Multi-Color Fills

Coloring Text

Color Enhancement

Borders

Shadows

Line Weights

Arrows


Distribution and Playback

Purging Unused Resources

Saving Presentations for Distribution

Options Available During Playback

Setting Notation Pens within Astound

Drawing with Notation Pens

Switching Notation Pens

Disabling the Notation Pen Option During Playback

Pausing Presentations

Playing Slides out of Order

Stopping a Presentation


Drawing

Drawing Tools

Selecting Drawing Tools

Drawing Shapes

Drawing Squares

Drawing Rounded Squares

Drawing Circles

Drawing Freehand

Drawing Irregualr Polygons

Setting Sides and Points on Regular Polygons and Stars

Modifier Keys


Editing Objects

Rulers

Grids

Snap To Grid

Setting Grid Spacing

Selecting Objects

Aligning Objects

Centering Objects

Moving Objects

Nudging Objects

Layering Objects

Grouping Objects

Using the Clipboard

Removing Objects

Duplicating Objects

Resizing and Reshaping Objects

Cropping Objects

Distorting Shapes

Flipping Shapes

Converting Objects to Bitmaps

Undo Command


Masters and Templates

Using Master Slides

Creating Slides with a Master

Attaching a Master to a Slide

Filling Placeholders

Switching Masters

Unlinking Masters

Removing Masters from Slides

Using Templates

Applying a Template to an Existing Presentation

Creating a New Presentation with a Template

Switching Templates

Editing Master Slides

Creating Masters and Templates

Making Existing Slides into Masters

Saving master Slides

Creating Templates


OLE Object Linking and Embedding
OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

Embedding Objects in Astound

Embedding Objects with the Insert OLE Object Command

Embedding Objects with the Paste Special Command

Linking Objects

Updating Linked Objects

Breaking a Link

Deleting a Link

Fixing a Broken Link

Editing Linked or Embedded Objects


Selecting

Selecting Objects

Deselecting Objects

Layering Objects

Grouping Objects

Selecting Objects within a Group


Sound

Loading Sounds into Memory

Adding Sound to a Slide

Importing Sounds Directly to a Slide

Sound Timelines

Looping a Sound

Previewing Sound

Renaming a Sound

Removing Sounds from Slides

Using Sounds from Compact Disc

The Sound Editor

Opening and Saving Sound Files

Changing Magnification in the Sound Editor

Looping

Playing Sounds

Editing Sound

Adding Markers to Sound

Replacing Sound with Silence

Inserting Silence in a Sound

Adding an Echo to Sound

Overlays

Mixing Sound

Doubling the Amplitudeof Sound

Halving the Amplitude of Sound

Switching Channels

Changing Sample Resolution of a Sound

Changing the Channel Status of a Sound

Changing the Sample Rate of a Sound File

Recording Sound


Text

Creating Text Blocks

Adding Text to a Text Block

Importing Text

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Changing Text Attributes

Using the Clipboard with Text

Format Levels

Text Transitions

Finding Text

Replacing Text

Spell Checking


Transitions

Transitions Between Slides

Object Transitions

Adding Transitions to Objects with a Group

Changing Transition Attributes for Multiple Objects

Text Transitions

Object Paths


Creating Text Blocks

All text is placed in text blocks. When the Text tool is selected, you can drag out a text block to define the placement for your text. Text blocks can be resized at any time and the text will reflow to adjust to the new text block size.

You can type text right on the slide, or enter it in the Outline View. You can also import ASCII or RTF text. The text will appear as one text block. You can then apply format levels to the text, and use the Outline View to break the text into different text blocks and move it onto different slides.

To create a text block

1.	Select the Text tool from the Tool palette.

The pointer will change to an I-beam.

2.	Press the mouse button and drag the I-beam to create a bounding box that will hold your text.

3.	Release the mouse button.

The text ruler will appear if you have Show Text Ruler enabled in the Text menu. Now you can enter text in the text block.

As an alternative to dragging out a text block, you can click anywhere within the document window to place an automatically generated text block, then adjust the size of the text block once you have typed your text.

Click on the Place Video tool. Related Topics:

Creating Text Blocks

Adding Text to a Text Block

Importing Text

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Changing Text Attributes

Using the Clipboard with Text

Format Levels

Finding Text

Spell Checking


Adding Text to a Text Block

Text blocks act much like a word processor.

To enter text

1.	Type the text you want in the block.

2.	Press [Enter] when you finish a paragraph.

As soon as you press [Enter], you start a new paragraph.

You can add format levels to your text as you type it. For more information, see Specifying Format Levels, later in this chapter.

3.	Click on the Pointer tool or press the [Esc] key to end your text block.

Related Topics:

Creating Text Blocks

Importing Text

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Changing Text Attributes

Using the Clipboard with Text

Format Levels

Finding Text

Spell Checking


Importing Text

To import text

1.	Choose File/Import/Text...

The Import Text dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the text file that you want ot import.

You can import ASCII and RTF text files. ASCII files will retain only the text, while RTF files will retain some of the text formatting, such as bolding, italicizing and the font.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The text will be placed in a single text block on the current slide. You can apply format levels to the text, and use the Outline View to move the text between slides and break it into text blocks.

To select text within a text block

1.	Select the Text tool.

2.	Drag the pointer over the text you want selected.

The selected text will be highlighted. You can now edit or apply typographical attributes to the selected text.

Creating Text Blocks

Adding Text to a Text Block

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Changing Text Attributes


Using the Text Ruler

If the Text/Show Text Ruler command is enabled, the text ruler will be visible for any new text blocks you create or for any text block selected with the Text tool. The text ruler allows you to set margins for your text block, set format levels, set tabs to specify where the format levels will begin, and also to specify the justification of your text.

To display the Text Ruler

1.	Enable Text/Show Text Ruler.

When this command is enabled, a text ruler will appear whenever you create a new text block or select an existing one for editing.

Related Topics:

Creating Text Blocks

Adding Text to a Text Block

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Changing Text Attributes

Spell Checking


Setting Text Margins

To set margins

1.	With the Text tool, create or select a text block.

2.	Ensure that the Text/Show Text Ruler command is enabled.

3. 	If there is text in the text block, select the paragraph of text for which you want to set margins.

If you do not select the paragraphs for which you want to set margins, only the paragraph currently containing the I-beam cursor will be affected.

If you set margins before adding text to the text block, your margins will be the default used for the text block.

4.	Drag the left margin markers to where you want the lines of text to begin.

Any selected text will reflow to reflect the new left margin.

5.	If you want to create a hanging indent, drag the top left margin marker.

By moving the top left margin marker you can cause the selected paragraph or all new paragraphs to be indented, or to begin with a hanging indent, with the first line starting to the left or right of the rest of the paragraph.

6.	Drag the right margin marker to where you want the lines of text to end.

Related Topics:

Adding Text to a Text Block

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment


Setting Tabs

To set tabs

1.	With the Text tool, create or select a text block.

2.	Ensure that the Text/Show Text Ruler command is enabled.

3. 	If there is text contained in the text block, select the paragraph of text for which you want to set tabs.

If there is text in the text block and you do not select the paragraphs you want to affect, only the paragraph currently containing the text cursor will be affected.

If you set tabs before adding text to the text block, your tabs will be the default tabs used for text in the text block.

4.	Drag a tab arrow to where you want to insert the tab.

There are four types of tabs available that allow you to align the left edge of the text with the tab, center the text under the tab, align the right edge of the text with the tab, and align decimals with the tab.

Related Topics:

Using Tabs with Format Levels

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Text Alignment

Using the Clipboard with Text

Format Levels


Using Tabs with Format Levels

Tabs that you set can be used internally within a paragraph; however, pressing the [Tab] key at the beginning of a paragraph will change the format level of the text in the paragraph to the next lower format level (i.e. a level 2 bullet would become a level 3 bullet). Pressing [Shift][Tab] at the beginning of a line of text will change the line to the next higher format level (i.e. a level 3 bullet would become a level 2 bullet).

If you want to set a normal tab at the beginning of a line of text without changing the format level, type a space before pressing the [Tab] key.

Related Topics:

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Format Levels


Text Alignment

Astound provides text alignment commands. You can align your text with the left, or right margin, center it, or fully justify it between both margins. Alignment can be set from the Text menu or the tool bar along the top of the Slide View window.You can specify default alignments for the text levels using the Format Text Levels... command in the Text menu.

To align text using the Text menu

1.	With the Text tool, create or select a text block.

2. 	If there is text contained in the text block, select the paragraph of text you want to justify.

If there is text in the text block and you do not select the paragraphs you want to affect, only the paragraph currently containing the text cursor will be affected.

If you set a justification before adding text to the text block, the justification will be the default used for text in the text block.

3.	Choose Text/Alignment.

The Alignment submenu will appear.

Left: Aligns your text with the left margin.

Center: Centers each line of text within the margins.

Right: Aligns your text with the right margin.

Justified: Aligns your text between both the left and right margins, adding space between words where necessary.

Related Topics:

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Changing Text Attributes


Format Levels

While you can do everything you want with Astound's normal text, there are also four text format levels that allow you to create text styles to maintain consistency throughout your presentation.

The four format levels are designed as a slide title and three levels of bullets, however the format levels are fully editable and can be changed to reflect your needs. The default levels are:

Level 1: Title text.

Level 2: Major points. Each paragraph entered in this level will start with a default round bullet.

Level 3: Minor points. Each paragraph entered in this level is indented from the level 2 text, and begins with a different bullet from that of level 2.

Level 4: Sub-points. Each paragraph entered in this level is indented from level 3 text, and begins with a third type of bullet.

Normal text: This is not a format level, but allows for free form portions of text. You can set default attributes for this text or use different settings for each occurrence.

Related Topics:

Specifying a Format Level

Changing Format Levels

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment


Specifying a Format Level

Format levels are applied by pressing the [Tab] key at the beginning of a line of text. Pressing the [Tab] key once will apply the level 1 style to the paragraph of text. Pressing the [Tab] key twice will apply the level 2 style to the paragraph. Each tab inserted before the line of text will move the paragraph one level deeper. If there are more than four tabs at the beginning of a line, the paragraph will begin to indent, keeping the attributes of level 4. Pressing the [Shift] and [Tab] keys will revert the text format to the previous level. You can choose the desired level from the text ruler.

To format existing text

1.	Click at the beginning of the line of text to which you want to apply a format level.

The text cursor will appear in front of the text.

2.	Specify a format level by clicking on the format level icon on the text ruler, press the [Tab] key to go a format level deeper, or press the [Shift] and [Tab] key to move the text up one level.

The appropriate format level will be applied to any text you type.

Related Topics:

Format Levels

Changing Format Levels

Removing Text Formating that is Not Part of the Format Level

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment


Changing Format Levels

There are two ways to change format levels:

·	Place the text cursor within the paragraph you want to change and click on one of the format level buttons on the text ruler.

·	Place the text cursor at the front of the paragraph you want to change and then press the [Tab] key to apply the next deeper format level. Pressing [Shift][Tab] when the text cursor is at the front of a paragraph will apply the previous format level to the paragraph.

To edit text attributes for a format level

1.	Choose Text/Format Text Levels...

The Format Text Levels dialog box will appear. You can also double click on a format level button in the text ruler to display this dialog box. The dialog box will display the attributes for the format level you selected.

2.	Select the radio button for the format level that you wish to edit the attributes of.

3.	Choose the attributes you want to change by enabling their checkboxes.

All of the attributes have checkboxes so that you can specify what changes you want to have an affect on the selected text. The fields will display the default for the text level, but since you can have text that has been changed from the default, the contents of any field are not applied to all text unless the corresponding checkbox is enabled. This allows you to easily overwrite some additional formatting you have applied to text, while leaving other additional attributes in place. For example, you may have emphasized a few word within a couple of points by making it a large point size and changing its color to red. You can change all of the text back to its original point size, but leave the color changes by enabling the Size checkbox and leaving the default point size displayed in the field, but not enabling the Color checkbox.

The changes you make will appear in the preview box.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The dialog box will disappear and your changes will be applied to all text in your presentation with the selected format level.

Related Topics:

Format Levels

Specifying Format Levels

Removing Text Formatting that is Not Part of the Format Level

Using the Text Ruler

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment


Changing Attributes for Selected Text

You can easily set attributes for a single word or line of text without altering any of your format level attributes. You can access the Type Specs dialog box and set several attributes at once, or set single attributes directly from the Text menu. Setting attributes in either of these ways without text selected will set the default attributes for normal text, but will not affect the text formatting levels.

To set attributes using the Type Specs dialog box

1.	With the Text tool, highlight the text you want to select, or with the Pointer tool, click on the text block you want to affect.

If you select a portion of text by dragging over it, any text changes will affect only the selected text. If you select a text block by clicking on it, the text attribute changes will affect all of the text in that text block.

2.	Choose Text/Type Specs or double-click on the Text tool.

The Type Specs dialog box will appear.

3.	Click on the OK button.

Your changes will be applied to the selected text.

Related Topics:

Using the Text Ruler

Removing Text Formating that is Not Part of the Format Level

Setting Text Margins

Setting Tabs

Text Alignment

Format Levels


Using the Clipboard with Text

Astound uses the standard Clipboard to cut, copy, and paste text quickly and easily. You can copy and paste text to and from other applications and your Astound presentations.

To remove text

There are three ways to remove text:

·	Select the text and choose Edit/Cut. This option places the text in the Clipboard so it can be pasted to another location, into another slide, or into another application.

·	Select the text and choose Edit/Clear.

·	Select the text and press [Delete]. Using any of these methods, the text will be deleted, but you can recover the most recent deletion by selecting Edit/Undo.

To copy text

1.	Select the text and choose Edit/Copy.

This option places a copy of the text in the Clipboard so that it can be pasted to another location, into another slide, or into another application.

To paste text

1.	Place the cursor where you want to paste the text that has been cut or copied to the clipboard.

2.	Choose Edit/Paste.

The text will appear at the cursor position.

Related Topics:

Importing Text

Changing Text Attributes

Spell Checking


Removing Text Formatting that is not Part of a Format Level

There will be times when you will want to add text attributes on top of a format level. For example, you may want to bold a phrase in a bullet point to make it stand out, or change the color of a word wherever it appears within your text. When you need to get rid of some or all of these attributes that have been added on top of format levels, you can do so using the Text/Remove Overrides... command.

To remove modified text attributes

1.	Select the text from which you want to remove attributes.

2.	Choose Text/Remove Overrides...

The Remove Overrides dialog box will appear.

3.	Choose the attributes you want to remove.

4.	Click on the Remove button.

The specified override attributes will be removed.


Finding Text

Since you may want to look at or edit the same text in several different places throughout your presentation, Astound has Find and Replace commands to quickly find an instance of text, and/or replace it with something else. If you are searching for a specific block of text, you can use the Find text command. If you want to replace a specific block of text, you can use the Replace text command.

To find text

1.	Choose Text/Find/Find...

The Find Text dialog box will appear.

2.	In the Find What edit box, type the text that you want to search for.

3.	Choose what you want to search by enabling the appropriate radio button in the Search box.

4.	Choose what direction you want to search.

5.	Enable the Case Sensitive checkbox to find the exact text that you typed in the Find dialog box.

The Case Sensitive option causes Astound to search only for the exact case (upper and/or lower ) that you entered in the Find edit box. If you disable this, Astound will find the selection no matter what the case.

6.	Click on the Find button.

The text you wanted to find will be highlighted on the slide. If the text cannot be found, a message box will appear telling you so.

If you want to find the same text again, choose Text/Find/Find Again.

Related Topics:

Using the Clipboard with Text

Finding Occurences of Selected Text

Finding and Replacing Text

Spell Checking


Finding Occurences of Selected Text

If you select text on your screen and then choose Find Selection, Astound will search for the next occurrence of the selection within the specified parameters (slide or presentation).

To find a selection

1.	Highlight the selection that you want to look for elsewhere.

2.	Choose Text/Find/Find Selection.

The Find Text dialog box will appear with the text you highlighted placed in the Find What edit Box.

3.	Choose what you want to search by enabling the appropriate radio button.

4.	Choose what direction you want to search.

5.	Enable the Case Sensitive checkbox to find the exact text that is specified in the Find dialog box.

The Case Sensitive option causes Astound to search only for the exact case (upper and/or lower ) of the text in the Find edit box. If you disable this, Astound will find the selection no matter what the case.

6.	Click on the Find button.

The text block you wanted to find will be highlighted on the slide. If the text is not found, a message box will appear telling you so.

If you want to find the next occurrence of the text block, choose Text/Find/Find Again.

Related Topics:

Using the Clipboard with Text

Finding Text

Finding and Replacing Text

Spell Checking


Finding and Replacing Text

To replace text

1.	Choose Text/Find/Replace...

The Find And Replace dialog box will appear.

2.	Type the text you want to find in the Find What edit box.

3.	Type the text with which you want to replace it in the Replace With edit box.

4.	Choose where you want to search by enabling the appropriate radio button.

5.	Choose what direction you want to search.

6.	Enable the Case checkboxes if you want to find the exact case, and/or if you want to maintain the case of the text found.

7.	Enable the Confirm replace option if you want to be notified before each occurrence is changed.

8.	Click on the replacement action you want to use.

When you are done, if you want to find and replace another occurrence of the same text, select Text/Find/Replace Again.

Related Topics:

Using the Clipboard with Text

Finding Text

Finding Occurences of Selected Text

Spell Checking


Spell Checking Selected Text

 Astound includes a spell checker that allows you to check a section or all of your text. You can check a specific portion of text, a single slide, or the entire presentation.

To spell check selected text

1.	Select the word or range of text you want to check by holding down the mouse button while dragging across your desired text with the Text tool.

2.	Choose Text/Spell Check/Selected Text.

If the selection is spelled correctly, a dialog box states that the spell check is completed. Click on OK to continue working on your presentation.

If the word is spelled incorrectly, the Spelling dialog box appears with any suggestions for the correct spelling displayed in the list box.

You can select one of the following:

You can also type the correct spelling in the edit box at the top of the dialog box. If you are unsure of whether you have spelled the word correctly, click on the Recheck button to recheck the spelling of the word.

3.	When the spell check is finished, click on Continue to return to your slide.


Spell Checking a Text Block

To spell check the current text block

1.	With the Pointer tool, select the text block.

2.	Choose the Text/Spell Check/Current Object.

If all the words in the block are spelled correctly, a dialog box states that the spell check is completed. Click on the OK button to continue.

If a word is spelled incorrectly, the Spelling dialog box will appear with the options listed in the previous section.

The spell checker will continue through the text block until you cancel the spell check or until you are notified of all the words not in the dictionary.


Spell Checking a Slide

To spell check all text on a slide

1.	Choose the Text/Spell Check/Entire Slide.

If all the words are spelled correctly, a dialog box states that the spell check is completed. Click on the OK button to continue.

If a word is spelled incorrectly, the Spelling dialog box will appear with the options listed in the previous section.

The spell checker will continue through the slide until you cancel the spell check or until you are notified of all the words not in the dictionary.


Spell Checking a Presentation

To spell check the entire presentation

1.	Choose the Text/Spell Check/Entire Presentation.

If all the words are spelled correctly, a dialog box states that the spell check is completed. Click on the OK button to continue.

If a word is spelled incorrectly, the Spelling dialog box will appear with the options listed in the previous section.

The spell checker will continue through the presentation until you cancel the spell check or until you are notified of all the words not in the dictionary.


Loading User Dictionaries

You may want to load a previously saved user dictionary other than the default one that Astound includes. For example, you may want to load a user dictionary that includes all of your company's acronyms. You can have multiple user dictionaries loaded at once.

To load a user dictionary

1.	Choose Text/Spell Check/Load Dictionary...

The Load User Dictionary dialog box will appear.

2.	Choose the dictionary you want to load.

3.	Click on the OK button.


Saving User Dictionaries

If you added a lot of new terms to a dictionary, you may want to save them for next time. Saving a dictionary creates a new user dictionary, containing any words in the current user dictionary.

To save a user dictionary

1.	Choose Text/Spell Check/Save Dictionary...

The Save User Dictionary dialog box will appear.

2.	Type a name for your dictionary in the Filename edit box.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The user dictionary is saved.


Drawing Tools

There are 20 tools which can be found in the Drawing Tool palette. The palette can be accessed by pressing and holding the mouse button on the current Drawing tool, which is located in the Tool palette.

When you have finished drawing a shape, it will be filled with the default attributes. For example, it will fill with the currently selected color, gradient or pattern if the Interior checkbox is selected in the Object Display dialog box.

The Rectangle tool: Draws rectangles and squares.

The Rounded Rectangle tool: Draws rectangles and squares with  rounded corners.

The Oblong tool: Draws objects with two straight sides and two rounded sides.

The Ellipse tool: Draws oval or circular objects.

The Arc tool: Draws arc and wedge shapes.

The Line tool: Draws straight lines in any direction.

The Polygon tool: Draws polygons with many angles and sides.

The Freehand tool: Draws any shape in a freehand manner similar to drawing with a pencil.

The Speech Balloon tool: Draws speech balloon shapes.

The Regular Polygon tool:  Draws multi-sided, symmetrical figures with a specified number of sides.

The Star tool: Draws symmetrical, star-shaped figures with a specified number of points.

The Parallelogram tool: Draws objects with four sides and two sets of parallel lines.

The Right Angle Triangle tool: Draws triangles with a 90 degree angle.

The Arrow tools: Draw 7 different types of arrows. These include a corner arrow, directional arrows and curved arrows.

Related Topics:

SelectingDrawingTools

DrawingShapes


Modifier Keys

Astound provides keyboard modifiers that can be used with the drawing tools to draw your shapes in different ways.

[Scroll Lock] key: Holding this key down before you select a drawing tool causes the drawing tool to remain selected until you select another tool, saving you from having to constantly re-select the same tool.

[Ctrl] key: Holding this key down while you draw a shape allows you to draw the shape from the center. The point where you start drawing becomes the middle of your shape.

[Shift] key: Holding this key down while you draw a line or polygon constrains lines to 45 degree angles. Holding this key down while you draw a rectangle, rounded rectangle, or ellipse,  constrains rectangles to squares, and ellipses to circles.

[Alt] key: Holding down this tool after you begin drawing the shape will allow you to move the shape before ending the drawing action.


Selecting Drawing Tools

In general, the shapes in the Drawing tools are drawn in the same manner, freehand and irregular polygons being the exceptions. Some of the tools have special features such as constraining, which can create a perfect circle or square, or changing the number of points on a star. When a drawing tool is displayed in the main palette, it may have three dots (...) on it. This means that a dialog box will be displayed when you double-click on the tool.

To select a drawing tool

1.	Position the pointer on the Drawing tool in the Tool palette.

The Drawing tool will display the last drawing tool used.

2.	Press and hold the mouse button.

The Drawing Tool palette will appear.

3.	Drag the pointer onto the shape you want and release the mouse button.

The selected tool will be displayed in the main tool palette.

If you are going to be drawing several objects with the same shape, press the [Scroll Lock] key before selecting the drawing tool. This keeps the tool selected until you press the [Scroll Lock] key again or select another tool.

Related Topics:

Drawing Tools

Selecting Drawing Tools


Drawing Shapes

Most of the drawing tools use the same basic procedure to draw an object.

To draw a shape

1.	Select a shape tool from the Drawing Tool palette.

The pointer changes to a crosshair.

2. 	Position the crosshair where you want the shape to begin.

3.	Drag the crosshair to where you want the shape to end.

4.	Release the mouse button to set the shape.

If you are using the Arc tool and filling the arc by enabling the Interior checkbox in the Object Display dialog box, Astound will create a wedge shape with a 90 degree angle.

Related Topics:

DrawingTools

Selecting Drawing Tools

Modifier Keys

Drawing Squares

Drawing Rounded Squares

Drawing Circles

Drawing Freehand

Drawing Irregular Polygons

Setting Sides and Points on Regular Polygons and Stars


Drawing Squares

You can use the Rectangle tool to draw perferct squares.

To draw a square

1.	Select the Rectangle tool from the Drawing Tool palette.

2.	Position the crosshair where you want to place a corner of the square.

3.	Hold down the [Shift] key and drag the crosshair.

The shape will be constrained to a square instead of a rectangle.

4.	Release the mouse button to finish drawing the square.

Related Topics:

Modifier Keys

Drawing Shapes


Drawing Rounded Squares

You can use the Rounded Rectangle tool to draw perferct rounded squares.

To draw a rounded square

1.	Select the Rounded Rectangle tool from the Drawing Tool palette.

2.	Position the crosshair where you want to place a corner of the square.

3.	Hold down the [Shift] key and drag the crosshair.

The shape will be constrained to a rounded square instead of a rounded rectangle.

4.	Release the mouse button to finish drawing the rounded square.

Related Topics:

Modifier Keys

Drawing Shapes


Drawing Circles

You can use the Ellipse tool to draw perferct circles.

To draw a circle

1.	Select the Ellipse tool from the Drawing Tool palette.

2.	Position the crosshair where you want the circle to start.

3.	Hold down the [Shift] key as you drag the crosshair.

This will constrain your ellipse to a circle.

4.	Release the mouse button to finish drawing the circle.

Related Topics:

Modifier Keys

Drawing Shapes


Drawing Freehand

The Freehand tool allows you to draw as you would with a pencil.

To draw a freehand shape

1.	Select the Freehand tool from the Drawing Tool palette

2.	Position the crosshair where you want the shape to begin.

3.	Press down the mouse button and drag the crosshair around the screen to create your object.

4.	Release the mouse button to finish drawing.

Unless you release the mouse button directly on the starting point, a straight line will be drawn to link the end and start points of the shape.

To keep your freehand object from closing at the end, press the [Ctrl] key when you click the mouse for the first time in your drawing. If you are displaying the interior of the object, your shape will look like it is closed because the interior will be showing.

Related Topics:

Modifier Keys

Drawing Shapes


Drawing Irregular Polygons

The irregular polygon allows you to draw open or closed shapes with any number of straight sides..

To draw an irregular polygon

1.	Select the Polygon tool from the Drawing Tool palette.

2.	Place the crosshair and click once to create the starting point.

3.	Move the crosshair and click again.

A straight line will be drawn between the two points.

4.	Each time you click on the mouse button, you set a corner on the polygon.

5.	Double-click when you are finished.

A straight line will be drawn between the first and last points to complete the shape.

To keep the polygon from closing at the end, press the [Ctrl] key when you click the mouse to place the first point in your drawing. If you are displaying the interior of the object, your shape will look like it is closed because the interior will be displayed.

Related Topics:

Modifier Keys

Drawing Shapes


Setting Sides and Points on Regular Polygons and Stars

You can specify the number of sides on a regular polygon, and the number of points on a star. You can have between 3 and 36 sides or points.

You can change the number of points in the star or sides on the polygon to between 3 and 9 by pressing a number between 3 and 9 on your keyboard while you are dragging out the shape.

To change the number of sides in the polygon

1.	Select the Regular Polygon tool.

2.	Before drawing the polygon, double-click on the Regular Polygon tool in the tool palette.

The Number of Sides dialog box will appear.

3.	Enter the number of sides for your polygon.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The dialog box will disappear and you can draw your polygon with the specified number of sides.

To change the number of points in the star

You can change how many points a star has.

1.	Select the Star tool.

2.	Before drawing the star, double-click on the Star tool in the tool palette.

The Number of Points dialog box will appear.

3.	Enter the number of points for your star.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The dialog box will disappear and you can draw your star with the specified number of points.

Related Topics:

Drawing Objects

Modifier Keys

Selecting Drawing Tools


Adding a Solid Color Background

Adding a solid color to your background can make your presentation more appealing without distracting from other elements on the slide.

To add a solid color

1.	Choose Slide/Background/Solid Color...

The Solid Color Background dialog box will appear. The colors in the current color scheme will be displayed in the Colors box.

2.	In the Colors box, click on a color to select it as your slide background.

The color you select will be displayed in the Preview box.

Clicking on the Eyedropper, Color Mixer, or Color Spectrum button will give you access to the different methods of selecting and creating colors that are not in the current color scheme.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The dialog box will disappear and your color selection will become the background of your slide.

Related Topics:

Creating a Gradient Background

Adding A Patterned Background

Using a Picture as a Background

Removing Backgrounds


Creating a Gradient Background

A gradient is a graduated blend of two or more colors. You can create an original look for the background of your slide by adding graduated colors. You can control the colors in the gradient, and the direction in which the gradient flows.

To create a simple gradient background

1.	Choose Slide/Background/Gradient...

The Gradient Background dialog box will appear.

2.	Click on the Start Color button.

A Color Scheme pop-up window will appear.

3.	Select a start color from the Colors box.

The previews in the Type box, the End Color band, and the Start Color button will change to reflect your selection.

Clicking on the Eyedropper, Color Mixer, or Color Spectrum button in the Color Scheme pop-up will give you access to the different methods of selecting and creating colors that are not in the current color scheme.

4.	Select an end color from the End Color band.

To select an end color, you can either click the mouse at the desired color on the band, or drag the indicator along the band. The previews in the Type box will change to reflect the position of the pointer.

5.	Select the direction of the gradient by clicking on one of the buttons in the Direction box.

You can cause your background gradient to blend out from a selected object by selecting the object before choosing the Slide/Background/Gradient... command. In the Gradient Background dialog box, select the Burst from Center direction and enable Burst From Selected Object.

6.	Select the type of gradient by clicking on one of the previews in the Type box.

7.	Click on the OK button when you are finished.

Your gradient becomes the background of your slide.

Related Topics:

Gradient Background Dialog Box

Creating Multi-Color Backgrounds

Adding a Solid Color Background

Adding A Patterned Background

Using a Picture as a Background

Removing Backgrounds


Creating MultiColor Backgrounds
Creating Multi-Color Backgrounds

You can use several colors in your gradient background.

To create a multi-color gradient for a slide background

1.	Choose Slide/Background/Gradient...

The Gradient Background dialog boxwill appear.

2.	Select the direction of the gradient by clicking on one of the buttons in the Direction box.

You can cause your background gradient to blend out from a selected object by selecting the object before choosing the Slide/Background/Gradient command. In the Gradient Background dialog box, select the Burst from Center direction and enable Burst From Selected Object.

3.	Select the type of gradient by clicking on one of the previews in the Type box.

4.	Click on the Multi-Color... button.

The Multi-Color Gradient dialog box will appear.

5.	If there is already a gradient displayed and you don't want to use the colors it contains, click on the Clear All button.

6.	Select the colors you want to use by double-clicking on them in the Colors box in the order that you want them to appear in the gradient.

7.	If you want to use a color that is not in the current color scheme, click on the Eyedropper, Color Mixer, or Color Spectrum button.

8. 	If you want the gradient colors dithered, enable Dither Colors checkbox.

Color dithering will result in a smoother blend of colors in the gradient. If this checkbox is disabled, your blend colors will appear in more distinct bands.

9.	If you want to soften the gradient by using intermediate colors, enable the Use Intermediate Colors checkbox.

When you use intermediate colors, extra colors are added to the gradient, creating a more gradual transition between blend colors. If this checkbox is disabled, only the blend colors will be used in the gradient.

10.	Click on the OK button when you are finished.

Related Topics:

Gradient Background Dialog Box

Creating Multi-Color Backgrounds

Adding a Solid Color Background

Adding A Patterned Background

Usina a Picture as a Background

Removing Backgrounds


Adding a Patterned Background

You can create a textured appearance for slide backgrounds by selecting a pattern. Patterns consist of two colors: foreground and background.

To select a pattern for a slide background

1.	Choose Slide/Background/Pattern...

The Pattern Background dialog box will appear.

2.	Press and hold on the Pattern button.

The Pattern pop-up palette will appear.

3.	Drag over to the pattern you want, and release the mouse button.

4.	Click on the Background Color button.

A Color Scheme pop-up window will appear.

5.	Select a background color from the Colors box.

If you want to select a color that is not included in the current color scheme, use the Color Mixer, Color Spectrum, or Eyedropper.

6.	Click on the Foreground Color button.

7.	Select a foreground color from the Colors box.

8.	To exchange the foreground and the background colors, click on the Invert button.

9.	Click on the OK button.

The dialog box will disappear and the pattern will become the background of your slide.

Related Topics:

Adding A Solid Color Background

Creating A Gradient Background

Using a Picture as a Background

Removing Backgrounds


Using a Picture as Your Background

You might want to use a piece of clipart or a scanned picture for the background of your slide to create a unique effect or enhance a particular concept. You can use a scanned image of an actual photograph as a background. Astound supports .BMP, .DIB, .PCX, .GIF, .TIF, Kodak .PCD, .CGM, .TGA, .WMF, .RLE, and .PCT file formats.

To load and select a picture for a slide background

1.	Choose Slide/Background/Picture...

If you have yet to use any pictures in the current presentation, the Open Picture dialog box will appear, from which you can select a picture to load into memory.

If you already have at least one picture loaded into memory, the Picture Background dialog box will appear. You can click on the Open... button to display the Open Picture dialog box, from which you can select a picture to load into memory.

2.	Select the file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the File Name field.

3.	If you want to preview the selected picture, click on the Preview button in the Preview File box.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The Picture Background dialog box will appear.The name of the file you have just loaded will appear in the Currently Loaded field, and a preview of the picture will appear in the Preview box.

5.	Select a background placement option from the Alignment Within Slide box.

6.	Click on the Select button.

The selected picture will become your slide background. Each time you choose the Slide/Background/Picture command from now on, the Picture Background dialog box will appear.

You can add a background to all slides quickly in the Slide Sorter View. In the Slide Sorter View, either select the slides you want to have the same background by holding down the [Shift] key while clicking on each slide, or select all the slides by choosing Edit/Select All. Select a background in the Slide/Background options. The same background will appear on all the slides you selected.

Related Topics:

Adding A Solid Color Background

Creating A Gradient Background

Removing Backgrounds


Removing Backgrounds

If you decide you no longer want any slide background displayed, you can remove the current background entirely.

To remove a background

1.	Select Slide/Background/None.

This will remove the background of the current slide, leaving your slide background blank.

The background remains in memory so that you can use it again if you wish. It can be removed from memory using the Edit/Purge Unused Resources... command.


Loading Pictures

Once you have used a picture in a presentation, it is included in the list of currently loaded picture files that you can select from. This list also includes picture files that you have used as backgrounds for your slides.

You can also load picture files into memory using Windows drag-and-drop functions. You must have both Astound and the Windows File Manager displayed on the screen. In Astound, display the Select Picture dialog box. In the File Manager, click on the file that you want to load into memory, and drag the file(s) onto the Select Picture dialog box in Astound. The picture file(s) will be included in the Currently Loaded list in the Select Picture dialog box.

To load and place a picture using the Place Picture tool

1.	Click on the Place Picture tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle on the slide.

The picture you select will be placed into this rectangle, at the rectangle's location and size.

The Select Picture dialog box will appear.

3.	Click on the Open... button.

The Open Picture dialog box will appear, from which you can select a picture to load into memory.

4.	Select the file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The Select Picture dialog box will appear. The name of the file you have just loaded will appear in the Currently Loaded field, and a preview of the picture will appear in the Preview box.

6.	Click on the Select button.

The selected picture will be placed in the rectangle you have dragged out for it. You can use the pointer to move and resize the picture, just as you would any other object.

If you click on the Done button, the Select Picture dialog box will disappear and the rectangle you dragged out will convert to a picture placeholder. You can later double-click on the placeholder to display the Select Picture dialog box so that you can select a picture.

If you want to revert the picture back to its original size, select it and press the [CTRL] and [B] key combination. You can also use the Best Size option in the Resize Object dialog box.

Related Topics:

Placing Pictures

Importing Pictures

Replacing Pictures and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of a Picture

Removing Pictures from Memory


Placing Pictures

Once you have used a picture in a presentation, it is included in the list of currently loaded picture files that you can select from. This list also includes picture files that you have used as backgrounds for your slides.

You can also place picture files onto slides using Windows drag-and-drop functions. You must have both Astound and the Windows File Manager displayed on the screen. In Astound's Slide View, select the slide on which you want to place the picture(s). In the File Manager, click on the file(s) that you want to place on the slide, and drag the file(s) onto the selected slide in Astound. The picture file(s) will be placed on the slide and included in the Currently Loaded list in the Select Picture dialog box.

To place a currently loaded picture using the Place Picture tool

1.	Click on the Place Picture tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle on the slide.

The picture you select will be placed into this rectangle, at the rectangle's location and size.

The Select Picture dialog box will appear. You can load new pictures by clicking on the Open... button. For more information, see To load and place a picture using the Place Picture tool, earlier in this chapter.

3.	Select the picture you want to place from the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

A preview of the picture will appear in the Preview box.

4.	Click on the Select button.

The selected picture will be placed in the rectangle you have dragged out for it. You can use the pointer to move and resize the picture, just as you would any other object.

If you click on the Done button, the Select Picture dialog box will disappear and the rectangle you dragged out will convert to a picture placeholder. You can later double-click on the placeholder to display the Select Picture dialog box so that you can select a picture.

To load new picture files, click on the Open button in the dialog box.

If you want to revert the picture back to its original size, select it and press the [CTRL] and [B] key combination. You can also use the Best Size option in the Resize Object dialog box.

Related Topics:

Loading Pictures

Importing Pictures

Replacing Pictures and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of a Picture

Removing Pictures from Memory


Importing Pictures

Placing images using the File/Import/Picture... command will place the image on the slide at its original size.

To place pictures using File/Import/Picture...

1.	Choose File/Import/Picture...

The Open Picture dialog box appears.

2.	Select the file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The picture is placed in its original size in the center of the slide. You can use the pointer to move and resize the picture, just as you would any other object. If you press the [SHIFT] key while dragging the picture to resize it, the picture's aspect ratio will be maintained as you drag.

Related Topics:

Loading Pictures

Placing Pictures

Replacing Pictures and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of a Picture

Removing Pictures from Memory


Replacing Pictures and Filling Picture Placeholders

You can easily replace a picture on a slide with a different one, or replace all occurrences of a picture in the presentation with a different picture. You fill a placeholder in the same way as you would replace a single occurrence of a picture.

To replace a single picture or fill a picture placeholder

1.	Double-click on the picture you want to replace or the picture placeholder you want to fill.

You can also click on the Place Picture tool, and then click on the picture you want to replace or the picture placeholder you want to fill.

The Select Picture dialog box appears with the filename of the picture on which you clicked displayed in the Currently Loaded field. A preview of this picture will be displayed in the Preview box.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the picture you want to use as a replacement or to fill the picture placeholder.

If the picture you want to use as a replacement or to fill a placeholder is not currently loaded, you can click on the Open... button and load the picture from the Open Picture dialog box.

3.	Click on the Select button.

The picture on your slide will be replaced with the newly selected picture, or the picture placeholder will be filled with the newly selected picture. You can use the pointer to move and resize the picture, just as you would any other object.

Related Topics:

Loading Pictures

Placing Pictures

Importing Pictures

Replacing All Occurrences of a Picture

Removing Pictures from Memory


Replacing All Occurrences of a Picture

You can replace all occurrences of a picture in your presentation with another picture.

To replace all occurrences of a picture

1.	Double-click on the Place Picture tool.

The Select Picture dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the picture that you want to replace.

3.	Click on the Replace... button.

The Open Picture dialog box will appear.

4.	Select the file you want to use as a replacement from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

If you want to preview the picture file that you have selected, click on the Preview button. The picture contained in the file will be displayed in the Preview box.

5.	Click on the OK button.

You will be returned to the Select Picture dialog box. The new picture will be selected and displayed in the Preview box. The original picture will no longer appear in the Currently Loaded drop-down list because it is no longer in memory. If you want to use this picture again, you will first have to load it into memory.

6.	Click on the Done button.

All occurrences of the original picture in your presentation will be replaced with the newly selected one.

Related Topics:

Loading Pictures

Placing Pictures

Importing Pictures

Replacing Pictures and Filling Placeholders

Removing Pictures from Memory


Removing Pictures from Memory

When you have a picture file loaded into memory, but your presentation no longer makes use of it, you can remove it from memory entirely, without replacing it. This will free up more memory on your system, as well as reduce the size of your Currently Loaded pictures list, making it easier for you to select those pictures you do need.

To remove a picture from memory

1.	Double-click on the Place Picture tool.

The Select Picture dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the picture that you want to remove.

3.	Click on the Remove button.

If the picture you are removing from memory is currently placed on a slide, a message box will be displayed, warning you and asking if you want to proceed.

Related Topics:

Loading Pictures

Placing Pictures

Importing Pictures

Replacing Pictures and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of a Picture


Loading Actors

Once you have used an actor in a presentation, it is included in a list of currently loaded actor files that you can select from.

You can also load actor files into memory using Windows drag-and-drop functions. You must have both Astound and the Windows File Manager displayed on the screen. In Astound, display the Select Actor dialog box. In the File Manager, click on the file(s) that you want to load into memory, and drag the file(s) onto the Select Actor dialog box in Astound. The actor file(s) will be included in the Currently Loaded list in the Select Actor dialog box.

To load and place an actor using the Place Actor tool

1.	Click on the Place Actor tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle on the slide.

The actor you select will be placed into this rectangle, at the rectangle's location and size.

The Select Actor dialog box appears.

3.	Click on the Open... button.

The Open Actor dialog box appears, from which you can select an actor to load into memory.

4.	Select the actor file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The Select Actor dialog box will appear. This dialog box will contain a list of all actors that have been loaded for the current presentation. The name of the file you have just loaded will appear in the Currently Loaded field, and a preview of the actor will appear in the Preview box.

7.	In the Speed field, set the speed at which you want the actor to play.

8.	To animate the actor continuously, enable the Loop checkbox.

If you do not enable this checkbox, the actor will play through once only. By looping an actor, you can keep the animation moving over the life of its timeline, which is set to the same length as the slide's timeline by default.

9.	Click on the Select button.

The selected actor will be placed in the rectangle you have dragged out for it. You can use the pointer to move and resize the actor, just as you would any other object.

If you click on the Done button, the Select Actor dialog box will disappear and the rectangle you dragged out will convert to an actor placeholder. You can later double-click on the placeholder to display the Select Actor dialog box so that you can select an actor.

If you want to revert the actor back to its original size, select it and press the [CTRL] and [B] key combination. You can also use the Best Size option in the Resize Object dialog box.

Related Topics:

Placing Actors

Importing Actors

Replacing Actors and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of an Actor

Removing Actors from Memory


Placing Actors

Once you have used an actor in a presentation, it is included in a list of currently loaded actor files that you can select from.

You can also place actor files onto slides using Windows drag-and-drop functions. You must have both Astound and the Windows File Manager displayed on the screen. In Astound's Slide View, select the slide on which you want to place the actor. In the File Manager, click on the file(s) that you want to place on the slide, and drag the file(s) onto the selected slide in Astound. The actors will be placed on the slide, and included in the Currently Loaded list in the Select Actor dialog box.

To place a currently loaded actor using the Place Actor tool

1.	Click on the Place Actor tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle on the slide.

The actor you select will be placed into this rectangle, at the rectangle's location and size.

The Select Actor dialog box will appear. You can load new actors by clicking on the Open button.

3.	Select the actor you want to place from the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

4.	In the Speed field, set the speed at which you want the actor to play.

5.	If you want the actor to animate continuously, enable the Loop checkbox.

If you do not enable this checkbox, the actor will play through once only. By looping an actor, you can keep the animation moving over the life of its timeline, which is set to the same length as the slide's timeline by default.

6.	Click on the Select button.

The selected actor will be placed in the rectangle you have dragged out for it. You can use the pointer to move and resize the actor, just as you would any other object.

If you click on the Done button, the Select Actor dialog box will disappear and the rectangle you dragged out will convert to an actor placeholder. You can later double-click on the placeholder to display the Select Actor dialog box so that you can select an actor.

If you want to revert the actor back to its original size, select it and press the [CTRL] and [B] key combination. You can also use the Best Size option in the Resize Object dialog box.

Related Topics:

Loading Actors

Importing Actors

Replacing Actors and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of an Actor

Removing Actors from Memory


Importing Actors

Placing actors using the File/Import/Actor... command will place the actor on the slide at its original size.

To place actors using File/Import/Actor...

1.	Choose File/Import/Actor...

The Open Actor dialog box appears.

2.	Select the file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

If you want to preview the actor, click on the Preview button. The actor contained in the file will be displayed in the Preview box.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The actor is placed in its original size in the center of the slide, and added to the list of Currently Loaded actors. You can use the pointer to move and resize the actor, just as you would any other object.  If you press the [SHIFT] key while dragging the actor to resize it, you can maintain the actor's aspect ratio.

Related Topics:

Loading Actors

Placing Actors

Replacing Actors and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of an Actor

Removing Actors from Memory


Replacing Actors and Filling Actor Placeholders

You can easily replace an actor on a slide with a different one, or replace all occurrences of an actor in the presentation with a different actor. You fill a placeholder in the same way as you would replace a single occurrence of an actor.

To replace a single occurrence of an actor or fill an actor placeholder

1.	Double-click on the actor you want to replace or the actor placeholder you want to fill.

You can also click on the Place Actor tool, and then click on the actor you want to replace or the actor placeholder you want to fill.

The Select Actor dialog box appears, with the filename of the selected actor displayed in the Currently Loaded field. A preview of this actor will be displayed in the Preview box.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the actor that you want to use as a replacement or to fill the actor placeholder.

If the actor you want to use as a replacement or to fill a placeholder is not currently loaded, you can click on the Open... button and load the actor from the Open Actor dialog box.

3.	In the Speed field, set the speed at which you want the actor to play.

4.	If you want the actor to animate continuously, enable the Loop checkbox.

If you do not enable this checkbox, the actor will play through once only. By looping an actor, you can keep the animation moving over the life of its timeline, which is set to the same length as the slide's timeline, by default.

5.	Click on the Select button.

The actor on your slide will be replaced with the newly selected actor, or the actor placeholder will be filled with the newly selected actor. You can use the pointer to move and resize the actor, just as you would any other object.

Related Topics:

Loading Actors

Placing Actors

Importing Actors

Replacing All Occurrences of an Actor

Removing Actors from Memory


Replacing All Occurences of an Actor

You can replace all occurances of an actor in your presentation with another picture.

To replace all occurrences of an actor

1.	Double-click on the Place Actor tool.

The Select Actor dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the actor that you want to replace from the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

A preview of the selected actor will appear in the Preview field.

3.	Click on the Replace... button.

The Open Actor dialog box will appear.

5.	Select the file you want to use as a replacement from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

6.	Click on the OK button.

You will be returned to the Select Actor dialog box. The original actor will no longer appear in the Currently Loaded drop-down list because it is no longer in memory. If you want to use this actor again, you will first have to load it into memory.

All occurrences of the original actor in your presentation will be replaced with the newly selected one.

7.	Click on the Done button.

Related Topics:

Loading Actors

Placing Actors

Importing Actors

Replacing Actors and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of an Actor

Removing Actors from Memory


Removing Actors from Memory

When you have an actor file loaded into memory, but your presentation no longer makes use of it, you can remove it from memory entirely, without replacing it. This will free up more memory on your system, as well as reduce the size of your Currently Loaded actors list, making it easier for you to select those actors you do need.

To remove an actor from memory

1.	Double-click on the Place Actor tool.

The Select Actor dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the actor that you want to remove.

3.	Click on the Remove button.

If the actor you are removing from memory is currently placed on a slide in the presentation, a message box will be displayed, warning you and asking if you want to proceed.

The selected actor will no longer appear in the Currently Loaded list.

Related Topics:

Loading Actors

Placing Actors

Importing Actors

Replacing Actors and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of an Actor


Loading Video and Animated Movies

Once you have used a video or animated movie in a presentation, it is included in a list of currently loaded video files that you can select from.

You can also load video and animated movie files into memory using Windows drag-and-drop functions. You must have both Astound and the Windows File Manager displayed on the screen. In Astound, display the Select Video dialog box. In the File Manager, click on the file(s) that you want to load into memory, and drag the file(s) onto the Select Video dialog box in Astound. The video or animated movie file(s) will be included in the Currently Loaded list in the Select Video dialog box.

To load and place file-based video or animated movies using the Place Video tool

1.	Click on the Place Video tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle on the slide.

This rectangle defines the placement and size of the video or animated movie you select.

The Select Video dialog box appears.

3.	Enable the File-Based Digital Video radio button.

This tells Astound that you want to place file-based video or an animated movie, rather than overlay video. The options in the File-Based Digital Video box will become enabled, while those in the Overlay Analog Video box will be disabled.

4.	Click on the Open... button in the File-Based Digital Video box.

The Open Video dialog box will appear, from which you can select a video or animated movie file to load into memory.

5.	Select the file you want to open from the Files list box or type its name in the Filename field.

6.	Click on the OK button.

You will be returned to the Select Video dialog box. The name of the file you have just loaded will appear in the Currently Loaded field and its preview will appear in the Preview box.

8.	Select a placement option from the Alignment Within Rectangle box.

9.	Enable the Loop checkbox in the File-Based Digital Video box if you want the video or animated movie to play through more than once.

Enabling this checkbox will allow you to loop the video or animated movie, extending its playback time on the slide. By default, the timeline for the video or animated movie is set to the same length as the slide's timeline. If the checkbox is not enabled, the video or animated movie will only play through once.

10.	Click on the Select button.

The selected video or animated movie will be placed in the rectangle you have dragged out for it. You can use the pointer to move and resize the rectangle, just as you would any other object.

If you click on the Done button, the Select Video dialog box will disappear and the rectangle you dragged out will convert to a video placeholder. You can later double-click on the placeholder to display the Select Video dialog box so that you can select a video or animated movie to place in it.

If you want to revert the video or animated movie back to its original size, select it and press the [CTRL] and [B] key combination. You can also use the Best Size option in the Resize Object dialog box.

Related Topics:

Loading Video and Animated Movies

Placing Video and Animated Movies

Importing Video and Animated Movies

Overlay Video and Animated Movies

Replacing Video and Filling Placeholders and Animated Movies

Replacing All Occurrences of Video and Animated Movies

Removing Video from Memory and Animated Movies


Placing Video and Animation Movies
Placing Video and Animated Movies

Once you have used a video in a presentation, it is included in a list of currently loaded video files that you can select from.

To place a currently loaded file-based video or animated movie using the Place Video tool

1.	Click on the Place Video tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle on the slide.

This rectangle defines the placement and size of the video or animated movie you select. The placement of some types of files can be further defined using the options in the Alignment Within Rectangle box in the Select Video dialog box.

The Select Video dialog box appears. You can load new video or animated movie files by clicking on the Open... button.

3.	Enable the File-Based Digital Video radio button in the Video Type box.

This tells Astound that you want to place file-based video or animated movies rather than overlay video. The options in the File-Based Digital Video box will be enabled, while those in the Overlay Analog Video box will be disabled.

4.	Select the video or animated movie you want to place from the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

A single-frame preview of the file will appear in the Preview box.

5.	Enable the Loop checkbox in the File-Based Digital Video box if you want the video or animated movie to play through more than once.

Enabling this checkbox will allow you to loop the video or animated movie, extending its playback time on the slide. If the checkbox is not enabled, the video or animated movie will only play through once.

6.	Select a placement option from the Alignment Within Rectangle box.

7.	Click on the Select button.

If you click on the Done button, the Select Video dialog box will disappear and the rectangle you dragged out will convert to a video placeholder.

Related Topics:

Loading Video

Importing Video

Overlay Video

Replacing Video and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of Video

Removing Video from Memory


Importing Video and Animated Movies

Placing file-based video or animated movies using the File/Import/Video... command results in the video rectangle being set to the original size of the video or animated movie, and centered on the slide.

To place file-based video or animated movies using the File/Import/Video... command

1.	Choose File/Import/Video...

The Open Video dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the file you want to open from the Files list type its name in the Filename field.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The video or animated movie is placed at its original size in the center of the slide and added to the list of Currently Loaded files. You can use the pointer to move and resize the rectangle, just as you would any other object.

Related Topics:

Loading Video

Placing Video

Overlay Video

Replacing Video and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of Video

Removing Video from Memory


Overlay Video

You must have installed the appropriate hardware and device drivers to support this type of video display. If you have not, this type of video will be unavailable.

To use overlay video on a slide

1.	Click on the Place Video tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle on the slide.

This rectangle defines the placement and size of the area through which the video will play. The location of some types of files can be further defined using the options in the Alignment Within Rectangle box in the Select Video dialog box.

The Select Video dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Overlay Analog Video radio button in the Video Type box.

This tells Astound that you want to play overlay video, rather than file-based video or animated movies. The options in the Overlay Analog Video box will be enabled, while those in the File-Based Digital Video box will be disabled.

4.	From the Installed Drivers list box, select the overlay video device you will be using.

If you have not installed an MCI driver or the appropriate hardware to support overlay video, this type of video will not be available to you.

5.	Click on the Key Color button to select a key color through which the video will play.

A pop-up palette will appear, containing a selection of sixteen colors. You can choose any of these as your key color. Your overlay video will only appear on-screen through regions within the video rectangle that match this key color. If you do not select a key color, the overlay video will play through a key color that is set by default.

If you select a key color that does not appear anywhere within the rectangle, the video will not be visible. To avoid this problem, use the Eyedropper tool when you are setting a key color, and select a color that is already inside the video rectangle.

6.	Select the Fill Rectangle With Key Color checkbox if you want to fill the rectangle you have dragged out with the specified key color.

This will result in the overlay video playing through the entire video rectangle as though it was file-based video. If you do not enable this checkbox, the video will only play through those objects and areas within the rectangle that display the key color.

7.	Select a placement option from the Alignment Within Rectangle box.

8.	Click on the Select button.

If you click on the Done button, the Select Video dialog box will disappear and the rectangle you dragged out will convert to a video placeholder. You can later double-click on the placeholder to display the Select Video dialog box so that you can select a video.

Related Topics:

Loading Video

Placing Video

Importing Video

Replacing Video and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of Video

Removing Video from Memory


Replacing Videos and Filling Video Placeholders
Replacing Video and Filling Video Placeholders

You can replace a file-based video or animated movie on a slide with a different one, or replace all occurrences of a file-based video or animated movie in the presentation with a different video. You can use the same procedure to place a video or animated movie in a video placeholder.

To replace a file-based video or animated movie on a slide or fill a video placeholder

1.	Double-click on the video or animated movie you want to replace or the video placeholder you want to fill.

You can also click on the Place Video tool and then click on the video or animated movie you want to replace, or the video placeholder you want to fill.

The Select Video dialog box appears, with the File-Based Digital Video radio button enabled.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the video or animated movie you want to use as a replacement, or to the video placeholder.

3.	Select a placement option from the Alignment Within Rectangle box.

4.	Enable the Loop checkbox in the File-Based Digital Video box if you want the video or animated movie to play through more than once.

Enabling this checkbox will allow you to loop the video or animated movie, extending its playback time on the slide. If the checkbox is not enabled, the video or animated movie will only play through once.

5.	Click on the Select button.

The video, animated movie, or video placeholder on your slide will be replaced with the newly selected file.

Related Topics:

Loading Video

Placing Video

Importing Video

Overlay Video

Replacing All Occurrences of Video

Removing Video from Memory


Replacing All Occurrences of a Video File
Replacing All Occurences of a Video File

You can replace all occurences of a file-based video clip or animated movie with another file-based video clip or animated movie.

To replace all occurrences of a file-based video or animated movie

1.	Double-click on the Place Video tool.

The Select Video dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the video or animated movie that you want to replace.

3.	Click on the Replace... button

The Open Video dialog box appears.

4.	Select the file you want to use as a replacement from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

5.	Click on the OK button.

You will be returned to the Select Video dialog box. The original video or animated movie will no longer appear in the Currently Loaded drop-down list because it is no longer in memory. If you want to use this video or animated movie again, you will first have to load it into memory.

6.	Select a placement option from the Alignment Within Rectangle box.

7.	Enable the Loop checkbox in the File-Based Digital Video box if you want the video or animated movie to play through more than once.

Enabling this checkbox will allow you to loop the video or animated movie, extending its playback time on the slide. If the checkbox is not enabled, the video or animated movie will only play through once.

8.	Click on the Select button.

Related Topics:

Loading Video

Placing Video

Importing Video

Overlay Video

Replacing Video and Filling Placeholders

Removing Video from Memory


Removing Video or Animated Movies from Memory

When you have a video or animated movie file loaded into memory but your presentation no longer makes use of it, you can remove it from memory entirely, without replacing it. This will free up more memory on your system, as well as reduce the size of your Currently Loaded list, making it easier for you to select those files you do need.

To remove a video or animated movie from memory

1.	Double-click on the Place Video tool.

The Select Video dialog box will appear.

2.	Enable the File-Based Digital Video radio button.

The options in the File-Based Digital Video box will be enabled, while those in the Overlay Analog Video box will be disabled.

3.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the file that you want to remove.

A preview of the selected video or animated movie will appear in the Preview box.

4.	Click on the Remove button.

If the video or animated movie you are removing from memory is currently placed on a slide in the presentation, a message box will be displayed, warning you and asking if you want to proceed.

Related Topics:

Loading Video

Placing Video

Importing Video

Overlay Video

Replacing Video and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of Video


Creating a New Datasheet

You can use the Create Chart tool to access the datasheet by defining the size and placement of your chart first; you can also open a datasheet from the Windows menu.

To create a datasheet

1.	Click on the Create Chart tool.

The pointer will change to a crosshair.

If you are working with a master slide with a chart placeholder, simply double-click in the chart placeholder with the Pointer tool and skip to step 4.

2.	Drag the crosshair to define the size and location of the chart.

A rectangular bounding box will follow the pointer.

3.	Release the mouse button to set the size and location of your chart.

If you have not previously opened a datasheet in this presentation, a blank datasheet will appear. However, if you already have one or more datasheets in the presentation, then the Select Datasheet dialog box is displayed, asking you to create a new datasheet or select an existing one.

The Datasheet window will appear.

4.	Enter your data in the appropriate cells of the datasheet.

Related Topics:

Opening Datasheets and Importing Spreadsheet Data

Selecting Data To be Charted

Charting Options


Datasheet Window

 File menu: This menu contains options for creating, opening, and saving datasheets as well as for specifying the range of data to be charted.

 Edit menu: This menu contains the clipboard commands; Cut, Copy and Paste, as well as OLE commands. These commands work within the Datasheet window the same as they would anywhere else.

Cell menu: This menu contains commands that allow you to specify the height and width of cells, as well as justifying the cell's contents. The menu also contains the Go To command which allows you to quickly move around your datasheet. These commands only affect the display in data in the Datasheet window.

New button: Clicking on this button allows you to create a new datasheet. This button has the same effect as choosing New... from the File menu in the Datasheet window.

Open button: Clicking on this button allows you to open an existing Astound datasheet as well as to open a Lotus 1-2-3, Excel or tab-and-return delimited text file. This button has the same effect as choosing Open... from the File menu in the Datasheet window.

Copy button: Clicking on this button copies the data in the currently selected cell(s) from the datasheet and places it in the clipboard. This button has the same effect as choosing Copy from the Edit menu in the Datasheet window.

Paste button: Clicking on this button pastes any data on the clipboard to the datasheet, starting at the currently selected cell. Data will be pasted in the same orientation it was in before you cut or copied it to the clipboard. This button has the same effect as choosing Paste from the Edit menu in the Datasheet window.

Clear button: Clicking on this button removes from memory all data in the currently selected cell(s). This button has the same effect as choosing Clear from the Edit menu.

Left Justify button: Clicking on this button justifies text with the left edge of a cell. This command will affect the selected cell(s). Justification can also be set using the Justification command in the Cell menu in the Datasheet window.

Right Justify button: Clicking on this button justifies text with the right edge of the cell. This command will affect the selected cell(s). Justification can also be set using the Justification command in the Cell menu in the Datasheet window.

Center Justify button: Clicking on this button centers text within a cell. This command will affect the selected cell(s). Justification can also be set using the Justification command in the Cell menu of the Datasheet window.

Create Chart button: Clicking on this button displays the Chart Options dialog box, which then allows you to change the format, animation, and attributes of your existing chart(s).

Create Table button: Clicking on this button displays the Create Table Chart dialog box which enables you to change the format attributes of your new table.

Replot Data button: Clicking on this button replots your new data on your existing chart.

Undo button: Clicking on this button undoes the last editing operation performed within the Datasheet window. This button has the same effect as choosing Undo from the Edit menu in the Datasheet window.

Cut button: Clicking on this button cuts the data in the currently selected cell(s) from the datasheet and places it in the clipboard. This button has the same effect as choosing Cut from the Edit menu in the Datasheet window.

Related Topics:

Creating a New Datasheet

Opening Datasheetsand Importing Spreadsheet Data


Opening Datasheets and Importing Spreadsheet Data

You can open the Datasheet window and type your data into cells the same way you would enter data into any spreadsheet. You cannot place any equations in a datasheet, but can open final data from other spreadsheet sources.

You can open Astound datasheets, Excel and Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet data, or data that was exported from any spreadsheet or database program as a tab-and-return delimited text file. Any equations in the spreadsheet will be imported as final data.

To open or import data from a spreadsheet

1.	In the Datasheet window, choose Open from the File menu or click on the Open button.

The Open Datasheet dialog box will appear.

2.	Specify what types of files you want displayed in the Open Datasheet dialog box.

3.	Select the file you want to open or import.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The datasheet will appear.

Related Topics:

Creating a New Datasheet

Selecting Data To be Charted

Charting Options


Selecting Data to be Charted

Once your datasheet is complete, you can chart your data. Astound includes many chart types so that you can display your data effectively.

If the Automatic Range command is enabled in the File menu, you can simply click on the Create Chart or Table button to create a chart that includes all of your data. The Set Data Range command allows you to specify what data is included in the chart.

To chart a specified set of data

1.	Drag the pointer over the range of cells in the datasheet that you want to chart.

The selected cells will appear highlighted.

2.	Choose Set Data Range from the File menu in the Datasheet window.

This selects the highlighted data for charting.

3.	Click on the Create Chart button.

Choosing Automatic Range from the File menu will automatically chart all data in your datasheet.

Related Topics:

Opening Datasheets and Importing Spreadsheet Data

Charting Option


Charting Options

Once your datasheet is complete you can chart your data. Astound includes several chart types so that you can display your data effectively. You can set many of the attributes that affect the appearance of your chart. You have control over color, segment depth and spacing, legends, label typefaces, chart animation, and more. The chart animation feature gives you a chance to create impressive charts for presentations that will be played back on a computer. You can control how and when the segments appear on your chart, having them fade in or fly onto the screen.

All of your chart attributes are controlled from the Chart Options dialog box From here, you can display the Astound Datasheet window in which you specify your data, you can also select the type of chart, and specify the chart's appearance attributes.

To create a chart

1.	After you have entered and selected all of your data, click on the Create Chart button in the Astound Datasheet window.

The Row and Column Layout dialog box will appear.

2.	Specify what, if anything, you want to be used as labels along your chart axes.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The Chart Options dialog box will appear.

4.	Set your new chart attributes.

5.	Click on the OK button.

This will return you to your slide, and the chart will be created within the bounding box you defined.

Related Topics:

Creating a New Datasheet

Chart Formats

Chart Types

Creating Pictographs

Editing Charts

Creating Tables from Datasheets


Chart Formats

Chart formats are composed of a set of chart attributes. These attributes include the chart type and appearance. Chart formats allow you to create consistent looking charts throughout your document and even between documents. You can open a chart format for your chart and then change any attributes you wish.

To select a chart format

1.	Press and hold on the Chart Formats drop-down list in the Chart Options dialog box.

A list of chart formats in memory will appear.

2.	Select the chart format you want to use.

3.	Release the mouse button.

The attributes of the chart format will be shown in the preview box.

Related Topics:

Loading Chart Formats

Creating Chart Formats


Loading Chart Formats

You can also load a chart format that you have created or saved in another document.

To load a chart format

1.	Click on the Load... button in the Chart Options dialog box.

The Load Chart Format dialog box will appear listing chart formats that have been saved independently.

2.	Select the chart format you wish to load.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The chart format will be added to the Chart Formats drop-down list.


Creating Chart Formats

If you use the same chart type and attributes often, you can save them as a chart format. This will prevent you from having to continually specify the same attributes.

To create a chart format

1.	Click on the New... button in the Chart Options dialog box.

The Chart Format Name dialog box will appear.

2.	Type a name for the style you are about to create and click on the OK button.

3.	Select the chart type and set all of the chart attributes that you want saved as part of your chart format.

Selecting a chart type and setting chart attributes are discussed in detail in the following sections.

4.	Click on the Save... button.

The Save Chart Format dialog box will appear.

5.	Type a name for your format.

6.	Click on the Save button.

The dialog box will disappear and your format will be displayed in the Chart Formats list in the Chart Options dialog box.


Chart Types

There are several 2 and 3 dimensional types of charts available in Astound.

To choose a chart type

1.	Click on the Chart Type combo box in the Chart Options dialog box.

A list of chart types will appear.

2.	Select the chart type you want to use.

The selected chart type will be displayed in the pop-up menu and will be displayed with your data in the preview box.

Related Topics:

Chart Formats

Charting Options


Setting Chart Display Options

You can modify background panels, grids, labels, and tick marks. You can also plot ranges for the X, Y, and Z axes. Only the Y Axis Labels option will apply to pie charts, as they have no panels or grids for the axes.

To set chart axes options

1.	Click on the Display button in the Chart Options dialog box.

The Display options will appear on the right side of the dialog box will appear. You can enable or disable any of the options for all axes at the same time by holding down the [Ctrl] key while clicking on one of the checkboxes.

2.	Set the display options for the various axes.

Related Topics:

Chart Options

Setting Segment Attributes


Setting Chart Text Specifications

You can add titles to the chart, and each axis as well as adding a footnote to your chart. You can also set the font, size, and style for text on the chart axes, in the legend, titles and a footnote for your chart.

To set chart text attributes

1.	Click on the Text button in the Chart Options dialog box.

The Text options will appear on the right side of the dialog box.

2.	Select the type of text you want to set attributes for, from the Selected box.

3.	Specify the attributes for this type of text.

4.	Repeat steps 2 to 3 for any other types of text you want to include on your chart.

Related Topics:

Charting Options

Setting Number Attributes for Charts

Adding a Legend


Setting Attributes for Numbers on Charts

You can specify the numerical format and number of decimal places to use for numbers displayed along the X, Y, and Z axes.

To set numerical attributes

1.	In the Chart Options dialog box, click on the Numbers button.

The Numbers options appear on the right side of the dialog box.

2.	In the Apply/Show Options For list box, select the numbers for which you want to specify the display options.

3.	Specify the attributes for the numbers.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for any other numbers.

If you have the pie chart type selected when you set the number options, an extra option is available. The Numbers Outside Pie option allows you to place pie chart values around the outside of the chart instead of on the segments.

Related Topics:

Setting Text Options

Setting Display Options


Adding a Legend

You can easily add a legend to your charts. The legend will automatically pick up the colors used in the chart and any corresponding labels in the datasheet.

To add a legend to the chart

1.	Click on the Legend button in the Chart Options dialog box.

The Legend options will appear on the right side of the dialog box.

2.	Set the legend options you want to use.

Related Topics:

Setting Text Options

Setting Display Options


Changing Chart Colors

You can change the color of the chart's background panels, the axes and grids, and each of the segments. This allows you to emphasize a particular segment, and make your chart blend or stand out from your page as desired.

To set chart colors

You can set the colors for the chart background and any of the segment colors. The colors in the preview reflect the colors in the Colors box.

1.	Click on the Color button in the Chart Options dialog box.

The Color options appear on the right side of the dialog box. You can specify colors for the chart panels, the grid lines and axes, as well as the segment.

2.	In the Color Options box click on the color associated with the attribute you want to change.

3.	Press and hold on the Color Scheme pop-up button.

The Color Scheme palette will appear.

4.	Select the color you want to use.

5.	Repeat steps 2 to 4 for any other colors you want to change.


Setting Segment Attributes

Once you have chosen your chart type, there are several attributes that you can change for the chart. You can change the depth of the charted data, the space between segments, and the space between groups of segments for most charts. Some charts allow you to change line weight, size, and other options.

To change segment attributes

1.	Select the chart type you want to use in the Chart Options dialog box.

2.	Click on the Arrange button.

The arrangement attributes that can be set for your chart type are displayed on the right side of the dialog box. Different chart types will have different arrangement attributes that can be set. Any attributes not available for the selected chart type will be disabled. All attributes are set by clicking on the attribute bar. The left side of the bars are the lowest value and the right side of the bars indicate the highest value available.

2.	Set the attributes.

Any changes you make will be reflected in the preview box as you make them.


Three Dimensional Charts
Three-Dimensional Charts

If you have selected a three-dimensional chart as your chart type you can specify the rotation of the chart and even add some perspective to it.

To use 3D View options

1.	Click on the 3D View button in the Chart Options dialog box.

The 3D View options will appear on the right side of the dialog box.

2.	If you want to add perspective to the chart enable the Perspective checkbox and drag the Distance Indicator to specify the amount of perspective.

If you drag the indicator upward, the chart will appear closer to you, meaning it has more perspective added to it. If you drag the indicator downward, the chart will appear further away and will have less perspective added to it.

3.	Drag the pointer across the trackball to change the angle from which you are viewing the chart.

The trackball is used by dragging over top of it in the direction that you want to turn the chart. For example, if you place the pointer on the middle of the trackball and click or drag to the left and slightly downward, the chart will turn to the left and slightly downward. Double-clicking anywhere inside the trackball will return the chart to its original position.

4.	Click on the Update button to apply the changes to the preview in the main portion of the dialog box.

You can continue to change the 3D View options after you have clicked on the Update button.


Defining Timing for Animated Charts

The chart's timeline specifies how long it takes for the chart to appear on the screen, how long it stays on the screen, as well as how long it will take to exit.

To set the chart's timeline

1.	In the Chart Options dialog box, click on the Animation button.

The Animation options will appear on the right side of the dialog box. The timeline is set the same way as any other timeline.

2. 	Position the pointer over the outer handle on the left edge of the timeline.

The pointer will change to a double flag.

3.	Set the starting point of the chart in relation to the slide's duration by dragging the outer handle on the timeline.

As you drag, the length of the timeline will change.

You can also set the length of entry and exit transitions for the chart. This time length will specify how long it takes for the chart to appear and disappear from the slide. First specify the entry time length.

4. 	Place the pointer over the handle on the left edge of the timeline.

The pointer will change to a dotted flag.

5.	Set the length of the entry transition by dragging the inner handle toward the middle of the timeline.

The area of the timeline over which you drag will appear lighter in color.

6.	Repeat steps 2 to 5 using the handles on the right edge of the timeline to set the endpoint of the chart and the length of the exit transition.

7.	If necessary, reposition the chart's timeline by dragging it from its middle.


Selecting entry and exit distribution for segments

With the timeline you specify how long it takes the segments to appear. In the Order box you can specify the order in which segments appear. You can also specify when they will appear in relation to each other.

To select a segment entry and exit distribution

1. 	Press and hold on the Entry pop-up in the Timeline Distribution box of the Animation options portion of the Chart Options dialog box.

Depictions of when the data elements appear are displayed.

2.	Select the entry distribution you want to use.

The depictions show how the entry time of the data elements will be distributed. All of the objects for the first series or category (whichever you chose in the Entry box) may appear at the same time, may appear staggered, may appear staggered but finish their transitions at the same time, etc. At the same time, the next series or category may appear before or after the first is finished.

3.	Select the exit distribution you want to use.


Chart Transitions

You can add a special effect to the entry and exit of segments, causing each segment to rotate onto the slide and fade off of it, for example.

To set chart transitions

1.	In the Animation options portion of the Chart Options dialog box, click on the Transition... button.

The Object Transition dialog box appears.

2.	Select the transition you want to use from the list.

The transition will be previewed in the Preview box. Most transitions allow you to specify additional customized options that will appear in the Transition Options box.

3.	Set the transition options.

4.	Set the timeline for both the entry and the exit transitions.

5.	Click on the OK button.


Adding Pause to the Charts Entry
Adding Pauses to the Chart's Entry

You can have your chart pause after portions of it appear, and control when the segments will begin to appear. Pauses are set as part fo the animation attributes for the chart.

To specify a pause during the chart entry

1.	In the Pause box of the Chart Options Dialog Box Animation options, enable the control you wish to use.

2.	Click on the Preview Animation button.

The chart will animate according to all of your settings, in the Preview Animation box.


Creating Pictographs

One of the chart types is the pictograph. This chart type allows you to create a customized column chart using any object you choose to represent the data. For example, if you are charting the trend in house building over the past several years, you could use houses as the bars of the chart for visual impact.

You can create several types of charts by varying how the pictograph object is defined. You can use an object that scales to represent the data, or an object that stacks to represent the data.

Related Topics:

Defining Pictograph Objects

Saving Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictograph Objects

Creating a Pictograph

Stacking Pictographs

Editing Pictographs


Defining a Pictograph Object

A pictograph object is a structured drawing that is modified to specify what it will look like for a value of 0 and what it will look like for the largest value on your chart.

How you define the pictograph object will determine the look of your final chart. When you define the object you can scale, crop, or move parts of the object to specify how the object will chart the appropriate data.

To define a pictograph object

1.	Create the object you want to use in your chart, or import a piece of clipart.

Objects made up of simple shapes will work the best.

2.	Select all of the pieces of the object.

3.	Choose Chart/Define Pictograph...

The Name Pictograph dialog box will appear asking you to name the pictograph object you are about to create.

4.	Type a name for the object and click on the OK button.

The Define Pictograph dialog box will appear with two versions of your object. The left box contains a representation of what the object will look like at 0 on the chart, and the right box shows what it will look like at 100%.

5.	Click on either the Vertical or Horizontal buttons.

This will allow you to create a bar or column pictograph. The definition lines in the preview boxes will change to reflect your choice.

6.	Scale, crop or move the objects in the first box to represent the smallest version of the object that you want used in the chart.

You can scale the entire object or only the part that you wish to change. To scale the entire object, you should group the object before defining the pictograph object.

Cropping objects is done by pressing the [Ctrl] key while dragging a handle on the object. To crop the entire object, you should group the object before defining the pictograph.

You can also move the object or a portion of it. Anything still visible in this box will be visible if a value of 0 was plotted on your chart. When your object is used in a chart, Astound will scale it to represent your charted values.

7.	Move the arrow on the left box to place the line so that it corresponds to the zero line in the chart.

Usually, you will not want to display any part of the object at 0 percent. However, you may have an object that has a base that will be displayed below the 0 line on the chart or above the charted value.

8.	If desired, scale, crop or move the object in the second box to represent the largest version of the object that you want used in the chart.

If you have changed the vertical scaling of part or all of the object, it will grow taller for larger values in the chart. If you have also scaled the object horizontally, it will grow taller and wider for larger values on the chart. This would allow you to keep an appropriate aspect ratio for a house.

9.	In the second box, move the arrow so that the line corresponds to the 100% (highest charted value) line in the chart.

10.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Creating Pictographs

Saving Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictograph Objects

Creating a Pictograph

Stacking Pictographs


Saving Pictograph Options
Saving Pictograph Objects

Saving a pictograph is useful when you want to use a pictograph object in several presentations.

To save a pictograph object

1.	In the Define Pictograph dialog box, ensure the pictograph file you want to save is displayed correctly in the preview boxes.

2.	Click on the Save... button.

The Save Pictograph dialog box will appear.

3. 	Type a name for your pictograph object.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The pictograph file will be saved under the specified file name.

Related Topics:

Creating Pictographs

Defining Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictograph Objects

Creating a Pictograph

Stacking Pictographs


Editing Pictograph Objects

You can edit any pictograph objects currently in memory, load a new one from disk and edit it, or edit the object used in a specific chart.

If you want to change the pictograph object used in several charts, each one will have to be edited individually.

To edit a pictograph object in memory

1.	Choose Chart/Edit pictograph...

The Edit Pictograph dialog box will appear. This dialog box is the same as the Define Pictograph dialog box.

2.	Select a pictograph currently loaded in memory from the pop-up list at the bottom of the dialog box.

If you click on the Load... button the Open Pictograph dialog box will appear, listing any pictograph object files you have saved, and you can choose the object you wish to edit.

3.	Make your changes to the object.

4.	Click on the OK button.

You can also save the pictograph object if you wish to use it in other presentations.

Creating Pictographs

Defining Pictograph Objects

Saving Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictographs

Creating a Pictograph

Stacking Pictographs


Creating a Pictograph

A pictograph is a chart that uses a picture to represent the charted data. Once you have defined a pictograph object, you can select the pictograph chart type in the Create Chart dialog box and create a pictograph with an option for stacking images.

To create a pictograph

1. 	In the Chart Options dialog box, select Pictograph from the Chart Type drop-down list.

The Select Pictograph dialog box will appear.

This dialog box displays the pictograph objects currently in memory. If you want to use one that you previously saved, click on the Load... button and select the file you want from the resulting dialog box.

2.	Click on the Select button.

In the Select Pictograph dialog box, you can also remove a pictograph object from memory with the Remove button.

Creating Pictographs

Defining Pictograph Objects

Saving Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictographs

Stacking Pictographs


Stacking Pictographs

You can create pictographs which will stack images of the pictograph object on top of each other to represent the value in the datasheet. The top object on the stack will be either scaled or cropped, depending on how you defined the pictograph object.

To create a stacking pictograph

1. 	In the Chart Options dialog box, select Pictograph from the Chart Type drop-down list.

The Select Pictograph dialog box will appear.

2.	In the pop-up list at the top of the dialog box, select the pictograph you want to use.

This pop-up list displays the pictograph objects currently in memory. If you want to use one that you previously saved, click on the Load... button and select the file you want from the resulting dialog box.

If you are creating a scaling pictograph, all you need to do is click on the OK button.

3.	Enable the Stack checkbox.

This will cause multiple objects to be stacked to represent the value.

4.	Type the number of units you want represented by each object.

5.	Enable the Crop or Scale radio button to specify how to show values that do not equal full objects.

Cropping will keep the object at its full size, cutting it at the appropriate value. Scaling will vertically compact the object to end at the appropriate value.

6.	Click on the Select button.

Creating Pictographs

Defining Pictograph Objects

Saving Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictograph Objects

Editing Pictographs

Creating a Pictograph

Stacking Pictographs


Editing Charts

You can edit the data and any of the chart attributes in your chart. This can be done by reopening the Chart Options dialog box.

To edit a datasheet

There are three ways to open a datasheet for an existing chart in the presentation:

·	Select the chart you want to edit the data for, and choose Window/Datasheet/Edit Chart Data...

·	Choose Window/Datasheet and the datasheet name.

·	Select the chart you want to edit the data for, and choose Chart/Edit Data...

Related Topics:

Charting Data

Replotting Data

Replotting Charts Automatically


Replotting Data

Once you edit your data, it is easy to rechart it. Simply click on the Replot Chart button and the chart selected on the current page will be updated to reflect any of your changes.

To edit a datasheet for an existing chart

1.	Double-click on the chart or click on the chart and choose Chart/Edit Chart.

The Chart Options dialog box will appear.

2.	Click on the Datasheet... button.

The datasheet will appear.

3.	Edit your data.

4.	Select the data you want to chart.

If you want to chart all of the data in your datasheet, you do not have to manually select it. Simply choose Automatic Range in the File menu and click on the Replot Data button in the Datasheet window.

5.	Choose Set Data Range from the File menu in the Datasheet window.

6.	Click on the Replot Data button.

Related Topics:

Charting Data

Editing Charts

Editing Chart Options

Replotting Data Automatically


Editing Chart Options
Editting Chart Options

You can change any chart attributes from the Chart Options dialog box.

To edit chart attributes for an existing chart

1.	Double-click on the chart you want to edit or click on the chart and choose Chart/Edit Chart.

The Chart Options dialog box will appear.

2.	Make any change that you want.

From this dialog box you can edit any of the attributes for the selected chart the same way you would set the attributes when you first create a chart.

3.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Charting Data

Editing Charts


Replotting Charts Automatically

Once you edit your data, you can re-chart the data without going through the Chart Options dialog box by selecting the data to chart and clicking on the Replot Data button in the datasheet. The chart selected on the current slide will be updated to reflect any of your changes.

The Chart/Auto-Replot command can be enabled for individual charts. This means that you can create several charts from the same data and have all or some of them automatically update when you change the data and click on the Replot Data button in the datasheet.

If you do not have this command enabled, the chart will remain the same even after you edit the data. If you decide to edit the data of the chart you will be asked if you want to use the data from the chart, or use the existing data in the datasheet.

To cause a chart to replot automatically

1.	Select the chart you want to automatically replot.

2.	Enable Chart/Auto-Replot.

This toggle command is enabled by default. If you do not want a chart to update when you click on the Replot Data button, select the chart and disable this command.

Related Topics:

Replotting Charts

Editing Charts


Editing Pictographs

To edit the pictograph object for a chart

1.	Select the chart for which you want to edit the pictograph object.

2.	Choose Chart/Edit Pictograph...

The Edit Pictograph dialog box will appear. This dialog box is the same as the Define Pictograph dialog box.

3.	Make any changes to the pictograph object.

4.	Click on the OK button.

To select a different pictograph object for an existing chart

1.	Select the chart you want to change.

2.	Choose Chart/Chart Type/Pictograph...

The Select Pictograph dialog box appears.

3.	Select a new pictograph object from the pop-up list.

You can also open a new pictograph object by clicking on the Load... button.

4.	Click on the Select button.


Creating Tables From Your Datasheet

Once you have entered data into a datasheet you can easily place it on your slide in a table format. The table will be scaled to fit within the rectangle you dragged out before opening the datasheet, or you can specify that the table be created in the best size available for it.

To create a table

1.	Select the Create Chart tool.

2.	Drag out a rectangle to define the size and placement of the table.

If you already have datasheets associated with the presentation, a dialog box will appear allowing you to select one of the existing datasheets or create a new one. Once you have made a choice the Datasheet window will appear.

3.	Type your data in the datasheet, including any labels you want on your table.

4.	Ensure that all of the cells are sized in an appropriate ratio to each other.

The table will scale to fit your original rectangle but will maintain cell size ratios. You can resize cells in your datasheet by dragging the lines between the column and row identifiers. This allows you to resize the cells so that long labels or data can be displayed. If text does not fit in a datasheet cell, it will be truncated in the table.

5.	Select the range of data and labels that you want included in the table.

6.	Click on the Create Table button in the Datasheet window.

The Create Table Chart dialog box appears.

7.	Select the appropriate table attributes.

The attributes available for creating tables are discussed in detail in the next sections.

8.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Creating Charts


Editing Tables

Tables are edited in a similar manner to charts. You can select the table, and enable the Chart/Auto Replot toggle command to have the table updated whenever you update the datasheet. If you do not have this enabled, the table will remain the same even after you edit the datasheet attached to the table.

If you decide to edit the data used in the table you will be asked if you want to use the data from the table, or the existing data in the datasheet.

You can also edit the chart attributes.

To edit table attributes

1.	Select the table you wish to edit by clicking on it with the Pointer tool.

2.	Choose the Chart/Edit Table... command.

The Edit Table dialog box will appear.

3.	Change the appropriate attributes.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The table will be updated to reflect your changes.

Related Topics:

Creating Tables from you Datasheet


Loading Sounds into Memory

Before you can work with sound, the sounds must be loaded into memory.

To load a sound

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear. The left half of the dialog box contains options for sounds on your current slide. The right half of the dialog box contains options for sounds in memory, such as loading, recording and editing sounds.

2.	Click on the Open... button.

The Open Sound dialog box will appear.

3.	Select the sound file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The selected sound is loaded into memory, and added to the Currently Loaded drop-down list. You will be returned to the Select Sound dialog box.

Related Topics:

Adding Sound To a Slide

Removing Sounds

Importing Sounds Directly on the Slide


Adding Sound to a Slide
Adding a Sound to a Slide

Once you have loaded a sound into memory, you can add it to the slide.

To add sound to a slide

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear. The left half of the dialog box contains options for sounds on your current slide. The right half of the dialog box contains options for sounds in memory, such as loading, recording and editing sounds.

Available Sounds are any sounds currently loaded in memory. Sounds on Slide are sounds attached to the current slide.

2.	In the Currently Loaded drop-down list in the Available Sounds box, select the sound you want to add to your slide.

3.	If you want to preview the sound before you add it to the slide, click on the Play button in the Available Sounds box.

The sound will play and the Play button will change to a Stop button, which you can click on to stop the playback.

4.	Click on the Add to Slide button.

The sound will be added to the slide, and will appear in the Currently On Slide field. The Timeline box and the Volume control will become active, and information about the selected sound will appear in the Sound Info box.

5.	Adjust the volume and the timeline for the sound as desired.

If your playback hardware supports this function, moving the handle up or down on the Volume slider will increase or decrease the playback volume.

6.	Click on the Done button.

When you play the slide, the sound will play as specified on its timeline. You can cause the sound to loop, have it fade in and/or out, and specify when it plays.

Related Topics:

Importing Sounds Directly on a Slide

Previewing Sound


Importing Sounds Directly to a Slide

Using the File/Import/Sound... command, you can load a sound into memory and place it on the current slide in one step. The sound will start at the beginning of the slide and play once through at its default volume. After you have placed a sound on a slide in this way, you can adjust the sound's timeline or set its playback volume by using the Select Sound dialog box.

To import a sound

1.	Choose File/Import/Sound...

The Open Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the sound file you want to import from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The sound is added to the slide, and set to play through once, starting at the beginning of the slide. The sound will be included in the Currently Loaded and Currently on Slide lists in the Select Sound dialog box. You can adjust the playback time of the sound in the Select Sound dialog box and in the Timeline window.

Related Topics:

Loading Sounds into Memory

Adding a Sound to a Slide

Previewing Sounds


Sound Timelines

A timeline is used to specify how long the sound will play, over what portion of the slide's duration it will play, and whether or not it will have an entry time or exit time (fade in and out). This timeline can be defined in the Select Sound dialog box, or in the Timeline window.

When you initially add sound to a slide, the sound's timeline will be the exact length of the sound, and will begin at the start of the slide. You can move the timeline, lengthen or shorten it, and set times for entry and exit transitions. When you alter the timeline, the sound itself is not changed in any way. For example, a three second sound will still take three seconds to play, even though you have lengthened its timeline to six seconds. Lengthening its timeline will only have an effect if you also enable the Looping option, in which case the sound will play repeatedly for as long as its timeline dictates.

To adjust the sound timeline in the Select Sound dialog box

1.	From the Currently On Slide drop-down list of the Select Sound dialog box, select the sound for which you want to set the timeline.

The timeline for the sound will be displayed in the Timeline box.

2. 	Place the pointer over the outer handle on the left edge of the timeline.

The pointer will change to a double flag if no entry time has been set, or a dotted flag if there is an entry time.

3.	Set the starting point of the sound in relation to the slide's duration by dragging the outer handle on the timeline.

As you drag, the length of the timeline will change.

You can also set the length of an entry fade and exit fade for the sound. This time length will specify how long it takes the sound to fade in to and out from full volume playback if you have sound hardware that will support this.

4. 	Place the pointer over the inner handle on the left edge of the  timeline.

The pointer will change to a dotted flag.

5.	Set the length of the entry transition by dragging the inner handle toward the middle of the timeline.

The area of the timeline over which you drag will appear lighter in color.

6.	Repeat steps 2 to 5 using the handles on the right edge of the timeline to set the end point of the sound and the length of the exit transition.

If you increase the length of the sound by repositioning the start and/or end points, the sound will not play any longer than its original length unless you enable the Loop checkbox.

7.	If necessary, reposition the sound by dragging the timeline from its middle.

Related Topics:

Setting a Timeline to Play a Sound Once

Looping Sound


Setting a Timeline to Play a Sound Once

When a sound is initially added to a slide, its timeline is the same length as the slide. If you edit the timeline and then decide to return the timeline to its original length you can use the Make Best Timeline option.

To set the timeline to play a sound once

1.	In the Currently On Slide pop-up list of the Select Sound dialog box, select the sound for which you want to set the timeline.

2.	Click on the Make Best Timeline button.

The timeline will adjust to the length of the sound, but the starting point of the sound will remain the same. If the full length of the sound exceeds the length of the slide, the starting point of the sound will be pushed toward the beginning of the slide until the entire sound can be played. However, the sound will never begin before the slide does.

Related Topics:

Sound Timelines


Looping a Sound

You may want your sound to play through more than once on your slide. You can have the sound loop for the duration of its timeline. Enabling the Loop checkbox in the Select Sound dialog box will cause the sound to play through and then begin playing again for the duration of the sound's timeline. You will have to lengthen the timeline for this to have any effect.


Setting the Volume for a Sound on a Slide

If you have playback hardware that supports this function, you can specify the volume for any occurrence of a sound on a slide. Simply display the sound in the Currently on Slide field, and use the slide control to set the volume as a percentage of the sound's recorded volume. Setting the slider to High specifies playback at one hundred percent of the recorded volume. You can play the sound to hear the effect of your volume adjustments by clicking on the Play button in the Sounds on Slide box.

Related Topics:

Previewing Sound


 Previewing Sound

Before you decide to add, edit, or remove a sound from your slides or from memory, you can preview the sound sequence to hear what it sounds like. You can preview a sound from the Select Sound dialog box, whether it is Currently Loaded or Currently on Slide.

To preview a sound from the Currently Loaded list

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the sound you want from the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

3.	Click on the Play button in the Available Sounds box.

To preview a sound on a slide

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the sound you want from the Currently on Slide drop-down list.

3.	Click on the Play button in the Sounds on Slide box to preview your sound with its timeline.

This will play the sound, including the entry and/or exit transitions, if any are specified in the timeline. The sound will play once through its entire timeline.

Related Topics:

Sound Timelines


Renaming a Sound

When you record a sound, it is a good idea to give it a name that indicates what the sound file contains. If you forget to name a new sound, it will be assigned a default name, but you can change the name of a sound at any time using the Rename... button in the Select Sound dialog box.

You can also use the Rename function to change the name of any sound that you have placed on a slide, and subsequently edited and placed again on the same slide or on any other slide.

To rename a sound

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the sound you want to rename.

3.	Click on the Rename... button.

The Rename Sound dialog box will appear.

4.	Type in the new name.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The new name will replace the original in the Currently Loaded list in the Select Sound dialog box.


Removing Sounds from Memory

If you have loaded sounds into memory and then decide not to use them, or have a sound in your presentation that you want to remove all occurrences of, you can remove the sound from memory. You may also want to remove one instance of a sound from a slide. Both of these actions can be performed in the Select Sound dialog box.

To remove a sound from memory

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Currently Loaded drop-down list, select the sound you want to remove.

3.	Click on the Remove button in the Available Sounds box.

The sound will be removed from memory, and will no longer appear in the Currently Loaded list. If the sound is currently placed on any slide in the presentation, a message box will appear, asking you if you wish to remove the sound anyway. If you choose to continue, the sound will be removed from all slides on which it is placed.

4.	Click on the Done button.

Related Topics:

Removing Sound from Slides


Removing Sound From Slides

You can keep a sound loaded in memory but remove it from a slide.

To remove a sound from a slide

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	From the Currently on Slide drop-down list, select the sound you want to remove.

3.	Click on the Remove button in the Sounds on Slide box.

The sound will be removed from the slide and the list of Currently on Slide, but not from memory.

4.	Click on the Done button.

Related Topics:

Removing Sounds from Memory


The Sound Editor

Astound contains a Sound Editor that allows you to work with Wave sounds You can edit sounds, add markers to sounds, and record new sounds. The Sound Editor gives you a visual display of Wave sound files. It contains a panel of buttons you can use for previewing and editing your sound. You can even use the Sound Editor to convert sounds from one format to another.

You can use the Sound Editor's paste buffer commands to rearrange portions of sounds, even cutting and pasting between different sounds. You can add  pauses to your sounds, overwrite part of a sound with silence, and record over portions of a sound.

The Sound Editor allows you to set markers to easily locate positions in the sound. These markers will then appear in the Timeline window, allowing you to synchronize events on your slide with the sound.

To open the Sound Editor

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	Click on the Edit button or on the New button.

The Sound Editor will appear.

If you clicked on the Edit button the Sound Editor will contain the Wave sound file selected in the Currently Loaded drop-down list. If you clicked on the New button the Sound Editor will be open so that you can record and edit a new Wave sound.

You can also open the Sound Editor by choosing Window/Sound Editor in Astound's main menu, and selecting either the Wave sound you wish to edit from the resulting submenu, or New, so that you can create a new Wave sound.

Related Topics:

Opening and Saving Sounds

Changing Magnification in the Sound Editor

Selecting Sound Regions

Looping

Playing Sounds in the Sound Editor

Adding Markers to Sound


Opening and Saving Sound Files

You can open sound files for editing from within the Sound Editor, but you can only have one sound file open at a time. If you have not saved the changes you have made to the current sound file when you select the File/Open... command, a message box will appear. You will be prompted to save the current sound before you open a new one. You can choose to save the file and open a new file, open a new file without saving the current file, or cancel the command and return to the current sound.

To open a sound file in the Sound Editor

1.	In the Sound Editor, choose File/Open...

The Open Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the sound file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the Filename field.

3.	Click on the OK button.


Saving Sounds in the Sound Editor

If you have made substantial changes to a sound file, you may want to save it under a new name. By renaming the edited version of the sound, you will be able to recover the original version if you later decide that you need it back.

To save a sound file

1.	In the Sound Editor select File/Save or File/Save As...

The first time you save the sound, or if you select Save As..., the Save Sound dialog box will appear. Once you have saved the file, choosing File/Save will save the file under its current name.

2.	Specify the location at which you want the file saved.

3.	Type a file name for the sound in the File Name field, or choose a name from the Files list box.

4.	Click on the Save button.

The sound will be saved under the specified filename, as a Wave file.


Changing Magnification in the Sound Editor

You can change the magnification of the display in the Sound Editor so that you can either see more of the sound, or see more detail for a portion of the sound.

To change the display to full magnification in one step

1.	In the Sound Editor select View/Full Zoom.

The display of the sound will increase to full magnification.

To reduce the magnification to zero in one step

1.	Select View/No Zoom.

The entire length of the sound will be displayed in the window.

To change the magnification of the display

1.  	Click on either the Zoom In or Zoom Out buttons in the Sound Editor tool bar.

Clicking on the Zoom In button will magnify the display of the sound. Clicking on the Zoom Out button will decrease the magnification factor. You can also zoom in and zoom out by selecting the Zoom In and Zoom Out commands from the View menu.

If you have a region selected when you make a magnification change, the selected region will be centered in the window, and the display will be adjusted by an amount that depends on the size of the currently selected region, and the current width of the Sound Editor window. If you increase or decrease the magnification without a region selected, the display will be adjusted by a fixed amount, and the insertion point will be centered in the window.

Related Topics:

Sound Editor


Selecting Regions in the Sound Editor

You can use the pointer to select regions of a sound for editing operations or preview playback, or you can use the Edit/Select Region submenu, which contains commands that allow you to select specific parts of a sound more precisely. When you select a region of a sound, it will remain selected until you click the mouse at a different location.

To select a portion of the sound with the pointer

Once you have a sound in the Sound Editor, you can select portions of it.

1.	Drag the pointer over the portion of the sound that you want to select.

The portion of the sound will be highlighted, indicating that it is selected.

To select an entire sound

1.	Choose Edit/Select Region/All.

The entire sound will be selected, from beginning to end. Any blank space in the window, either before or after the sound, will not be included in the selection.

To select a region of a sound from either end

1.	Select a region of the sound, or place an insertion point.

2.	Choose Edit/Select Region/From Beginning or Edit/Select Region/To End.

Choosing Edit/Select Region/From Beginning will select a region of the sound from its beginning, to either the current insertion point or the end of the initially selected region.

Choosing Edit/Select Region/To End will select a region of the sound from either the insertion point or the beginning of the initially selected region, to the end of the sound.

Related Topics:

Selecting Looped Regions


Looping

If there is any section of the sound that you want to play through more than once, you can designate it as a loop. When you mark a region of the sound as a loop, it will be highlighted differently than ordinarily selected sections of the sound. You can only have one looped region of a sound defined at any time. When you define a looped region of a sound, it will remain defined until you click the right mouse button at a different location.

If you want the looped region of a sound to play as a loop, you must first enable sound looping. There are two toggles for this: the Looping option in the Play menu, and the Looping button in the Sound Editor tool panel. When this option is enabled, the looped section of a sound will play repeatedly, until you stop it.

Related Topics:

Marking a Loop Region with the Right Mouse Button

Marking a Loop Region Using the Select Loop Command

Making a Marker Into a Loop

Selecting Looped Regions


Marking a Loop Region with the Right Mouse Button

To mark a region of a sound as a loop using the mouse button

1.	Position the cursor at one end of the region you wish to loop.

2.	Press and hold the right mouse button.

A small loop symbol will appear beside the pointer.

3.	Drag the cursor over the sound to the other end of the section you wish to loop.

4.	Release the mouse button.

This region of the sound will remain looped until you designate a different region as a loop.

Related Topics:

Looping

Marking a Loop Region Using the Select Loop Command

Making a Marker into a Loop

Selecting Looped Regions


Marking a Loop Region Using the Select Loop Command

To mark the currently selected region as a loop

1.	Select the region you want to mark as a loop.

2.	Choose Edit/Select Loop/Region.

The currently selected region will be marked as a loop. It will no longer be selected as a region.

To mark an entire sound as a loop

1.	Choose Edit/Select Loop/All.

The entire sound will be highlighted, marking it as a loop from beginning to end. Any blank space in the window, either before or after the sound, will not be included in the looped region.

To mark a region of a sound as a loop from either end

1.	Select a region of the sound, or place an insertion point.

2.	Choose Edit/Select Loop/From Beginning or Edit/Select Loop/To End.

Choosing Edit/Select Loop/From Beginning will mark a region of the sound as a loop from its beginning to either the insertion point, or the end of the initially selected region.

Choosing Edit/Select Loop/To End will mark a region of the sound as a loop from either the insertion point or the beginning of the initially selected region, to the end of the sound.

Related Topics:

Looping

Marking a Loop Region with the Right Mouse Button

Making a Marker into a Loop

Selecting Looped Regions


Making a Marker into a Loop

To mark a marker as a loop

1.	Choose Edit/Select Loop/Marker...

The Select Marker dialog box will appear. It will contain a list of existing markers in the displayed sound.

2.	Select the marker you want to mark as a loop from the list in the Select Marker box.

The start and end times of the selected marker will be displayed in the Range box.

3.	Click on the Select button.

The region or point represented by the selected marker will be marked as a loop.

Related Topics:

Looping

Marking a Loop Region Using the Select Loop Command

Marking a Loop Region with the Right Mouse Button

Selecting Looped Regions


Selecting Looped Regions

To select only the looped region

1.	Choose Edit/Select Region/Loop.

The looped region will be selected.

Related Topics:

Looping


Playing Sounds

You can preview your sound or a portion of it within the Sound Editor. You also have the option of watching a vertical line move through the sound as it plays, visually indicating the portion of the sound that is currently playing.

You can specify several playback parameters for a sound, such as volume, playback rate, and playback device, in the Playback Parameters dialog box.

If the sound or section of sound that you are playing contains a looped region, it will not play repeatedly unless you enable looping by toggling either the Play/Looping option or the Looping button. When this command is enabled, a checkmark will appear beside it in the menu.

To play only the selected region of a sound in the Sound Editor

1.	Select the region of the sound that you want to play.

You can play the selected region repeatedly by marking it as a loop and enabling looping.

2.	Click on the Play Selected button, or choose Play/Play Selected.

The sound will begin to play.

3.	Click on the Stop button to stop playback before the entire selected region has been played.

Related Topics:

Playing the Entire Sound in the Sound Editor

Setting Sound Playback Parameters


Playing the Entire Sound in the Sound Editor

You can play the sound in a couple of ways. You can play it normally, or you can play it with a simultaneous visual display.

To play the entire sound in the Sound Editor

1.	Click on the Play Sound button, or choose Play/Play Sound.

2.	Click on the Stop button to stop playback before the entire sound has been played.

To play the entire sound with simultaneous visual display

1.	Choose Play/Visual Sync.

The entire sound will play through. As the sound plays, a vertical line will move through the display, indicating the point in the sound that is currently playing.

2.	Click on the Stop button to stop playback before the entire sound has been played.

Related Topics:

Playing Sound in the Sound Editor


Setting Sound Playback Parameter
Setting Sound Playback Parameters

To set the sound playback parameters

1.	Choose Play/Set Playback Parameters...

The Playback Parameters dialog box will appear. You can also display this dialog box by clicking on the Playback Parameters button.

2.	In the Output Device box, select the sound device you are using from the drop-down list.

You must have a device that supports sound playback installed.

3.	In the Playback Rate box, select a playback rate.

4.	In the Volume box, drag the slider to set the playback volume.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The playback options you have selected will be assigned to the currently displayed sound.


Editing Sound

The Sound Editor has a paste buffer that temporarily holds a region that you have cut or copied from a displayed sound. This paste buffer functions like the Windows clipboard. You can use the paste buffer to cut, copy, and paste regions of sounds, allowing you to rearrange sounds, or copy regions between sounds. You can also cut out a region of a sound without saving it to the paste buffer by using the Delete function.

You can replace a selected region of a sound with the contents of the paste buffer using the Modify/Overlay/Replace command.

It is possible to paste a region from the paste buffer into a sample that has a different sampling rate, sampling resolution, or channel status.

Related Topics:

Deleting Sound

Inserting Sound Files

Adding Markers to Sounds

Replacing Sound with Silence

Inserting Silence in a Sound

Inverting Sections of Sound

Doubling the Amplitude of Sound

Halving the Amplitude of Sound

Maximizing Amplitude

Adding An Echo To Sound

Sound Overlays

Mixing Sound

Changing the Sample Resolution of Sound

Changing the Channel Status of Sound

Changing the Sample Rate of a Sound File


Deleting Sound

You can delete a portion of a sound by cutting it, which will place the selected region in the paste buffer, or by deleting it entirely, which will remove the selected region of the sound without placing it in the paste buffer.

To delete a portion of a sound

1.	Select the region of the sound that you want to delete.

2.	Select Edit/Delete.

The selected region will be removed from the sound. When you delete a region in this way, no blank space is left in the sound. The sections of the sound on either side of the deleted region are pushed together until the space once occupied by the deleted region is filled. The playback length of the sound file will decrease.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Inserting Sound Files

You can insert an entire sound file into the currently displayed sound in much the same way you paste regions from the paste buffer. Because an entire file can contain a large amount of data, you may want to reduce the magnification of the displayed sound file so you can get a good look at the entire file you have inserted.

You can insert any sound file into any other sound file regardless of sample rate, sample resolution, or channel status. The Sound Editor will alert you to any compatibility problems, displaying the dialog boxes from which you can choose conversion options.

To insert one sound file into another

1.	Open the file into which you want to insert another file.

2.	Place the insertion point where you want the file inserted.

The sound will be split to make room for the file you are inserting.

3.	Choose File/Insert File...

The Insert Sound dialog box will appear.

4.	Select the file you want to open from the Files list box, or type its name in the File Name field.

If you want to preview the selected sound file, click on the Play button.

5.	Click on the OK button.

If the file you are inserting is incompatible with the file into which it is being inserted, the Sound Editor will alert you and ask you to choose conversion options.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Adding Markers to Sound

You can set markers in sound so that you can quickly locate a specific position within the sound. These markers will also appear in the Timeline window, so that you can align a point in the sound with another action on the slide. You can then go into the Timeline window and align the two events.

When you set a marker in a sound, the marker is saved with the sound file, and will remain in the file until you remove the marker. You can toggle the display of markers, and use the commands in the View menu to move or zoom directly to a selected marker.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Toggling the Display of Sound Markers

Setting Sound Markers

Selecting Sound Marker Regions

Zooming to Display an Entire Marker

Removing Markers from Sounds


Toggling the Display of Sound Markers

To toggle the display of markers in the Sound Editor

1.	Choose View/Show Markers.

When this command is enabled, all markers you have set in the currently displayed sound will be shown by dotted vertical lines on either side of the marked region. This is a toggle command that has a checkmark beside it in the View menu when it is enabled. If there are no markers set in the displayed sound, the Show Markers command will be disabled.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Adding Markers to Sound

Setting Sound Markers

Selecting Sound Marker Regions

Zooming to Display an Entire Marker

Removing Markers from Sounds


Setting Sound Markers

To set markers in sound

1.	In the Sound Editor, place the insertion point or select a region that you want to identify with a marker.

2.	Choose Edit/Add Marker...

The Add Marker dialog box will appear. The start and end times of the selected region will be displayed in the Range box. If you are marking a point only, the start and end times will be the same.

3.	Type a relevant name for your marker.

If you use a name that describes the marked point or region, it will be easier for you to identify it later.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The marker is set. Its name will appear in the list of markers available in the Go to Marker submenu, and in the Select Marker dialog box. The Show Markers, Go to Marker, and Zoom to Marker options in the View menu will be enabled.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Adding Markers to Sound

Toggling the DIsplay of Sound Markers

Selecting Sound Marker Regions

Zooming to Display an Entire Marker

Removing Markers from Sounds


Selecting Sound Marker Regions

To select a marked region using the View menu

1.	Choose View/Go to Marker.

A submenu, containing a list of all the markers in the file, will appear. This command will be disabled if there are no markers currently set.

2.	Choose the marker you want to go to.

The region or point represented by the selected marker will be selected.

To select a marked region using the Select Marker dialog box

1.	Choose Edit/Select Region/Marker...

The Select Marker dialog box will appear. It will contain a list of existing markers in the displayed sound.

2.	Select the marker you want to go to from the list in the Select Marker box.

3.	Click on the Select button.

The region or point represented by the selected marker will be selected.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Adding Markers to Sound

Toggling the Display of Sound Markers

Setting Sound Markers

Zooming to Display an Entire Marker

Removing Markers from Sounds


Zooming To Display an Entire Marker

To zoom to a marker

1.	Choose View/Zoom to Marker.

A submenu, containing a list of all the markers in the file, will appear. This command will be disabled if there are no markers currently set.

2.	Choose the marker you want to go to.

The magnification will increase, and the selected marker will be centered on the screen.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Adding Markers to Sound

Toggling the Display of Sound Markers

Setting Sound Markers

Selecting Sound Marker Regions

Removing Markers from Sounds


Removing Markers from Sounds

To remove a marker

1.	Choose Edit/Remove Marker...

The Remove Marker dialog box will appear. It will contain a list of currently existing markers in the displayed sound.

2.	Select the marker you want to remove from the list in the Select Marker box.

The start and end times of the selected marker will be displayed in the Range box.

3.	Click on the Remove button.

The selected marker will be removed from the file, leaving the sound file intact.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Adding Markers to Sound

Toggling the Display of Sound Markers

Setting Sound Markers

Selecting Sound Marker Regions

Zooming to Display an Entire Marker


Replacing Sound with Silence

This operation will reduce the amplitude of the selected region of a sound to zero - in effect, replacing the selected part of a sound with silence. The playback length of the sample will be unaffected.

To replace a portion of a sound with silence

1.	Select the region of the sound that you want to replace with silence.

2.	Choose Modify/Zero.

The amplitude of the sound in the selected region will be reduced to zero. The net effect is that the selected region of sound is replaced with silence. You can also insert silence into your sound without removing or replacing any region of the sound. This is accomplished by adding a blank space to the sound.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Inserting Silence in a Sound

This operation will insert a blank space into a sound, without removing or replacing any of the existing regions. The playback length of the sound sample will increase.

To insert silence into a sound

1.	Select a region that is the same size as the blank space you want to insert.

2.	Choose Modify/Insert Space.

A blank section will be inserted into the selected region, but the sound will be split to make room for it. None of the original sound will be replaced or removed.

Reversion Sound Regions

This operation will flip the selected region of a sound horizontally - in effect, making the region play backwards. The playback length of the sample will be unaffected.

To reverse a region of a sound

1.	Select the region of the sound that you want to reverse.

2.	Choose Modify/Backwards.

The selected region of the sound will be reversed, or flipped horizontally.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Inverting Sections of Sound

This operation will flip the selected region of a sound vertically, exchanging the section below the zero line with the section above the zero line. The playback length of the sound sample will be unaffected.

To invert a section of a sound

1.	Select the region of the sound that you want to invert.

2.	Choose Modify/Invert.

The selected region of the sound will be inverted, or flipped vertically.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Doubling the Amplitude of a Sound Region

This operation will double the amplitude of the selected region of a sound - in effect doubling the playback volume. If the resulting amplitude exceeds the maximum, those sections that are too high will be cut off, or clipped. The playback length of the sound sample will be unaffected.

To double the amplitude of a sound in a selected region

1.	Select the region of a sound that you want to double the amplitude of.

2.	Choose Modify/Double.

The amplitude of the sound in the selected region will be doubled.


Halving the Amplitude of a Sound Region

This operation will cut the amplitude of the selected region of a sound in half - in effect halving the playback volume. The playback length of the sample will be unaffected.

To halve the amplitude of a sound in a selected region

1.	Select the region of the sound that you want to halve the amplitude of.

2.	Choose Modify/Halve.

The amplitude of the sound in the selected region will be reduced by fifty percent.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Maximizing Amplitude

This operation will adjust the highest point in the selected region of a sound so that it has the maximum possible amplitude, and then adjust the amplitudes of all other points in the region proportionally. The net effect is that the sound will play at as high a volume as possible without clipping any data - which could result in distortion. The playback length of the sound sample will be unaffected.

To maximize the amplitude of a sound in a selected region

1.	Select the region of the sound in which you want to maximize the amplitude.

2.	Choose Modify/Maximize.

The amplitude of the sound in the selected region will be maximized.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Switching Channels

This operation exchanges the left channel of a stereo sound with the right channel. If you do not have a stereo sample open, this option will be disabled. The playback length of the sample will be unaffected.

To switch the stereo channels of a sound in a selected region

1.	Select the region of a stereo sound where you want to switch channels.

2.	Choose Modify/Swap Channels.

The right and left channels of the stereo sound will be switched.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Adding an Echo to a Sound

This operation adds one or more echoes to the selected region. The playback length of the sound sample may increase, depending on the echo options you select.

To add echo to a selected region

1.	Select the region of the sound that you want to add echoes of.

2.	Choose Modify/Echo...

The Echo dialog box will appear.

3.	Drag the Gain slider to specify how much the echo fades each time.

Setting a gain of zero dB will result in no fading for each successive echo. Setting a higher gain will increase the intensity of each echo, while setting a lower gain will decrease the intensity.

4.	Drag the Delay slider to set the amount of time between the original sound and each successive echo.

5.	Drag the Repeats slider to specify the number of echoes to be added.

6.	Click on the OK button.

One or more echoes of the selected region will be mixed into the sound. If you have specified options that require the creation of echoes that extend beyond the end of the sound, the echoes will be added and the playback length will increase.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Overlays

Overlaying is much like pasting, but instead of inserting a region from the paste buffer, the selected region of a displayed sound is replaced by or mixed with a region from the paste buffer.

You can overlay any sound onto any other sound regardless of sample rate, sample resolution, or channel status. The Sound Editor will alert you to any compatibility problems, displaying the dialog boxes from which you can choose conversion options.

To replace a selected region with a region from the paste buffer

1.	Select the region that you want to overlay with a region from the paste buffer.

If there is no region selected, the Overlay submenu will be disabled.

2.	Choose Modify/Overlay/Replace.

The selected region of the sound will be removed from the sample and replaced with the last region to be cut or copied to the paste buffer. If there is no region currently in the paste buffer, the Modify/Overlay/Replace command will be disabled.


Mixing Sound

To mix a selected region of a sound with a region from the paste buffer

1.	Select the region that you want to mix with a region from the paste buffer.

If there is no region selected, the Overlay submenu will be disabled.

2.	Choose Modify/Overlay/Mix...

The Mix dialog box appears.

3.	Set the amount of gain for the region in the paste buffer.

Setting a gain of zero dB will result in no scaling for the region in the paste buffer. Setting a higher gain will increase the amount of scaling, while setting a lower gain will decrease the scaling.

4.	Click on the OK button.

A copy of the region will be scaled using the specified Gain value, and mixed in with the selected region of the displayed sample. Any incompatibilities in format will result in the display of the appropriate dialog boxes containing conversion options.

If the region in the paste buffer is shorter than the selected region in the displayed sample, the two are mixed together, and any region of the displayed sound that does not get mixed remains unmodified. If the region in the paste buffer is longer than the selected region in the displayed sample, the selected region is extended with blank space until they are of equal length. The two regions are then mixed together.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound


Changing Sample Resolution of a Sound

To change the sample resolution of a sound file

1.	In the Sound Editor, open the file you want to convert.

2.	Choose File/Convert.

The Conversion submenu will appear.

3.	Choose to convert the file either To 8-Bit or To 16-Bit sample resolution.

The command corresponding to the current sample resolution of the sound file will be disabled in the Convert submenu, so you will only have one choice. The file will be converted to the new resolution.

Converting an 8-bit sample to a 16-bit sample will double the size of the sample, while converting a 16-bit sample to an 8-bit sample will reduce the file size by half.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Changing the Channel Status of Sound

Changing the Sample Rate of a Sound File


Changing the Channel Status of a Sound

To change the channel status of a sound file

1.	In the Sound Editor, open the file you want to convert.

2.	Choose File/Convert.

The Conversion submenu will appear.

3.	Choose to convert the file either To Mono or To Stereo.

The command corresponding to the current channel status of the sound file will be disabled in the Convert submenu, so you will only have one choice. The file will be converted to the selected channel status.

Converting a mono sample to a stereo sample results in a sound file in which both the right and left channels are identical to the single channel of the original sound. The new stereo sample will be double the size of the original mono sample. Converting a stereo sample to a mono sample results in a sound file in which the single channel is a mix of the original right and left channels. The new mono sample will be smaller than the original stereo sample.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Changing Sample Resolution of a Sound

Changing the Sample Rate of a Sound File


Changing the Sample Rate of a Sound File

To change the sample rate of a sound file

 1.	In the Sound Editor, open the file you want to convert.

2.	Choose File/Convert/Resample...

The Resample dialog box will appear.

3.	Select the radio button that corresponds to the desired sample rate.

You can select one of the standard sample rates, or you can enable the Other radio button and use the slider and the More and Less buttons to specify a custom sample rate. The selected rate will appear in the New Rate field.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The Sound Editor will recalculate the data contained in the sound file, converting it to the new rate without changing the playback time.

Related Topics:

Editing Sound

Changing Sample Resolution of a Sound

Changing the Channel Status of a Sound


Recording Sound

In Astound, you can record sounds from inside the Sound Editor window, or you can record narration to go along with your slides while you watch them play. The sound or narration you record is placed in RAM memory while you are recording. Astound gives you an indicator of how much sound you can record with your currently available amount of RAM.

The Record Sound dialog box contains options that allow you to select a sample rate, channel, and sample resolution, as well as specify the input device which you will be using to record the sound. After you are finished recording, the sample appears in the Sound Editor, where you can make any edits or modifications you like.

From the Select Sound dialog box, you can record narration for your presentation. While your slides are previewed, you can start and stop recording using the [Spacebar].

Related Topics:

Recording Sound in the Sound Editor

Recording Narration

Editing Sound


Recording Sound in the Sound Editor

To record a sound in the Sound Editor

1.	In the Select Sound dialog box, click on the New... button.

The Sound Editor will appear, without any sound file loaded. You can record a sound while you have another sound displayed in the Sound Editor. The recorded sound will be inserted into the displayed sound at the insertion point, or at the front of a selected region.

2.	Click on the Record button, [image] or choose the File/Record Sound... command.

The Record Sound dialog box will appear.

3.	From the Input Device list, select the device you will be using to record sound.

You must have installed a device that supports sound recording, or you will not be able to record sound.

4.	Select the Sample Rate of your recording.

If this function is supported by your playback hardware, you can choose 11025 Hz, 22050 Hz, or 44100 Hz.

5.	Select the Channel that you want to record in.

If this function is supported by your playback hardware, you can choose to record either a Stereo or a Mono sound.

6.	Select a Sample Resolution for your recording.

If this function is supported by your playback hardware, you can choose to make an 8 Bit or a 16 Bit recording.

7.	Click on the Record button.

The recording will start, the Record button will be disabled, and the Pause and End buttons will be enabled. Clicking on the Pause button will temporarily suspend sound recording. When recording is paused, the Pause button will change to the Resume button, which you can click on to resume recording.

8.	Click on the End button to end the recording.

The length of the recording will be displayed in the Recording Time box. You can now preview and edit the sound.

Related Topics:

Recording Sound

Recording Narration

Editing Sound


Recording Narration

You can record narration right on top of your presentation, while you watch the presentation. This allows you to synchronize your narration with the appropriate events on the slide. You simply use the spacebar to toggle recording on and off.

You cannot extend a single narration over more than one slide. When a slide reaches the end of its display, recording will be stopped. You can start recording again by pressing the [Spacebar] when the next slide is displayed.

To record narration

1.	Click on the Add Sound tool.

The Select Sound dialog box will appear.

2.	Click on the Add Narration... button.

A message box will appear, asking you if you want to add narration to the current slide only. Click on the Yes button if you want to add narration to the current slide only. If you click on the No button, the entire presentation will be played, allowing you to add narration as you wish.

3.	Press the [Spacebar] at any time to begin recording narration.

While you are recording, the Recording box will appear on your screen. This box contains a record level indicator.

4.	Press the [Spacebar] at any time to stop the recording.

You can record as many separate narration clips as you can fit on the slide. The narrations are numbered and assigned their own timelines.

5.	When you are finished recording narration, click the right mouse button.

         A pop-up menu will appear, from which you can pause, quit, or change slides.

6.	Choose the Quit Show command from this menu.

The playback of the slide or presentation will end, and you will be returned to the Select Sound dialog box. All of the recorded narrations will appear in the Currently on Slide list, and in the timelines for the slide(s).

Related Topics:

Recording Sound

Recording Sound in the Sound Editor


Using Sound from a Compact Disc
Using Sound from Compact Disc

If you have a CD-ROM drive, you can use it to incorporate tracks from audio compact discs into your presentations as music or sound effects. Astound lets you select entire tracks, or selected sections of tracks on your CD, and designate them as sounds that can be placed on slides in your presentation.

Any CD clip that you define will remain on the CD, and will not be embedded in your presentation. If you remove the CD on which you have defined a clip, that clip will no longer be available.

To define a CD clip

1.	Make sure that the CD you want to use is in your CD-ROM drive.

2.	In the Select Sound dialog box, click on the Define CD Clip... button.

The Define Compact Disc Clip dialog box will appear.

3.	In the Start box, specify the track and time where your CD clip will begin.

You can also drag the slider to specify the starting point. As you drag, the slider's current Track and Time will be displayed below it. If you want to locate your starting point by sound, use the transport controls below the slider to search through the CD as you would normally. The slider will move to reflect your position on the CD.

4.	If you have used the slider or transport controls to locate your start point, click on the Set Start button.

The selected start position will be displayed in the Track and Time fields in the Start box.

5.	In the End box, specify the track and time where your CD clip will end.

If you want the clip to be the end of the selected track, click on the To End of Track button in the End box.

6.	If you have used the slider or transport controls to locate your end point, click on the Set End button.

The selected end position will be displayed in the Track and Time fields in the End box.

7.	Enter a name for the clip you have defined in the Clip Name field.

8.	Click on the OK button.

The CD clip will be added to the Currently Loaded list in the Select Sound dialog box.


Color Schemes

Astound helps you make the best possible color choices by giving you a variety of pre-matched color schemes. Each scheme contains a set of complimentary and contrasting colors, selected for each element of your slide or presentation - text, charts, backgrounds, and interiors - which you can apply as you choose through easy-to-use Color Scheme pop-up windows. By using Astound's color schemes you can create presentations that have a cohesive appearance quickly, without worrying about color mismatches. Your color scheme choices will be saved with the file(s) they are chosen for, allowing you to maintain the look you have created for your slides. You can also save color schemes on their own so that they can be used in other presentations.

Astound allows you to choose a preset color scheme that suits your presentation, or to create a custom color scheme containing element colors that you choose or create yourself. You can assign a different color scheme to each slide in your presentation, but you can also use the same color scheme throughout the entire presentation in order to maintain a uniform appearance.

To choose a color scheme

1.	Choose Slide/Color Schemes...

The Color Schemes dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the color scheme you want to use from the Name drop-down list.

The colors contained in the selected color scheme will be displayed in the color rectangles.

3.	In the Apply To box, specify what you want to apply the specified color scheme to.

If you enable the Presentation radio button, the specified color scheme will be applied to all slides in the presentation. If you enable the Slide radio button, the specified color scheme will be applied to the current slide only. This means that the selected color scheme will only appear in the Color Scheme pop-up windows when you are working on the slide to which it was applied.

4.	Click on the Select button.

When you replace one color scheme with another, Astound maps the original color scheme colors to their counterparts in the new color scheme.

Related Topics:

Editing Color Schemes

Creating Color Schemes

Removing Color Schemes

Selecting Colors

Using the Color Mixer

Using the Color Spectrum

Using the Eyedropper


Editing Color Schemes

You can change the colors that are included in a color scheme, and then save the selections as an entirely new color scheme with a different name, or as an updated version of the original color scheme. There are three ways of choosing new colors: the Color Mixer lets you define a color numerically by Red, Green, Blue, or Hue, Saturation, Brightness values, the Color Spectrum lets you choose a color from a 128 color palette, and the Eyedropper lets you select any color that is currently displayed in Astound.

To change the colors in a color scheme

1.	Choose Slide/Color Schemes...

The Color Schemes dialog box will appear.

2.	Click on the rectangle containing the color you want to change to select it.

3.	Click on the Color Mixer, Color Spectrum, or Eyedropper button, depending on how you want to choose the new color.

The dialog box will expand to include the appropriate options.

4.	Specify a new color.

5.	Click on the Save button.

The Save Color Scheme dialog box will appear, with the current name of the color scheme in the Color Scheme Name edit box.

6.	Enter a name for the modified color scheme.

If you do not enter a new name for the modified color scheme, a warning message will appear, advising you that the original scheme's colors will be overwritten by the modifications you have made. You can choose to cancel the save, or continue and overwrite the original color scheme.

7.	Click on the Save button in the Save Color Scheme dialog box.

The color scheme will be saved under the new name, and you will be returned to the Color Schemes dialog box.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes

Creating Color Schemes

Removing Color Schemes


Creating New Color Schemes

You can create color schemes containing any colors you choose, and then save them using descriptive names so you can remember what type of look they will give a slide or presentation. For example, a color scheme you create that contains shades of yellows and browns could be called Desert Motif.

To create a new color scheme

1.	Choose Slide/Color Schemes...

The Color Schemes dialog box will appear.

2.	Select (New) from the Name drop-down list.

The Name field will be cleared, as will the color rectangles.

3.	Click on the Color Mixer, Color Spectrum, or Eyedropper button, depending on how you want to choose the new colors.

The dialog box will expand to include the appropriate options.

4.	Specify a new color by clicking on an empty color box in the left side of the dialog box, and then on the new color in the right side of the dialog box.

5.	Click on the Save button.

The Save Color Scheme dialog box will appear.

6.	Enter a name for the new color scheme.

7.	Click on the Save button in the Save Color Scheme dialog box.

 The new color scheme will be added to the list of available schemes.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes

Editing Color Schemes

Removing Color Schemes


Removing a Color Scheme

You can remove a color scheme when you are sure you will not want to use it in future presentations. Removing a color scheme will take its name out of the list of saved color schemes - you will no longer be able to apply it to slides or presentations. However, any slide or presentation that uses a color scheme that you remove will still make use of it, even after the scheme has been removed from the list of saved color schemes.

All color schemes that are used in slides and presentations are saved as a part of the slide or presentation. Even after a color scheme has been removed from disk it will still exist in the slides and presentations in which it has been used.

To remove a color scheme

1.	Choose Slide/Color Schemes...

The Color Schemes dialog box will appear.

2.	Using the Name drop-down list, select the color scheme you wish to remove.

3.	Click on the Remove button.

The name of the selected color scheme will no longer appear in the Name drop-down list.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes

Creating Color Schemes

Editing Color Schemes


Selecting Colors

When you choose colors using the Color Scheme pop-up windows, the twenty-four colors of the currently selected color scheme will be displayed in rectangles that are arranged into usage groupings. You can follow the suggested color groupings, but you are always free to choose any displayed color for any object attribute. For example, you can select a color from the Chart grouping for use as an Interior color, and you can select colors from the Background or Text color groupings for use as Chart colors.

To select a pattern foreground or background color

This color will show if you choose the solid foreground color pattern from the Pattern pop-up palette. It is also the color at the front of standard patterns.

1.	Click on the Foreground Color or Background Color tool.

A Color Scheme pop-up window will appear, containing the colors in the currently selected color scheme.

2.	Click on the color you want to use.

This color will be your foreground or background color and will be displayed on the face of the Foreground Color or Background Color tool.

3.	If you want to choose a color that is not displayed in the current color scheme, click on the Color Mixer, Color Spectrum, or Eyedropper buttons.

Any new color you select using any of these methods will not be included in the current color scheme. If you select a new color scheme, any color chosen using these methods will not change. The color you choose will be your foreground color, and will be displayed on the face of the Foreground Color tool.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes


Using the Color Mixer

The Color Mixer allows you to specify an exact color numerically.

To create a color using the Color Mixer

1.	Display the Color Mixer.

If you click on the Color Mixer button in a Color Scheme pop-up window, the Color Mixer dialog box will appear. If you click on the Color Mixer button in the Color Schemes dialog box, the Color Mixer will be added to the Color Scheme dialog box.

2.	By clicking or dragging, position the color refiner cursor in the color refiner box to select a color similar to what you are looking for.

3.	Specify the brightness using the vertical luminosity bar, to the right of the color refiner box.

Sliding the marker upward increases the luminosity value, while sliding the marker downward decreases it. You can also specify the luminosity by entering or selecting a number in the Lum edit box.

4.	Change any of the Hue, Saturation, and RGB values to create the color you want.

5.	Place the new color.

If you opened the Color Mixer from the Color Schemes dialog box, you can click on the Accept button to replace the selected color scheme color with the new color specified in the Color Mixer.

If you opened the Color Mixer from a Color Scheme pop-up window, you can click on the OK button to select the new color specified in the Color Mixer. The Color Mixer dialog box will disappear.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes


Using the Color Spectrum

The Color Spectrum gives you a choice of 128 colors.

To select a color from the Color Spectrum

1.	Display the Color Spectrum.

If you click on the Color Spectrum button in a Color Scheme pop-up window, the Color Spectrum dialog box will appear. If you click on the Color Spectrum button in the Color Schemes dialog box, the Color Spectrum will be added to the Color Scheme dialog box.

2.	Select a color by clicking on the desired square.

The Color Spectrum will contain a sampling of 128 colors, organized in a palette of color squares. When you click on a color, the square it is contained in will be surrounded by a highlight border, indicating that it is selected.

3.	Place the new color.

If you opened the Color Spectrum from the Color Schemes dialog box, you can click on the Accept button to replace the selected color scheme color with the new color specified in the Color Spectrum.

If you opened the Color Spectrum from a Color Scheme pop-up window, you can click on the OK button to select the new color specified in the Color Mixer. The Color Spectrum dialog box will disappear.

You can also select a color by double-clicking on it.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes


Using the Eyedropper

The Eyedropper allows you to choose any color that is displayed on your screen so that you can get an exact match.

To select a color using the Eyedropper

1.	Click on the Eyedropper button.

There are Eyedropper buttons in the Color Scheme pop-up windows, and in the Color Schemes dialog box.

The cursor will assume the form of an eyedropper, and all Astound dialog boxes and pop-up windows will be hidden.

The Eyedropper dialog box will appear. This dialog box is movable, and contains a preview of the color that the eyedropper is currently over, as well as the Red, Green, and Blue values of the color.

2.	Click on the color you want to select.

Pressing the [ESC] key will halt the eyedropper selection without choosing any color, and will close the Eyedropper dialog box.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes


Displaying Object Fills

You can display the solid color or standard pattern fills in object interiors to see what your slide will look like, or you can hide the fills so that your screen will redraw faster. This option will also cause the fills in object interiors to be hidden during printing.

To show the fills used in object interiors for display and printing

1.	Choose Object/Display...

The Object Display dialog boxwill appear.

2.	Enable the Interior radio button.

The interior attributes of objects will be displayed.

3.	Enable the Show Interior checkbox.

When this option is disabled, you will not be able to see the colors and patterns used in object interiors.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes

Solid Colors

Patterns

Gradient Fills

Coloring Text

Borders

Shadows


Solid Colors

In order to fill an object's interior with a solid color, you must have either the solid foreground color pattern or the solid background color pattern selected. If you select the solid foreground color pattern, the object will be filled with the currently specified foreground color. If you select the solid background color pattern, the object will be filled with the currently specified background color.

You can specify the interior color of an object in the Color Scheme pop-up windows, which can be displayed in two ways. You can use the Foreground Color and Background Color tools in the Astound tool palette, or you can use the Object/Display... command to display the Object Display dialog box.

To fill objects with a solid color using the Color tools

1.	Select the object(s).

If you do not select any object(s), you will be setting the default colors for all subsequently drawn objects.

2.	Press and hold on the Attributes button in the Astound tool palette.

The Attributes pop-up palette will appear.

3.	Select the Interior Attributes button.

The Color buttons and the Pattern button will now apply to object interiors.

4.	Press and hold the mouse button on the Pattern tool.

The Pattern palette will appear.

The first two patterns in the Pattern pop-up palette allow you to select solid colors for your fills. Selecting the first pattern will fill the object with the color displayed on the Foreground Color button, selecting the pattern below this will fill the object with the color displayed on the Background Color button.

5.	Drag the mouse to either of the solid color patterns, and release the mouse button.

6.	Click the mouse button on either the Foreground Color tool or the Background Color tool, depending on which pattern you selected.

A Color Scheme pop-up window will appear.

7.	Choose a color from those displayed in the rectangles of the Color Scheme pop-up, or create or select a different color.

The selected object(s) will be filled with the specified color, or, if no objects were selected, the default color will be set.

Related Topics:

Filling Objects using the Object Display Dialog Box

Patterns

Gradient Fills


Filling Objects using the Object Display Dialog Box

To fill objects with a solid color using the Object menu

1.	Select the object(s) you want to fill.

2.	Choose Object/Display...

The Object Display dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Interior radio button.

The Interior attributes will be displayed, with the currently selected pattern and color(s) displayed in the Preview box.

4.	Press and hold the mouse button on the Pattern button in the Object Display dialog box.

The Pattern palette will appear.

5.	Drag the mouse to either of the solid color patterns, and release the mouse button.

The selected solid color pattern will appear on the face of the Pattern tool.

6.	Click the mouse button on either the Foreground Color button or the Background Color button in the Object Display dialog box, depending on which pattern you selected.

7.	Choose a color from the palette in the pop-up window, or create or select a different color.

8.	Click on the Accept Changes button.

The selected object(s) will be filled with the specified color.

Related Topics:

Solid Colors

Patterns

Gradient Fills


Patterns

An object is colored according to the pattern that is selected for it. If you select a solid color pattern, the object will be filled with the solid foreground or background color that is currently selected for it. If you select a standard pattern, the object will be filled with that pattern, using the foreground and background colors that are currently specified for the object.

You can use the Pattern pop-up palette to change the pattern on an object. You can display this palette by clicking on the Pattern tool in the Astound tool palette, or by clicking on the Pattern button in the Object Display dialog box.

To change the patterns of objects using the Pattern tool

1.	Select the object(s).

2.	Press and hold on the Pattern tool, located beneath the Color tools.

The Pattern pop-up palette will appear.

3.	Drag the pointer to the pattern you want.

4.	Release the mouse button to select the pattern.

This pattern will now show on the face of the Pattern tool.

5.	Use the Color Scheme pop-up windows to select foreground and background colors for the pattern.

Related Topics:

Solid Colors

Gradient Fills


Creating and Editing a Gradinet Fill
Creating and Editing a Gradient Fill

A gradient is a graduated blend of two or more colors. You can create an original look for your object by adding graduated colors. You can control the colors in the gradient, the direction in which the gradient flows and the texture of the gradient.

Gradients should not be added to an object to which you intend to give a rotation transition, as gradients are complex fills and cannot be rotated.

You can create both simple and multi-color gradients. Simple gradient fills use two or more shades of the same basic color. Multi-color gradient fills can make use of several different colors.

To fill objects with a simple gradient

You can also fill text blocks with gradients, but not individually selected text in text blocks.

1.	Select the object(s) you want to fill.

If no objects are selected, the gradient you create will become the default.

2.	Press and hold on the Gradient tool in the tool palette.

The Gradient pop-up menu will appear. If you have any gradients already stored, they will be listed in this menu. You can select one of the stored gradients or select New... to create a new gradient.

3.	Select New... to create a new gradient.

The Gradient dialog box will appear.

4.	Press and hold the mouse button on the Start Color button.

A Color Scheme pop-up window will appear.

5.	Choose a color from the rectangles in the pop-up, or create or select a different color.

You can use the Eyedropper, Color Spectrum, or Color Mixer to create or select a color outside the current color scheme.

6.	Select an end color by dragging the marker along the End Color band until the desired color is selected.

7.	Select the direction of the gradient by clicking on any of the direction options.

8.	Select the type of gradient by clicking on the desired sample in the Type box.

9.	Click on the OK button.

Your gradient becomes the fill of your object.

Related Topics:

Creating Multi-Color Gradients


Creating Multicolor Gradients
Creating Multi-color Gradients

To create a multi-color gradient fill

1.	Select the object(s) you want to fill.

If no objects are selected, the gradient you create will become the default.

2.	Press and hold the mouse button on the Gradient pop-up menu.

3.	Drag and release the mouse button on New...

The Gradient dialog box will appear.

You can also access this dialog box by double-clicking on any object that is filled with a gradient.

4.	Select the direction of the gradient by clicking on any of the direction options.

5.	Select the type of gradient by clicking on the desired sample in the Type box.

6.	Click on the Multi-Color... button.

The Multi-Color Gradient dialog box will appear. The currently selected color scheme will appear in the Colors box.

7.	If a gradient is already displayed and you don't want to use it, click on the Clear All button.

8.	Select the colors you want to use by double-clicking on them in the Colors box in the order that you want them to appear in the gradient.

9.	If you want to clear a selected color, click on the Clear Color button.

10.	If you want to reverse the order of your color choices, click on the Flip button.

11. 	Enable the Dither Colors checkbox to blend the colors you have chosen.

If this option is disabled, the display of the gradient will show distinct bands of transition color. When enabled, this option causes the colors to undergo a more gradual change.

12.	Enable the Use Intermediate Colors checkbox to add extra colors to the gradient.

This makes the gradient appear to be blended more gradually. If this option is disabled, the blending of colors in the gradient will appear to be less refined.

13.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Creating and Editing Gradient Fills


Coloring Text

You can specify color for any text you use on a slide using the Text/Color submenu. This submenu will list all of the colors specified for text in your color scheme.

You can select one of these colors to fill the currently selected text. A default color can be specified by selecting the color when there is no text selected.

The submenu also contains an Other... command. This command displays a Color Scheme pop-up window so that you can choose a different color for your text from the current color scheme, or create a color using the Eyedropper, Color Spectrum, or Color Mixer.

To specify a text color from the text color scheme

1.	Select the text you want to color.

You can select specific text or entire text blocks.

2.	Choose Text/Color.

The Color submenu will appear.

3.	Choose the color you want to use from the list in the submenu.

The text will become the selected color.

If you select a color from this menu without any text selected, the color will become the default color of all subsequent text that you add to your presentation.

Related Topics:

Text


Specifying a Text Color Outside of the Color Scheme

To specify a custom text color

1.	Select the text you want to color.

2.	Choose Text/Color/Other...

The Text Color dialog box will appear.

3.	Select a color from the color scheme or create a new one with the Eyedropper, Color Mixer, or Color Spectrum.

You can apply gradients to text blocks, but not to selected text in a text block.

Related Topics:

Coloring Text

Text


Borders

Borders are the outlines of objects. You can hide and display the borders and change their sizes and colors.

To display or hide the borders

1.	Select the object(s).

2.	Choose Object/Display...

The Object Display dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Border radio button.

The Border attributes of the object will be displayed. If you have multiple objects selected, the attributes of the first object selected will be displayed.

4.	Enable the Show Border checkbox.

This is a toggle option that controls the display of object borders. When the checkbox is selected, the borders of the selected object(s) will be displayed.

5.	Click on the Accept Changes button.

Related Topics:

Border Size

Border Color

Line Weight

Line Color

Displaying Object Fills

Shadows


Border Size

To change the size of borders

1.	Select the object(s) you want to change.

2.	Choose Object/Display...

The Object Display dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Border radio button.

The Border attributes will be displayed.

4.	In the Border Size box, select the radio button that corresponds to the point size you want.

5.	Click on the Accept Changes button.

The dialog box will disappear and the borders of the selected objects will change to meet your new specifications.

Related Topics:

Borders

Border Color

Line Color

Line Weight


Border Color

There are different ways to set the color and pattern of a border. You can use the Object menu or the Color Scheme and Pattern pop-ups.

To select border colors and patterns using the pop-up menus

1.	Select the object(s) you want to change.

2.	Press and hold on the Attributes button in the Astound tool palette.

3.	Select the Border Attributes button.

The Color Scheme buttons and the Pattern button will now apply to object borders.

4.	Select the color and patterns that you want on your border the same way you would for an object.

The border will be redrawn with the new color and/or pattern.

Related Topics:

Border Size

Borders

Line Colors

Line Weight


Shadows

You can display shadows for your objects. Astound allows you to customize your shadows, so you can specify their size and location relative to their objects. There are two ways to change the color and pattern of a shadow: through the Object menu, or through the Color and Pattern pop-up menus.

To display a shadow

1.	Select the object(s).

2.	Choose Object/Display...

The Object Display dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Shadow radio button.

The Shadow attributes will be displayed.

4.	Enable the Show Shadow checkbox.

This is a toggle option that controls the display of object shadows. When the checkbox is selected, the shadows of the selected object(s) will be displayed.

5.	Click on the Accept Changes button.

Related Topics:

Specifying Shadow Offsets

Setting Shadow Colors


Specifying Shadow Offsets

To change the shadow offset

1.	Select the object(s) you wish to change.

If no object is selected, the offset you specify will become the default.

2.	Choose Object/Display...

The Object Display dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Shadow radio button.

4.	Set the offset you want.

Changing the numbers in the Horizontal and Vertical edit boxes. The larger the values, the further   to the right and below the object the shadow will be. You can move the shadow above or to the left of the object by entering negative (-) numbers in the appropriate edit box.

Positioning the pointer within the preview window, and dragging the pointer to position the shadow. Pressing the [Shift] key while dragging will keep the same horizontal or vertical offset.

5.	Click on the Accept Changes button.

Related Topics:

Shadows

Setting Shadow Colors


Setting Shadow Colors

To select shadow colors and patterns using the pop-up menus

1.	Select the object(s) you want to change.

2.	Press and hold on the Attributes button in the Astound tool palette.

The Attributes pop-up palette will appear.

3.	Select the Shadow Attributes button.

The Color buttons and the Pattern button will now apply to object shadows.

4.	Select the color and patterns that you want on your shadow the same way you would for an object.

The shadow will be redrawn with the new color and/or pattern.

Related Topics:

Shadows

Shadow Offsets


Line Weights

You can specify the thickness of the line segments you draw by selecting one of the preset line weights from the Object/Line submenu, or by selecting Object/Line/Other..., and specifying a custom thickness in the Line Weight dialog box.

To select the thickness of lines from the Line menu

1.	Select the line(s) you want to change.

2.	Choose Object/Line and the point size you want.

You can choose 1 Point, 2 Point, 4 Point, 8 Point, or Other.

Related Topics:

Custom Line Weights

Border Sizes

Border Color


Customizing LIne Weights
Custom Line Weights

To set a custom line weight

1.	Select the line(s) you want to change.

2.	Choose Object/Line/Other...

The Line Weight dialog box will appear.

3.	Enter a value in the Set Line Weight edit box.

4.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Line Colors

Line Weights

Border Sizes


Line Colors

You can specify colors and patterns for your line segments in the Display Object dialog box, or by using the Color Scheme and Pattern pop-up menus in the tool bar.

To change the color of lines using the pop-up menus

1. 	Select the line(s) you want to change.

2.	Press and hold on the Attributes button in the Astound tool palette.

3.	Select the Border Attributes button.

The Color buttons will now apply to the selected line(s).

4.	Select the color that you want on your line in the same way you would select a border color for any other object.

The line will be redrawn with the new color.

Related Topics:

Line Weight

Border Color


Arrows

You can attach arrowheads to one or both ends of lines that you draw. These arrowheads are part of the line itself, and have the same color and pattern as the line. You can also create a variety of arrow shapes using the Drawing tool in the Astound tool palette. This type of arrow is an object for which you can specify colors and patterns.

To add an arrowhead to a line

1.	Select the line(s) to which you want to add arrowheads.

2.	Choose Object/Line.

The Line submenu will appear.

3.	Select the arrow format you want.

You can select no arrowhead, or you can place an arrowhead at the beginning, end, or at both ends of a line.

Related Topics:

Modifying Arrowheads


Modifying Arrowheads

To modify an arrowhead

1.	Select the line you want to modify.

2.	Choose Object/Line/Define Arrowheads...

The Define Arrowheads dialog box will appear.

3.	In the Length edit box, enter the desired length.

You can also click on the Length up and down arrows to increase or decrease the length of the arrowhead.

4.	In the Span edit box, enter the desired span.

Span is the width of the arrowhead at its base. You can also click on the Span up and down arrows to increase or decrease the span of the arrowhead.

5.	In the Inset edit box, enter the desired inset.

The inset is the indentation on the back side of an arrowhead, where it connects to the line. You can specify positive or negative values for the inset. Negative values will stretch the arrowhead back along the line. If you make the inset equal to the length, but in the negative direction, you can form the arrowhead into a diamond shape.

6.	Click on the OK button.

The arrowhead you specified will appear on selected arrows and on any subsequent arrows that you draw.

Related Topics:

Arrows


Color Enhancement

You can use the commands in the Object/Enhance Color submenu to optimize the colors displayed on your monitor to better match the colors used in objects on your screen. This function will be available in all color modes, but it will only be effective in 256 color displays.

By using the color enhancement functions in Astound, you can redefine the unreserved colors in the group of 256 to better suit specific objects, especially pictures. For example, if you selected the jungle picture from the previous example and selected Object/Enhance Color/Selected Objects command, more greens from the picture would be included in the group of 256, and the jungle picture would look much better on the screen.

In general, the display of objects that use only a few colors will be disrupted less by a massive color enhancement than objects such as bitmapped pictures, which employ a large number of colors, especially a large number of similar colors.

To enhance the on-screen display of color by redefining display colors

1.	Select the object(s) you want to enhance.

This will work best on pictures that use many similar colors. If you select a group of objects, especially objects that are radically different in color content, Astound will choose a balanced selection of display colors to exchange with the unreserved colors in the original group of 256 display colors.

You do not have to select any object(s) if you are enhancing the display of a slide background.

2.	Choose Object/Enhance Color.

The Enhance Color submenu will be displayed.

Selected Objects: The colors defined in the selected object(s) will be considered when making up the new group of display colors.

Background: The colors defined in the slide background will be considered when making up the new group of display colors.

Both: The colors defined in both the slide background and the selected object(s) will be considered when making up the new group of display colors.

Reset: The display colors will be reset to those that are included in the default group that is loaded when you start Astound.

3.	Select the enhancement option according to what you want enhanced.


Selecting Objects

Astound follows standard Microsoft Windows object selection conventions, including clicking and dragging marquees (rectangles that define a selection by enclosing it). You can always recognize selected objects by the small black squares called handles around the outer edges of the objects.

There are two ways of selecting an object:

Select the Pointer tool, position the pointer anywhere on the object to be selected, and click on the object.

Select the Pointer tool, position the pointer outside the boundaries of the object to be selected, drag the pointer until the marquee surrounds the object, then release the mouse button. If you hold down the [Ctrl] key while dragging, the marquee only has to touch the object rather than enclose it to select it.

There are four ways of selecting multiple objects:

Position the pointer outside the boundary of the objects to be selected, drag the pointer until the marquee surrounds all of the objects to be selected, then release the mouse button. If you hold down the [Ctrl] key while dragging, the marquee only has to touch the objects rather than enclose them to select them.

While holding down the [Shift] key, click on each object to be selected.

Choose Edit/Select All to select every object on the slide.

Double-click on the Pointer tool to select all objects on the slide.

Related Topics:

Deselecting Objects

Selecting Objects within a Group


Deselecting Objects

There are two ways to deselect objects:

Click anywhere on the background of the document window to deselect all selected objects.

Hold down the [Shift] key and click on the selected object(s) you want to deselect.

Related Topics:

Selecting Objects


Layering Objects

In Astound, the objects on the screen are layered according to the order in which they are drawn. Each object is on its own layer. Objects that are placed first are at the very back of the drawing order, while objects placed most recently are at the very front of the drawing order. By changing the location of various objects in the drawing order, you can change the appearance of your slide.

You can move a selected object, several objects, or groups of objects to the very front or to the very back of the drawing order, or you can move them forward or backward one layer at a time.

To change the layering of objects

1.	Select the object(s) you want to change the layer of.

2.	Choose Object/Layer and then choose from one of the following options:

Bring to Front: Moves the selected object(s) in front of all other objects.

Send to Back: Moves the selected object(s) behind all other objects.

Up One Layer: Moves the selected object forward one layer.

Down One Layer: Moves the selected object back one layer.


Grouping Objects

You may combine several objects to form a group that is treated as a single object. Any operations you perform on the group will be performed on all the objects within the group. You can have groups within groups to form nested groups.

You should group objects together once you have created a complete entity, such as a logo. When you create a group, you prevent the individual components from being accidentally changed or selected. If you want to change parts of your grouped object, you can still select objects within the group.

To group objects

1.	Select the objects you want to group.

The selected objects will have handles on their edges.

2.	Choose Object/Group.

This option will only be available if more than one object is selected.

The objects are now grouped and there will be only one set of handles surrounding the group.

To ungroup objects

If you do not want the objects grouped together any more, you can separate them again.

1.	Select the group you want to ungroup.

2.	Choose Object/Ungroup.

The objects are ungrouped and each object has its own set of handles.

Related Topics:

Selecting Objects within a Group


Selecting Objects within a Group

There are two ways to select objects within a group:

Position the pointer on the object that you want to select and double-click the mouse button. This will select an item one level into the group. Further double-clicks will move further into nested groups.

Position the pointer on the object that you want to select within the group and hold down the [Alt] key as you click the mouse button. This will select a single object regardless of any groups. This option is useful if you have groups within groups.


Rulers

Astound has two rulers: one across the top of your document window, and one down the left side. You can use rulers to determine the distance between objects, the dimensions of an object, or to locate exact points on your artwork while drawing, reshaping, transforming, and moving objects. You can choose to hide or show the rulers and you can choose the unit of measurement.

To show or hide rulers

1.	Choose View/Show Rulers.

A checkmark will appear beside View/Show Rulers when the rulers are visible.

Setting units of measurement for rulers

Astound allows you to set the units of measurements used. The selected units will be displayed on the Ruler. The units you set will affect all units in Astound.

1.	Choose View/Preferences/ Display...

The Display Preferences dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the units of measurement that you prefer.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The rulers are displayed in your specified measurement units.


Grids

Grids are a series of equally spaced dotted lines that run horizontally and vertically across your screen. Each row or column of dots represents a grid line. You can use grid lines to help guide you when you are placing objects on your slide, or you can have Astound automatically snap objects to the grid. When you choose Snap to Grid, Astound automatically places your object so that it lines up with the grid lines. You can adjust the spacing between grid lines.

To show or hide grid lines

1.	Choose View/Show Grid.

A checkmark will appear beside View/Show Grid when the grid is visible.

Related Topics:

Snapping to Grid Lines

Setting Grid Spacing


Snap To Grid

Using grid lines and the Snap to Grid function, you can draw, reshape, transform and move objects more accurately. When you enable the Snap to Grid command and move your objects, the object's handles automatically align themselves with the nearest grid lines. The grids do not need to be visible in order for you to use the Snap to Grid option.

To enable the Snap to Grid option

1.	Enable View/Snap To Grid.

A checkmark will appear beside View/Snap to Grid when snap to grid is enabled.

Related Topics:

Setting Grid Spacing

Grids


Setting Grid Spacing

You can specify the distance between grip lines so that they best suit your needs.

To set the grid spacing

1.	Choose View/Preferences/Display...

The Display Preferences dialog box will appear.

2.	Enter values for the spacing between grid lines in the Horizontal Spacing and Vertical Spacing fields.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The grid lines will now be spaced to your specifications.

Related Topics:

Grids

Snapping To Grids


Aligning Objects

Astound allows you to align your objects in different ways. You can line up object boundaries to accurately place them. You can also align objects by their axes or by their edges.

To align objects

1.	Select the objects you wish to align.

2.	Choose Object/Align.

The following alignment options are displayed:

3.	Choose the desired option.

Your objects will be aligned in the manner specified.

Related Topics:

Centering Objects


Centering Objects

You can center your objects on the slide horizontally, vertically, or both ways.

To center objects

1.	Select the object(s) you wish to center.

2.	Choose Object/Center on Slide.

The following options appear:

Both: Centers the selected object(s) both horizontally and vertically on the slide.

Vertically: Centers the selected object(s) vertically on the slide.

Horizontally: Centers the selected object(s) horizontally on the slide.

3.	Choose the desired option.

Your object(s) will be centered the way you specified.

Related Topics:

Aligning Objects


Moving Objects

Once you have placed objects on a slide, moving them around the slide and between slides and presentations is easy.

To move objects around a slide

1.	Position the pointer on the object.

2.	Press and hold the mouse button.

3.	Drag the object to its new position.

4.	Release the mouse button when the object is where you want it to be.

Related Topics:

Nudging Objects


Nudging Objects

You can precisely align objects by nudging them a pixel at a time. Use the [Up] and [Down] cursor keys and the [Left] and [Right] arrow keys to specify the direction.

To nudge objects

1.	Select the object(s) you wish to nudge.

2.	Press the arrow cursor keys.

The object(s) will move a pixel for each press of an arrow key, in the direction of the arrows.

Related Topics:

Moving Objects


Using the Clipboard

Astound uses the standard Microsoft Windows Clipboard to copy and paste objects quickly and easily. You can copy and paste items to and from other applications and between Astound presentations.

Related Topics:

Removing Objects

Copying Objects

Pasting Objects

Duplicating Objects


Removing Objects

To remove objects

There are three ways to remove objects:

Select the object(s) and choose Edit/Cut.

This option places the object(s) on the Clipboard so they can be pasted to another location, slide, or application.

Select the object(s) and choose Edit/Clear.

This option clears the object(s) without placing a copy on the clipboard.

Select the object(s) and press [Del]. The object(s) will be cleared.

You can recover the most recent editing action by selecting Edit/Undo.

Related Topics:

Using the Clipboard

Copying Objects

Pasting Objects


Copying Objects

To copy objects

1.	Select the object(s).

2.	Choose Edit/Copy.

This places the object(s) on the Clipboard so that they can be pasted to another location, slide, or application.

Related Topics:

Pasting Objects

Duplicating Objects


Pasting Objects

To paste objects

1.	With an object on the clipboard, choose Edit/Paste.

If you are pasting an object that already exists on the slide, it will be placed on top of the original object. If this occurs, select the top copy and drag it to the desired location.

Related Topics:

Duplicating Objects

Copying Objects

Removing Objects


Duplicating Objects

You can duplicate objects so that a copy is made and pasted beside the original.

To duplicate objects

There are two ways to duplicate items:

Select the object you want to duplicate and choose Edit/Duplicate.

Press and hold the [Ctrl] key and drag a copy to a new location.

The new copy appears on the screen. After you duplicate, you can move the new item and select Duplicate repeatedly to keep duplicating with the same offset.

Related Topics:

Copying Objects

Pasting Objects


Resizing and Reshaping Objects

You can adjust the width and height of your object, making it bigger or smaller, taller or shorter, wider or thinner.

Cropping your objects allows you to square off edges and show only the portion of the object you need. For example, you might have clipart of a bird, which can be cropped so that only the head is shown on your slide.

Astound allows you to resize objects using the Pointer tool or the Resize... command. Multiple objects can be resized with the same ratio by selecting all objects to be altered and then resizing them the same way.

Related Topics:

Resizing Objects with the Pointer

Resizing Objects with the Menu

Cropping objects

Distorting Shapes

Flipping Shapes


Resizing Objects with the Pointer

To resize objects using the Pointer tool

1.	Position the Pointer tool on one of the handles of the selected object.

The pointer will change to a two-headed arrow.

2.	Press the mouse button and drag the handle.

An image of the object's bounding box will follow the cursor.

To retain the original proportions (aspect ratio) of the object, press and hold the [Shift] key as you drag the pointer.

3.	Release the mouse button when the image is the right size.

The object will be redrawn to the new size.

Related Topics:

Resizing Objects with the Menu

Resizing and Reshaping Objects


Resizing Objects with the Menu

You can use the Resize... command in the Object menu to resize your objects, where the Resize Object dialog box lets you enter numerical values to scale your object as a percentage of the original size, or you can enter the actual size that you want the object to be. You can always choose the Best Size option in the Resize Object dialog box to return an image, actor, video, or shapes, to their original size.

To resize objects using the Object menu

1.	Select the object(s) you want to resize.

2.	Choose Object/Resize...

The Resize Object dialog box will appear.

The current width and height, in the selected units, are displayed at the top of the dialog box.

3.	Enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox if you want your width and height to stay proportional.

4.	Select the option you want for resizing your object.

5.	Enter the appropriate values for your chosen method.

6.	Click on the OK button.

Your object will be resized to your specifications.

Related Topics:

Resizing Objects with the Pointer Menu

Resizing and Reshaping Objects


Cropping Objects

If you only want a portion of an object to show, you can crop the object. Cropping allows you to select a portion of an object to display and hide the parts you don't want showing. For example, you may have imported a picture of a bird but you only want the head to show on your slide. You can crop the picture so that only the head shows.

To crop your objects

1.	Select the object you want to crop.

2.	Place the Pointer tool on the handle at the edge or corner from which you want to crop.

Make sure that the pointer turns to a two-headed arrow.

3.	Hold down the [Ctrl] key.

4.	Press and hold the mouse button and drag to crop your object.

Horizontal and/or vertical hairline(s) will move across the object showing you where it will be cropped.

5. 	Release the [Ctrl] key and mouse button.

The object is cropped to the last position of the hairline.

An outline of the original shape will appear whenever you drag the object to remind you of the original size.

Related Topics:

Resizing and Reshaping Objects


Distorting Shapes

You can stretch and change freehand shapes, polygons, speech balloons, regular polygons, stars, parallelograms, right triangles, and arrows by grabbing a point and using modifier keys while you drag them. For example, you can make your points really long to give your shapes spikes, or stretch your shapes to look like they have depth.

NOTE: You cannot use this feature with the rectangle, rounded rectangle, oblong, ellipse, arc, or line tools.

To distort shapes

1.	Select the shape you want to modify.

2.	Position the pointer on a point of your shape.

Make sure the pointer is on a point of the shape, not the handles. The pointer will change to a crosshair.

3. 	Hold down a modifier key and drag the point to reshape the object.

The modifiers are:

No modifier: Repositions the point. You can make your shape look like it has spikes on it. You can reposition the point on a speech balloon to show different speakers.

[Alt] key: Stretches your whole shape starting with the point you selected and then pulling the points closest to it until the whole shape changes.

[Shift] key: Keeps the same edge shape while elongating the shape. You can make a many-sided polygon look like a cylinder. This option pulls out a portion of a shape without distorting it.

[Ctrl] key: Pulls the point and a few points around it, but it does not alter the other points in the shape. You can make many-sided polygon look like a round speech balloon.

[Shift][Ctrl] keys: Stretches the shape and starts to pull all the points with it, moving the X coordinates and Y coordinates independently.

4.	Release the mouse button to set the shape.

Related Topics:

Resizing and Reshaping Objects


Flipping Shapes

You can flip any shape drawn with the drawing tools to change its direction. A shape can be flipped upside down (vertically) or side to side (horizontally).

To flip shapes

1.	Select the shape.

2.	Choose Object/Flip/Vertically or Object/Flip/Horizontally.

Your shape will be flipped the way you specified.

Related Topics:

Resizing and Reshaping Objects


Converting Objects to Bitmaps

If you have drawn or imported a complicated piece of artwork that takes a long time to redraw, you may want to convert it to bitmap format. Changing to a bitmap converts the artwork to the environment that your monitor is using.  Converting them to bitmaps can make the redrawing process faster. Or, you may have imported a picture that redraws slowly. If you convert it to bitmap format, it will help your object redraw quickly and smoothly. Objects that are converted to bitmaps will no longer be structured and will print with jagged edges. You should size your objects before converting them to bitmaps. Converting to bitmaps is best for on-line presentations that you want to redraw quickly.

Bitmap objects can not be converted back to their original format.

To convert an object to a bitmap

1.	Select the object(s) you want to convert.

You can select more than one object, but if you are selecting many separate parts and you want to join them into a single bitmap, be sure to group the objects first.

2.	Choose Object/Convert To Bitmap...

The Convert Object to Bitmap dialog box will appear.

3. 	Select the display option that you wish to use.

4.	Click on the OK button.

Your object will now be a bitmap.


Undo Command

In most cases, you can undo the last editing action you performed by using the Undo command. For example, if you moved an object by mistake and you want to return it to its original position, you can undo the move. Some edits, such as bitmap conversions, cannot be undone.

To undo editing commands

1.	Immediately after performing an editing operation, choose Edit/Undo or click on the Undo button.

Your document will return to the previous state.

After you use the Undo command, it will change to the Redo command. You can reverse the undo by choosing Edit/Redo.


Slide Duration

You can specify the length of time each slide is displayed on-screen to suit your needs and create the desired effect. This is only the basic length of the slide. You can also add interactive pauses to a slide so that it only continues playing after the presenter clicks on screen or presses a keyboard key.

To set a slide duration

1.	Go to the slide for which you wish to set the slide duration.

2.	Choose Slide/Duration...

The Slide Duration dialog box will appear.

3.	Enter the length of time in seconds that you want to display the slide.

4.	Click on the OK button.

When you preview or play the presentation, the current slide will run for the specified time.

Related Topics:

Timelines


Timelines
Timeline Uses

The Timeline window controls the sequence and timing of events and transitions within an individual slide, as well as the timing of slides within a presentation. Each object on the slide has its own timeline. Timelines are used to synchronize the animation of each object in relation to other objects. Timelines can be displayed in seconds or as a percentage of the slide's duration.

Timelines are used throughout Astound. You can find timelines in the sound, transition, path, and chart animation dialog boxes. Sound timelines allow you to fade sound in and out. Chart animation timelines allow you to set entry and exit times for the charted data.

Timelines are divided into Entry, Static, and Exit times. An unedited timeline appears as a solid line, which represents the Static time. It is up to the user to set Entry and Exit times, which will appear as lighter, striped portions of the timeline.

Timelines use different kinds of pointers to indicate different actions. The flags will change directions, depending on whether you are marking entry or exit times.

A double headed arrow for shifting timelines

A solid flag for changing when the object appears and disappears

A dotted flag for changing entry and exit times

Both flags for changing both the entry or exit time, and the object's duration.

You can change the duration of a timeline by dragging either end of the timeline, thereby specifying its starting and ending points. For example, if you want an object to appear after the third second and disappear before the tenth second of the slide, you can set the duration to cover the seven seconds that you want the object to be displayed.

You can view timelines in either seconds, or as a percentage of the slide's duration.

Related Topics:

Entry and Exit Times on Timelines

Shifting Timelines

Timeline Window Displays

Snapping Timelines to other Actions

Timeline Markers

Editing Within the Timeline Window

Inserting Time in a Slide

Removing Time from a Slide

Inserting Pauses in Timelines

Moving Pauses on a Timeline

Removing Pauses

Grouping Objects and Timelines

Distributing Timelines


Entry and Exit Times on Timelines

If you want to use a transition, a path, or fade a sound in or out, you must set entry and/or exit times on that object's timeline. The entry and exit times define the length of the transition or fade.

To add entry or exit times to a timeline

1.	Move the pointer just inside the beginning of the line on the inner handle.

The cursor will change to a dotted flag.

2.	With the dotted flag cursor visible, drag the solid part of the timeline toward the center of the timeline.

The striped line that appears is the object's entry time.

3.	Release the mouse button.

4.	Repeat steps 1 to 3 using the right side of the line to set the exit time.

You can also shift the entry and exit times to make the timeline shorter or longer. To do this, place the cursor on the middle of the entry or exit portion of the timeline. The double flag cursor will appear. Drag the entry or exit portion of the timeline to a new position within the slide's duration.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Shifting Timelines

If you want to keep the attributes the same but want to shift the timeline so that an object appears at a different point during the slide's duration, you can grab the timeline and shift it. For example, if your timeline spans from the first second to the eighth, you can shift it so it goes from the third second to the tenth.

To shift a timeline

1.	Position the cursor over the center of the timeline.

The cursor will turn into a double headed arrow.

2.	Press and hold the mouse button.

3.	Drag the timeline to the desired location.

4.	Release the mouse button.

The timeline's entry, exit and static times remain the same but the action happens at a different time within the slide's animation.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Timeline Window Displays

The Timeline window lets you view and set timelines for all the objects on your slide at the same time. You can insert and delete time from the slide duration, as well as add pauses and synchronize groups of objects. The Timeline window stays on top so you can adjust the timelines while you work on the slide. The menus are all accessible while the Timeline window is open. If you move to another slide, the timeline will change to reflect the new slide.

Each object has only one timeline. Any actions you perform on the timeline in the Timeline window will affect the timelines for that object in other dialog boxes.

To open the Timeline window

1.	Choose Window/Timeline or click on the Timeline button in the toolbar.

The Timeline window appears with each object on your current slide represented in the left margin. The representations are iconic, that is, they show a circle, or regular polygon etc. and not the exact object that is on your slide. You can select objects by clicking on their representation in the margin.

To change the timeline to display seconds or percentages

1.	In the Timeline window, click on the Percentage/Seconds button.

The Percentage/Seconds button is a toggle switch that allows you to display the timeline in seconds, or as a percentage of the slide's duration. The button displays a percent sign when the timelines are being measured as a percentage of the slide's duration, and displays a clock when the timelines are being measured in seconds.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Snapping Timelines to Other Actions

You can snap your timeline's movement to other points on the slide that have a timeline setting or marker attached. For example, you could snap the start of an object to the end of the entry time of another object, or snap the entry of an object to a sound marker.

To snap your timelines to other actions

1.	Select the timeline you want to adjust.

2.	Hold down the [Alt] key as you adjust the timeline.

The timeline will snap to other events such as markers, entry, exit, start, and end times in the Timeline window as you drag.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Timeline Markers

If you set Markers for sounds, they will appear in the Timeline window. The Sound icon will appear in the margin along the left edge of timeline window, and a box will appear where you set a marker. The markers allow you to align other events with a specific point or portion of a sound. For example, you can align the end of a chart's entry transition with a sound crescendo.

NOTE: You can preview a sound in the Timeline window by clicking on the Sound icon in the window. The sound will play, and its name will be displayed in the preview box.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Editing Within the Timeline Window

With the Timeline window open, you can perform editing actions specifically for timelines as well as still performing some of the regular editing options. You can cut, copy, paste, and manipulate object colors, display types (interior, border, shadow), resize objects, and use the other options in the Object menu. Any editing you perform on timelines in the Timeline window will affect the timelines you set for that object in other places.

Some actions you can perform are found only in the Timeline window. You can add or remove seconds, synchronize a group of items and insert pauses into a slide. Adding and removing seconds is helpful if you change your mind about the length of time you want a slide to be displayed. Synchronizing a group using Astound's preset distributions is easy, and you don't have to adjust each timeline yourself. You can insert pauses if you want to stop and discuss a point on that particular slide.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines

Inserting Time in a Timeline

Removing Time from a Timelines

Inserting Pauses in a Timeline


Inserting Time in a Slide

You can specify where you want the extra time to appear in the slide. That way you can lengthen the middle of your slide instead of just adding time to the end or the beginning.

To insert time into your slide

1.	In the Timeline window, click on the Insert Seconds button.

2.	Click on the timeline ruler where you want to insert the time.

The Insert Time dialog box will appear.

3.	Type the number of seconds you want to add.

4.	Specify exactly where to insert the time if the number shown is not correct in the Insert At field.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The seconds will be inserted in the place you specified.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Removing Time from a Slide

You can specify where you want the time to be removed. That way you can shorten the middle of your slide instead of removing seconds from the end or the beginning.

To remove time from your slide

1.	In the Timeline window, click on the Remove Seconds button.

2.	Click on the timeline ruler where you want to remove the time.

The Remove Time dialog box will appear.

3.	Type the number of seconds you want to delete.

4.	Specify exactly where to remove the time from if the number shown is not correct in the Remove At field.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The time will be removed from the specified place.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Inserting Pauses in Timelines

You can make all objects pause during a slideshow. That way, if you want to discuss a topic during the presentation, you can leave time for discussion.

To insert a pause in the timeline

1.	In the Timeline window, click on the Pause button.

2.	Click on the timeline ruler where you want to insert a pause.

The Pause dialog box will appear.

3.	If necessary, enter the point during the slide where you want the pause to occur.

4.	Type the length of the pause.

5.	Enable the Continue on mouse click checkbox if you want the slide to continue playing after a mouse click.

Enabling the Continue on mouse click checkbox will continue the presentation after a mouse click anywhere on screen no matter which radio button is enabled. The Continue on mouse click function can also be used with a specified pause time to break the pause before the whole time elapses.

6.	Click on the OK button.

A pause marker will appear in the line above the scale of the timeline to remind you that there is a pause at that point.

You can edit a pause by clicking on its marker in the Timeline window.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines

Moving Pauses on a Timeline

Removing Pauses

Inserting Time in a Slide


Moving Pauses on a Timeline

To move pauses

You can change the point at which a pause occurs by dragging the pause marker to a new location.

1.	Press and hold on the Pause marker in the timeline ruler.

The cursor will change to a Pause cursor.

2.	Drag the marker to a new location in the timeline ruler.

The Pause dialog box will appear allowing you to specify the exact location of the pause.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines

Inserting Pauses on Timelines

Removing Pauses


Removing Pauses

You can remove a pause in the Timeline window by dragging its marker off the edge of the timeline ruler.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines

Inserting Pauses


Grouped Objects and Timelines

You can group objects and create a single timeline for all of them, or you can ungroup objects to set timelines for individual parts. Astound allows you to synchronize a group of objects to accurately bring the group on and off screen without having to customize each timeline separately.

To access timelines for objects within a group

If you have a group of objects for which you want to set individual timelines, you can ungroup them in the Timeline window or use the Object menu.

1.	Double-click on the grouped object icon in the left margin of the Timeline window.

The object will separate into individual parts, each having its own timeline, but remaining grouped on the slide. Each object's icon will appear indented from the other icons in the Timeline window.

You can regroup the objects by double-clicking on the group's icon again.

To select more than one object in the Timeline window

You can select and manipulate more than one object from your slide.

1.	Click on an object's icon in the Timeline window.

2.	Hold down the [Ctrl] key and click on the icons of any other objects you want to select.

You can also hold down the [Shift] key and click on the icons for the first and last object in a range to select that range.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines

Grouped Objects


Distributing Timelines

Distribution allows you to set the timing between the appearance or disappearance of more than one object. For example, you can have a series of objects appear on screen one after the other and set the amount that their transitions overlap from the Distribute Objects dialog box instead of setting each timeline separately. This option is only available when more than one object is selected. You can choose from a variety of distributions. Once you pick types of distribution and exit or entry times, all the objects in the group will enter or exit accordingly. You don't have to set separate timelines for each after you pick the distribution.

To set timeline distributions for a group of objects

1.	Select the objects you want to distribute.

2.	Click on the Distribution button.

The Distribute Objects dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Entry radio button.

You can set the entry for the selected objects so that each appears immediately after the previous object is in place, just before the previous object, in the middle of the previous object, or with an overlap. You can experiment with different distributions so that your objects appear the way you want them to.

4.	Select the type of distribution you want.

5.	Adjust the timeline so there is an appropriate entry time present.

The Entry time you set is the combined time it will take all of the selected objects to appear.

All the objects in the group will enter or exit according to the time you set.

6.	Click on the Close button.

7.	Repeat steps 2 to 6 using the Exit radio button, to set an exit distribution.

The timelines in the Timeline window will change to reflect your settings.

Related Topics:

Using Timelines


Transitions Between Slides

You can add or edit an entry transition for each slide in your presentation. There is a variety of transitions to choose from. If you don't set a transition, the slide will disappear and the new one will appear normally (like cutting from scene to scene in a movie). The transition is attached to the beginning of the slide, so in order to specify a transition between your first and second slides, you should attach the transition to the second slide.

To add a slide transition

1.	Choose Slide/Transition...

The Slide Transition dialog box will appear.

2.	Choose a transition from the Transitions list box.

The transition options associated with the chosen transition will appear in the Transition Options box. For all transitions except Snake In and Roll Down, the Constrain to Time checkbox and Seconds field will appear as well.

3.	If you want the transition to be completed in a specific amount of time, enable the Constrain to Time checkbox, and enter a value in the Seconds field.

4.	If you want to see what the transition looks like, enable the Preview checkbox.

5.	In the Transition Options box, specify the options to further define the transition.

When you select a transition from the Transitions list box, any options that go with it will appear in the Transition Options box. Not all transitions have options.

6.	Click on the OK button.

The transition you selected will now be used for the current slide.

Related Topics:

Object Transitions


Object Transitions

For each object on a slide, you can add a transition that takes place during the object's entry to or exit from the slide. There is a variety of transitions to choose from. The entry and exit times you set in the timelines will dictate how long the transitions take on your slide. If you do not specify entry or exit times, selected transitions will not take place.

To add a transition to an object

1.	Select the object to which you want to add a transition.

2.	Choose Object/Transition...

The Object Transition dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable either the Entry or Exit radio button.

4.	Select a transition from the list box that is enabled.

5.	If you want to see what the transition looks like, enable the Preview checkbox.

6.	In the Transition Options box, specify the options to further define the transition.

When you select a transition, any options that go with it will appear in the Transition Options box. Not all transitions have options.

7.	On the timeline in the Timeline box, set entry/exit times for the selected transition.

8.	Enable the On checkbox in the Timeline box to apply the entry/exit times specified on the timeline to the selected object.

In order for your transitions to take effect, you must have specified entry/exit times on the object's timeline. If you have not, the selected transition will have no effect on the display of the object.

9.	In the Apply box, select the attributes that you want to apply to the selected object(s).

10.	Enable the Independently to Grouped Objects checkbox in the Apply box if you want the transition to effect each of the grouped objects in a selected group of objects individually.

11.	If you want both an entry and an exit transition, repeat steps three to ten to set the other transition for the selected object(s).

12.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Adding Transitions to Objects Within a Group

Changing Transition Attributes for Multiple Objects

Text Transitions

Object Paths

Slide Transitions


Adding Transitions to Objects Within a Group

You can specify that the transition affects grouped objects as a whole or have each object in the group transition separately. They can still all use the same timeline.

To add transitions to separate objects within groups

1.	Select the group to which you want to add a transition.

2.	Choose Object/Transition...

The Object Transition dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Independently to Grouped Objects checkbox if you want the transition to affect each individual object in a group.

4.	Enable either or both of the Entry and Exit checkboxes.

5.	If you want to apply a timeline to the selected group, enable the On checkbox in the Timeline box.

6.	Make any entry/exit transition time changes to the timeline.

7.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Object Transitions

Changing Transition Attributes for Multiple Objects

Text Transitions

Object Paths

Slide Transitions


Changing Transition Attributes for Multiple Objects

You can select multiple objects and then set one aspect of their transitions. For example, if you set entry transitions for three individual objects (one Wipe, one Vertical Blinds, and one Cover) and you want to keep them as different transitions, but you want to give all selected objects the same timeline, you can do so by enabling the On checkbox in the Timeline box and disabling the Entry and Exit checkboxes in the Apply box.

To change one transition attribute of a selection of multiple objects

1.	Select the objects for which you want to modify the transition settings.

2.	Choose Object/Transition...

The Object Transition dialog box will appear.

3.	In the Apply box and the Timeline box, disable the checkboxes for the options you do not want to affect.

The objects will retain their own settings for these options.

4.	In the Apply box and the Timeline box, enable the checkboxes for the options that you want to affect.

The objects will use the settings, that currently appear in the Object Transition dialog box, for this option.

Related Topics:

Object Transitions

Adding Transitions to Objects Within a Group

Text Transitions

Object Paths

Slide Transitions


Text Transitions

You can choose special transitions for text that are different from object transitions. Text can arrive on the screen line by line, character by character, word by word, from an edge, etc.

To create a text transition

1.	With the Pointer tool, select the text block by clicking on it.

2.	Choose Object/Transition...

The Object Transition dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable either the Entry or Exit radio button.

4.	From the Separation drop-down list, select the portions of the text block that you want to appear together.

5.	Select the Direction button that corresponds to the point from which you want the text to enter/exit.

6.	From the Effect drop-down list, select any special effect you wish to have attached to the text transition.

7.	Enable the Pause In Between option if you want to pause after each portion of text appears, and resume playing when the mouse is clicked.

8.	Set entry and exit times on the Timeline.

9.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Adding Transitions to Objects Within a Group

Changing Transition Attributes for Multiple Objects

Rotation Transitions

Text Transitions

Object Paths

Slide Transitions


Object Paths

An object's path is the route that an object takes as it moves on or off a slide. You can add object paths in any direction. If you want to see the object's path on the slide, make sure that View/Show Paths is enabled. You can apply both a transition and a path animation to the same object. When you do this, the transition effect will be applied as the object moves into or out of place.

To show object paths on the slide

1.	Enable View/Show Paths.

The object paths will appear on the slide, but will not appear if you print, play or preview the slide.

To create an object path animation

1.	Select the object(s) that you want a path animation for.

2.	Choose Object/Path Animation...

The Object Path Animation dialog box will appear.

3.	Enable the Show Slide checkbox if you want to see all the objects on your slide in the Preview box.

4.	Enable the Entry Path checkbox.

5.	Drag the entry path icon in the preview to the point at which you want the object to enter.

6.	If you want the object to exit before the slide ends, enable the Exit Path checkbox.

7.	Drag the exit path icon in the preview to the point at which you want the object to exit.

You can also move the object on the slide by dragging the object in the preview to a new location.

8.	Enable the On checkbox in the Timeline box.

9.	Set the timeline.

The Timeline you set will tell Astound how much time you want the entry and exit to take. If you don't specify a timeline, then your path animation entry or exit will not take place.  Any actions you perform on the timeline in this dialog will affect the timeline you set for that object in any other place.

10.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Object Transitions


Creating Buttons

Buttons are ideal objects to add interactivity to, as most people will recognize them as something to click on.

To create a button

1.	Click on the Button tool in the Tool palette.

2.	Position the pointer anywhere in the document window.

3.	Drag the crosshair to set the dimensions of the button.

4.	Release the mouse button to define the boundary of the button.

The button boundary will contain a text window, in which you will be able to enter the text that will appear on the face of the button. The cursor will be centered in the text window.

5.	Type the text you wish to appear on the button.

You may need to resize the button afterward so the text fits properly.

6.	Click on the Pointer tool.

The text window will disappear and the button will be displayed with the text centered on it.

Related Topics:

Interactivity

Coloring Buttons

Button Appearance

Button Text


Coloring Buttons

You can select a solid color pattern fill, or any other pattern fills for your buttons in the same way you would choose a color for any other objects. See Chapter 11,  Fills, Borders, and Lines, for information on selecting colors for objects.

Astound will automatically set the highlight and shadow on the face of the button to match the color you have selected.

Related Topics:

Creating Buttons

Interactivity

Button Appearance

Button Text


Button Appearance

You can create realistic buttons that have a three-dimensional look by changing the options in the Button Options dialog box. Astound provides different button types from which you can choose, as well as several pre-set button forms that apply to all types. There are slide controls that allow you to adjust the shading and three-dimensional look of your buttons more precisely.

Changes made in the Button Options dialog box will be applied to all buttons that are currently selected. If no button is selected when you specify button options, you will define the default button style for subsequently drawn buttons.

To select a button type

1.	Select the button(s) you wish to change.

If you do not have a button selected, the settings will define the default for subsequently drawn buttons.

2.	With the button(s) selected, double-click on the Button tool.

The Button Options dialog box will appear, in which you can change the shape and depth of the button.

3.	In the Shapes box, select one of the shape examples.

You can choose a rectangle, rounded rectangle, rounded or oval shape for your button.

4.	Select the depths for parts of the button.

If you select one of the depth buttons in the Presets box, the displayed values and handle positions on the sliders will change to correspond to the depth you chose. You can customize the depth settings by dragging the slide handles in the Customize box. You can create indented, or raised buttons, and can add ridges around them. Dragging the handle to a positive value will cause a section of the button to raise, and dragging it to a negative value will indent a section of the button.

Each of the sliders works on the setting of the previous slider. So, if the first slider is set to 5, the second slider will indent or raise a portion of the button starting at the raised border caused by the first slider. You will generally want to alternate the sliders between negative and  positive numbers. For example, placing the first slider at 4, the second slider to a -1, and the third slider at 1 will create a raised button that has a small ridge around its face.

5.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Creating Buttons

Interactivity

Coloring Buttons

Button Text


Changing Button Text

You can change the text or text attributes for your button by clicking on the button with the Text tool selected.

To edit or change a button's text attributes

You can change the same attributes of text on a button that you can change of any other text: color, size, font, style, etc.

1.	Select the Text tool.

2.	Click on the button with the text you want to edit.

The button displays the text in editable form. You can type new text, change the existing text or change the attributes.

Related Topics:

Creating Buttons

Interactivity

Coloring Buttons

Button Appearance


Interactivity

Interactivity can be assigned to buttons, text blocks, pictures, charts, and other objects on your slides. Viewer actions that cause interactive options to occur, called triggers, can be either mouse clicks or keyboard keys. When a specific object is clicked on, or when a specific key is pressed, two types of interactive response can occur: actions and flow controls. You can assign either or both of these types of interactive responses to any object.

The type of interactive response called an action results in a specific object, such as a picture, actor, sound, or video to play or be displayed. You can choose to play or display any object currently placed on the slide. When these objects play or are displayed, their attributes, including transitions, path animations, locations, and timelines, are used as a basis for their playback or display. See Interactive Actions, later in this chapter, for more information.

If the object has a flow control specified for it, a specific slide or range of slides can be played in response to the interactive trigger.

To assign interaction

You can use any object for interactivity.

1.	Select the object to which you want to add interactivity.

2.	Choose Object/Interaction...

The Object Interaction dialog box will appear.

3.	In the Input Trigger box, select the action that will trigger the interactive response.

4.	In the Input Trigger box, enable the desired cursor location option.

5.	In the Input Trigger box, specify whether or not you want the slide to play through its timeline before any interactive response is triggered.

6.	Select a pause option from the Pause box.

7.	From the Action and/or Flow Control drop-down list(s), select the interactive response(s) that will occur when the specified triggering action is executed.

8.	Select or specify any options that appear in the Setup area when you select the interactive actions.

9.	Click on the OK button.

The selected interactive responses will be assigned to the selected object(s).

Related Topics:

Buttons

Removing Object Interactivity

Redirecting Playback Order


Removing Interactivity

Once you have specified an interactive option for an object, you can remove it if you wish.

To remove interactivity

1.	Select the object for which you want to remove interactivity.

2.	Choose Object/Interaction...

The Object Interaction dialog box will appear.

3.	Click on the No Interaction button.

This disables the previously selected interactive options. The Object Interaction dialog box will disappear.

Related Topics:

Interactivity

Redirecting Playback Order


Redirecting Playback Order

You can make changes to the playback order of the slides in a presentation using the Set Next Slide... command in the Slide menu. This function allows you to specify which slide will play when the current slide is finished playing . The natural playback order of the slides in a presentation is: first slide, second slide, third slide, fourth, fifth, etc. Using the Set Next Slide... command, you can redirect any slide to play any slide in the presentation next, other than the one that comes after it in the natural order. The effect of this will be to redefine the natural playback order of the slides.

To redirect a slide

1.	Display or select the slide you want to redirect.

2.	Choose Slide/Set Next Slide...

The Set Next Slide dialog box appears.

3.	In the Set Next Slide list box, select the item corresponding to what you want to place after the current slide in the playback order.

4.	To remove the redirection from all slides in the presentation, click on the Reset All Slides button.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The playback order will be redirected as specified.

Any object interactivity involving the slide playback order will follow the redirected playback order. For example, if you have redirected the fourth slide in a presentation to play the eighth slide next, and there is an interactive object on the fourth slide that specifies Play Next Slide, the slide that plays when the object is clicked on will be the eighth slide.

Related Topics:

Interactivity


Opening the Speaker Notes Window

The Speaker Notes window can be opened from the Window menu in the Astound menu bar, or by clicking on the Speaker Notes button.

When you open this window from the:

·	Slide window, it will contain the note page that is attached to the current slide.

·	Outline window, it will contain the note page that is attached to the slide that the cursor is currently located in.

·	Slide Sorter, it will contain the note page that is attached to the current slide.

To open the Speaker Notes window

1.	Go to the slide to which you want to add or edit speaker notes.

2.	Choose Window/Speaker Notes, or click on the Speaker Notes button in the tool bar.

The Speaker Notes window will appear.

Related Topics:

Adding and Editing Notes Page Text

Moving Between Note Pages


Moving Between Notes Pages
Moving Between Note Pages

You can move through the note pages in the Speaker Notes window by using the Page Forward and Page Backward commands in the Speaker Notes menu bar. The Page Backward command is the double left-arrow symbol. The Page Forward command is the double right-arrow symbol.

As you change pages in the Speaker Notes window, the corresponding slides are selected in the current Astound window. For example, if you open Speaker Notes from the Outline window, and move forward by two speaker notes pages, the cursor in the Outline window will move down two pages as well.

To move to the previous note page

1.	Click on the Page Backward symbol.

The notes for the previous slide in the presentation will be displayed, and the previous slide will be displayed or selected in the main window.

To move to the next note page

1.	Click on the Page Forward symbol.

The notes for the next slide in the presentation will be displayed, and the next slide will be displayed or selected in the main window.

Related Topics:

Opening the Speaker Notes Window

Adding and Editing Notes Page Text


Adding or Editing Notes Pages Text
Adding or Editing Note Pages Text

You can add text to, and edit existing text on, speaker notes pages the same way you would in a text block on your slides. There are text format levels - similar to those used for other text in Astound - to help you quickly enter and format your notes.

To create or edit speaker notes

1.	Go to the slide to which you want to add or edit speaker notes.

2.	Choose Window/Speaker Notes, or click on the Speaker Notes button in the tool bar.

The Speaker Notes window will appear. If there are already speaker notes attached to the current slide, they will be displayed.

3.	Type in the desired text.

4.	Edit the text using the standard key sequences and mouse operations you would use to edit text in a text block.

5.	Format the text as you would format text in a text block.

Astound helps you create an organized layout of the text you enter by providing you with preset levels of text formatting. You can move the line or paragraph of text that the cursor is in down a level by pressing the [TAB] key, and you can move the line or paragraph of text that the cursor is in up a level by pressing the [SHIFT] + [TAB] combination. You can change the attributes of these text levels by choosing Text/Format Text Levels... from the Speaker Notes window.

Although speaker note text levels function the same way as the text levels in the main Astound window, they are separate from them. You can also specify text attributes by using the commands in the Text menu of the Speaker Notes window. These commands function the same way they do in the Astound main window.

Related Topics:

Opening the Speaker Notes Window

Moving Between Note Pages


Opening Libraries

You can open a clipart library, a library you created, or any of your presentations as a library in the same way. When you open a presentation as a library, each object will appear in a separate cell of the library. Grouped objects will appear as one object.

To open an existing library

1.	Choose Window/Library/Open....

The Open Library dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the presentation or library you want to open.

3.	Click on OK.

The Astound Library window will appear containing the items from the library or presentation.

Note:  Once you open a library, the name of the library will appear under the Window/Library submenu so that you can access it anytime during your Astound session.

To open a library from within the Library window

1.	Click on the Open... button in the Library window.

The Open Library dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the presentation or library you want to open.

3.	Click on OK.

The Astound Library window will contain the new library.

Related Topics:

Viewing Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Creating Libraries

Adding Objects to Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Deleting Objects From a Library

Saving Libraries


Viewing Libraries

You can resize the library window as you would any other window. When you resize the window, the object previews will reflow to fit the maximum number of previews into the window. You can also change the size of the object previews within the library to either see more objects or see more detail in each preview.

To resize object previews in a library

1.	Click on one of the Preview Size buttons in the Astound Library window.

There are small, medium, and large preview sizes available. Once you have clicked on one of the buttons, the cells and object previews will change to reflect the new size.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Creating Libraries

Adding Objects to Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Deleting Objects From a Library

Saving Libraries


Placing Library Objects on Slides

Placing a library object on your slide is as simple as dragging the object from one window to another. However, you can also use the clipboard to copy and paste an object from the library to your slides.

To place library objects on your slide by dragging

1.	In the library, select the object(s) you want to place on the slide.

2.	Drag the objects from the library to the slide.

Once library objects have been placed on a slide they can be moved and edited just like any other object.

To place library objects on your slide using the clipboard

1.	In the library, select the object(s) you want to place on the slide.

2.	Click on the Copy button in the Astound Library.

A copy of the object will be placed in the clipboard.

3.	Click on the Paste button or choose Edit/Paste in the main Astound window.

A copy of the object will appear on your slide.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Viewing Libraries

Creating Libraries

Adding Objects to Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Deleting Objects From a Library

Saving Libraries


Creating Libraries

If you have objects that you use often, you can place them in a library so that they can be accessed quickly. You may want to create a library of logos, or of graphs you use often. You may even have text blocks that you know you will use in many presentations. Libraries can be created for all of these things.

To create a library

1.	Choose Window/Library/New...

The Astound Library window will appear with no objects in it.

2.	Drag an object from the slide to an empty cell in the Library.

A copy of the object will appear in the Astound Library window.

3. 	Repeat step 2 until all of the objects you want are in the library.

You can also add objects to your library by selecting them, and then using the Copy button or command in the main window to place the objects on the clipboard, and then click on the Paste button in the Astound Library window to paste them into the library.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Viewing Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Adding Objects to Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Deleting Objects From a Library

Saving Libraries


Adding Objects to a Library

You can add objects to any library that you create. Objects can be dragged from the main Astound window to the Library window, or the clipboard commands can be used to copy objects to the library.

Adding objects to a library by dragging

1.	Select the object(s) on your slide that you want to add to the library.

2.	Drag the objects on top of the Astound Library window.

The objects will be added to the library. Each object will be placed in its own cell. Grouped objects are treated as one library object and are placed in the same cell.

Adding Object to a library using the clipboard

1.	Select the object(s) on your slide that you want to add to the library.

2.	Choose Edit/Copy or click on the Copy button in the main window.

The objects will be placed on the clipboard. If you want to add objects to the library and remove them from your slide at the same time, you can use the Cut command or button.

3.	Click on the Paste button in the Astound Library window.

The objects will be added to the library. Each object will be placed in its own cell. Grouped objects are treated as one library object and are placed in the same cell.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Viewing Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Creating Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Deleting Objects From a Library

Saving Libraries


Reordering Library Objects

You can reorder the objects in a library by dragging the objects to a new position or by using the clipboard.

To reorder a library by dragging

1.	In the library, select the preview(s) you want to move.

2.	Drag the object preview(s) across the library.

A line will appear between object previews to indicate where the objects being moved will be inserted.

3.	When the line appears where you want to insert the object previews, release the mouse button.

The selected object previews will be moved to the new location.

To reorder a library using the clipboard.

1.	Select the library object(s) that you want to move.

To select multiple objects, hold down the [Shift] key and click on the first and last object in a range to select the range, or hold down the [Ctrl] key and click on a series of individual library objects.

2.	Click on the Cut button in the Astound Library window.

The library objects will be removed from the window and placed on the clipboard.

3.	Click on the library object preview after which you want to insert the selected library object(s).

4.	Click on the Paste button in the Astound Library window.

The object(s) will be moved to their new position within the library.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Viewing Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Creating Libraries

Adding Objects to Libraries

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Deleting Objects From a Library

Saving Libraries


Grouping Objects in a Library

You can group objects in a library so that several objects are contained in one library preview. When you place these objects, all of the grouped objects will be placed on the slide at the same time.

To group objects within a library

1.	Select the library object(s) that you want to move.

2.	Click on the Group button in the Astound Library window.

The selected objects will be grouped and placed in one cell of the library.

To ungroup objects within a library

1.	Select the grouped library object preview.

2.	Click on the Ungroup button in the Astound Library window.

The objects will be ungrouped and placed into individuals cells within the library.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Viewing Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Creating Libraries

Adding Objects to Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Deleting Objects From a Library

Saving Libraries


Deleting Objects from a Library

If there are objects that you don't use but are still contained in a library you can remove them from the library.

To delete objects from a library

You can undo the last action you performed in a library using the Undo button. This allows you quickly reverse actions such as adding several objects to or deleting them from the library.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Viewing Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Creating Libraries

Adding Objects to Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Saving Libraries


Saving Libraries

If you have made any changes to your library you will have to save the library in order for those changes to be remembered the next time you use the library.

To save a library

Once you have created or edited a library you will want to save it for later use.

1.	With the library window active, click on the Save button.

If the library has been saved previously, it will automatically be saved under the same name. If this is the first time you are saving the library the Save Library As dialog box will appear.

2.	Type a name for your library.

3.	Click on the Save button.

The library will be saved.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries

Viewing Libraries

Placing Library Objects on Slides

Creating Libraries

Adding Objects to Libraries

Reordering Library Objects

Grouping Objects in Libraries

Deleting Objects From a Library


Importing

You can import presentations, slides, master slides, objects, datasheets pictures, video and sound into your current presentation.  All of these types of imports follow similar procedures, but many of them have extra parameters that you can specify.

Related Topics:

Importing Presentations

Importing Slides

Importing Master Slides

Importing Objects

Importing Datasheets

Importing Pictures

Importing Video

Importing Sound

Exporting


Importing Presentations

If you have created a presentation in Microsoft PowerPoint or Lotus Freelance, you can import your presentation to use with Astound. You can add another presentation to the one you are working on.

To import a presentation

1.	Choose File/Import/Presentation...

The Open Presentation dialog box will appear.

2.	From the File Types list box, select the file type(s) you want to list in the dialog box.

3.	Select the file you want to import.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The presentation you wanted to import will be added to your current presentation, starting at the current slide.

Related Topics:

Importing

Exporting


Importing a Slide

If you have a slide in another presentation that you want to use in the presentation you are working on, you can import it. The slide must have previously been exported as a slide.

To import a slide

1.	Choose File/Import/Slide...

The Open Slide dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the file you want to import.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The slide you imported will be added to your current presentation.

Related Topics:

Importing

Exporting


Importing a Master Slide

If you have a master slide that you want in another presentation, you can import it. Make sure that you exported the master slide as a master by itself. Since slides and masters are the same file type, the master slide must have been exported as a slide. See Exporting later in this chapter.

To import a master slide

1.	Choose File/Import/Master Slide...

The Open Master Slide dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the file you want to import.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The master slide will be added to your current presentation and applied to the current slide. If the current slide already has a master, the new master will be used in place of the old master.

Related Topics:

Importing

Exporting


Importing Objects

You can import an object in another file that you want to include on your slide.  Importing objects is handy when you have an item that you use in many different presentations. The object(s) must have been previously exported before they can be imported.

To import objects

1.	Choose File/Import/Objects...

The Open Objects dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the file name of the object you want to import.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The object you wanted to import will be added to your current slide.

Related Topics:

Importing

Exporting


Importing Datasheets

You can import data for your charts from a datasheet in another presentation, from a spreadsheet created in Lotus 1-2-3, or Microsoft Excel, or from a tab and return delimited text file. The imported datasheet will appear in the datasheet format you used when creating charts, and it can be accessed from the Windows menu.

To import datasheets

1.	Choose File/Import/Datasheet...

The Open Datasheet dialog box will appear.

2.	From the File Types list box, choose the type of spreadsheet you want to import.

3.	Select the file you want to import.

4.	Click on the OK button.

The spreadsheet you import will be added to your current presentation. Use the Windows/Datasheet command to select it.

Related Topics:

Importing

Exporting


Exporting

In Astound, you can export slides and objects for use with other presentations.

Related Topics:

Exporting Slides

Exporting Objects


Exporting Slides

Master slides are saved by exporting them as a slide using the File/Export command.

To export your current slide

1.	Choose File/Export/Current Slide...

The Save Slide As dialog box will appear.

2.	Specify the drive and directory location to export the file to.

3.	In the Filename edit box, type the name you want to give to the slide.

4.	If you want to save with resources embedded, enable the Make File Self-contained option.

5.	Choose the format you want your file exported as from the File Types list box.

You can export your slide as an Astound document for use with other presentations, or you can export it in a graphical file format.

6.	If you are going to use your slide with the Macintosh version of Astound, enable the Save As Version 1.00 checkbox.

7.	Click on the OK button.

Your slide is saved under the name you specified and you can now import it into another presentation as a slide or a master.

Related Topics:

Exporting

Importing


Exporting Selected Objects

You can select objects on your slide and export them individually for use in other presentations.

To export selected objects

1.	Select the object(s) you want to export.

2.	Choose File/Export/Selected Objects...

The Save Object As dialog box will appear.

3.	Specify the drive and directory location to export the file to.

4.	In the Filename edit box, type the name you want to save the object under.

5.	If you want to save with resources embedded, enable the Make File Self-contained option.

6.	Choose the format you want your file exported as from the File Types list box.

You can export your slide as an Astound document for use with other presentations, or you can export it in a graphical file format.

7.	If you are going to use your slide with the Macintosh version of Astound, enable the Save As Version 1.00 checkbox.

8.	Click on the OK button.

Your item(s) are saved under the name you specified and you can import the file somewhere else.

Related Topics:

Exporting

Importing


Embedding Objects in Astound

If you embed an object in your document, a copy of the object is made to transfer to the client document. After you embed an object, there is no longer any connection to the original object. Therefore, when you edit that object from within the client document, you are not changing the original object in any way. However, there is still a connection to the application that created the object.

An embedded object is contained within the client document, so you only need to distribute one document file. This is very useful when you want to distribute the client document to other people.

There are two ways to embed an object into your Astound document:

·	The Insert OLE Object command

·	The Paste Special command


Embedding Objects with the Insert OLE Object Command

You can use the Insert OLE Object commanding the Edit menu to embed an OLE object from another application into your presentation.

To embed an object in Astound using the Insert OLE Object command

1.	Choose Edit/Insert OLE Object...

The Insert OLE Object dialog box will appear with a list of object types (applications) that can be embedded in your document.

2.	Select the desired file type.

3.	Click on the OK button.

The selected application will open.

4.	Create or open the object that you want to embed in Astound.

5.	Choose Update or a similar command from the File or the Edit menu of the server application.

See the server application documentation for specific details.

6.	Choose File/Exit from the server application.

You will return to your Astound document, where the embedded object will appear. When this object is selected, it is listed as an embedded object in the status bar.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects with the Paste Special Command

 Editing Linked and Embedded Objects


Embedding Objects with the Paste Special Command

You can use the Paste Special commanding the Edit menu to embed an OLE object from another application into your presentation. If you want to embed an object using the Paste Special command, you must make sure that you have the desired object cut or copied into the clipboard.

To embed an object using the Paste Special command

1.	Choose Edit/Paste Special...

The Paste Special dialog box will appear, listing the various formats available on the clipboard.

2.	Choose the OLE object you are using.

3.	Click on the Paste button.

The specified object will be embedded in your Astound document.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects with the Insert OLE Object Command

Editing Linked and Embedded Objects


Editing Linked or Embedded Objects

Every time you edit your embedded object, the server application is automatically opened. However, only the embedded object is changed, not the original object.

To edit linked or embedded objects

1.	In Astound, select the object you wish to edit.

2.	Choose Edit/Edit Object.

This command will change depending on what server the selected OLE object was created with. If the OLE object can be played, the command will change to have a sub menu and will be something like Edit/AddImpact! Object/Edit.

The server document will open with the object displayed.

3.	Edit the object.

4.	Choose Update or a similar command from the File or the Edit menu of the server application.

When you return to Astound, your changes will be made.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects

Linking Objects


Linking Objects

If you link an object to your document, no copy of the object is made. Instead, you are creating a link that tells the client document where the original object is kept. This means that when you edit a linked object, you also update the original object. You can create several links from several documents to the same object and automatically update all of the documents by changing the original.

Linking is useful when you are using an object that will change frequently, or one that is used in more than one client document. The dynamic link will update the object in every document whenever you change it in one. For example, if you have spreadsheet data linked to an Astound chart, your chart will automatically be updated if you alter the spreadsheet data. Embedding is more practical if you want to change objects separately, as you will not accidentally alter an object in one document by editing it in another.

You can only link objects from saved documents.

To link an object to Astound from another application

1.	Open the server application and copy the desired object to the clipboard.

The file from which you are selecting objects, must be saved before you can link objects.

2.	From Astound, choose Edit/Paste Special...

The Paste Special dialog box will appear, listing the available formats.

3.	Choose the OLE object you want to create the link to.

4.	Click on the Paste Link button.

The object is now linked to your Astound document and will appear in your document.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects

Editing Linked and Embedded Objects

Updating Linked Objects

Breaking a Link

Deleting a Link

Fixing a Broken Link


Updating Linked Objects

You can update a linked object automatically or manually. By default, linked objects are updated automatically.

Objects that are linked and updated manually do not change when the object in the original document changes. The object is updated only when you choose to update it.

To change the way a linked object is updated in Astound

1.	Choose Edit/Links...

The Links menu item will be available as long as you have linked objects in your document. From this dialog box, you can choose how to update links, cancel links, or change links.

2.	From the list in the Links box, select the link(s) whose update options you want to change.

3.	Select the Automatic or Manual radio button.

This change will apply to the linked objects you selected.

4.	Click on the Done button.

To update a manual link in Astound

1.	Choose Links... from the Edit menu.

The Links dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the link(s) you want to update.

3.	Click on the Update Now button.

4.	Click on the Done button.

All of the selected links will be updated.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects

Linking Objects


Breaking a Link

You can break a link so that an object can no longer be changed from within the client document. This breaks the connection between the original object and the linked object, but the original object still exists. After you break the link, you must make any changes in the server document and copy and paste the object back into the client document.

To break a link from Astound

1.	Choose Edit/Links...

The Links dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the linked object(s) you want to break.

3.	Click on the Cancel Link button.

4.	Click on the Done button.

The object will remain in the client document, but the link has now been removed.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects

Linking Objects

Editing Linked and Embedded Objects

Deleting Links


Deleting a Link

Deleting a link is different from breaking a link. When you break a link, the object still exists in the client document. When you delete a link, the object is deleted at the same time.

To delete a link in Astound

1.	Select the linked object.

2.	Choose Edit/Cut or Edit/Clear.

Both the link to the object and the object are removed from the document.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects

Linking Objects

Editing Linked and Embedded Objects

Breaking Links


Fixing a Broken Link

If you change the name of a server document that contains linked objects, the links to those objects automatically break because they are connected to a filename that no longer exists. In the client document, you must change the name of the document that the object is linked to so that the link will work properly again.

To fix a broken link in Astound

1.	Choose Edit/Links.

The Links dialog box will appear.

2.	Select the linked object you want to fix.

3.	Click on the Change Link button.

The Change Link dialog box appears.

4.	In the Files list, select the server document you want the object to link to.

5.	Click on the OK button.

The Links dialog box reappears with the name of the new server document selected.

6.	Click on the Done button.

This closes the Links dialog box. If you changed the link so that it is pointing to a different document, the new object will appear in the destination document.

Related Topics:

Linking objects


Page Setup

You must let Astound know the orientation (portrait or landscape), page size, and scale you want to use for printing. Astound uses standard page setup options.

To setup a page for printing

1.	Choose File/Page Setup...

The Page Setup dialog box will appear. You can also access this dialog box by clicking on the Page Setup... button in the Print dialog box. This button will change depending on what print format is selected.

2.	Select the radio button for the print format that you want to specify a specific page setup for.

You can print your slides, handouts, notes or text outline.

3.	Select the orientation you want to print in.

4.	Select the page size.

5.	Set margins for your printout.

6.	Specify a header and/or footer for your printout.

You can enable the header and/or footer checkboxes and type text in the edit box. This text will be printed in the margin of your slides or handouts.

7.	Repeat steps 2 through 6 for any of the other print formats that you want to specify a specific page setup for.

8.	Click on the OK button.

These settings will be the default for all of your pages when you print.

Related Topics:

Setting Up your Printer

Printing


Setting Up a Printer

You can access the standard Microsoft Windows printer setup dialog boxes from the File menu or from the Print dialog box. These dialog boxes allow you to specify what printer you wish to print to, as well as any other printer specific options that you wish to set.

To select a printer

1.	Choose File/Printer Setup...

The standard Microsoft Windows Printer Setup dialog box appears. You can also access this dialog box by clicking on the Setup... button in the Print dialog box. Everything that you print will print to this printer.

Related Topics:

Page Setup

Printing


Printing

You can print slides, speaker notes, text outlines and handouts. There are some printing options that are available for only some of the types of printing output. For instance, if you are printing a text outline you can specify whether all text is printed or only the text currently visible in the outline.

To print your presentation

1.	Choose File/Print ...

The Print dialog box will appear.

2.	If the printer listed in the Current Printer box is not the one you want to print to, click on the Setup... button and select the printer you want to print to.

This will display the standard Microsoft Windows Printer Setup dialog box. When you are finished making any changes to your printer, click on the OK button to return to the Print dialog box where the new printer will be listed in the Current Printer box.

3.	Enable the radio button for what you want to print.

You can print slides, notes, text outlines, and/or handouts.

4.	If you want to change your page size or orientation, click on the Page Setup... button.

The Page Setup dialog box appears. For more information on using this dialog box see, Page Setup earlier in this chapter. When you are done making changes click on the OK button to return to the Print dialog box.

5.	If you are printing speaker notes, handouts, or slides, specify what slides you want to print, or what slides that you want to print the speaker notes for.

6.	Set any other print options.

7.	Click on the Print button.

Your pages will start printing.

Related Topics:

Page Setup

Setting Up a Printer

Handouts and Thumbnails

Printing 35 MM slides

Printing Headers and Footers


Printing Headers and Footers

You can insert codes in the page header and footer text to format them and insert special information. This is done in the Page Setup dialog box.

These codes can be either lower or upper case and can be mixed with regular text that you want to include in the header or footer. These Codes are:

\c 	Separates columns. The text at the beginning of the header/footer prints aligned with the left margin. The text after the first \c is printed centered. The text after the second \c is printed right aligned. Additional \c codes are ignored.

\p	Inserts current page number.

\n	Insert total number of pages printed.

\d	Inserts the current date.

\t	Inserts the current time.

\f	Inserts the document name.

\\	Inserts a backslash.

Related Topics:

Page Setup

Printing


Handouts and Thumbnails

You have the choice of 12 different handout formats to print: 6 portrait and 6 landscape. The handout formats show a miniature of the slide and a set of lines on which the audience can take notes. The fewer miniature slides you place on a handout, the more space there is for notes. The slide formats only show miniatures (or thumbnails) of your slides. The options depicted on the format button will change depending on whether you have the Slides or Handouts radio button selected, and whether you are printing in landscape or portrait orientation.

To print handouts or thumbnails

1.	Choose File/Print ...

The Print dialog box will appear.

2.	Enable the Handouts or Slides radio button.

3.	Select the page layout you want to use for your handouts.

You can choose to show from one to six miniature slides on a handout. These layouts change depending on whether you are currently printing in a landscape or portrait format and on whether you selected the Handouts or Slides radio button. You can specify this page orientation by clicking on the Page Setup... button in the Print dialog box.

4.	Click on the Print button.

Your pages will start printing.

Related Topics:

Printing

Page Setup

Printer Setup


Printing 35mm Slides

If you want to produce 35mm slides, you will need to either send your data to a slide-service bureau or use a film recorder. A film recorder connects to your computer through a port. Each film recorder is different, so you should follow the instructions that came with your film recorder to produce 35mm slides.

A slide service bureau will require that you give them your data in a format they can use. Most slide service bureaus accept PostScript files. Contact your service bureau before you create your slide show to see if they have any specific requirements for printing your slides.

If you are going to produce 35mm slides, you should make sure that you picked 35mm slides in the Slide/Dimensions menu.

To print to a PostScript file

1.	Choose File/Print ...

The Print dialog box will appear.

2.	Enable the Slides radio button for what you want to print.

3.	Set any other print options.

4.	Enable the Print To File radio button.

This will output your data to a file that you can send to a slide service bureau. Not all print drivers have the option to print to a file. You may have to select a different printer for this option to work. For example, a PostScript print driver will likely allow you to print to a PostScript file, and an HPGL print driver will allow you to print to an HPGL file.

5.	Click on the Print button.

A dialog box will appear allowing you to specify a file name and where to save the file.

6.	Type the name under which you want to store your PostScript file in the Save disk file as edit box.

7.	Click on the Save button.

Your presentation will be printed to a file that can be sent via modem or disk to a slide service.

Related Topics:

Printing

Page Setup


Setting Notation Pens Within Astound

Astound has a playback notation feature that is similar to drawing with a marker on an overhead. This feature allows you to use the mouse to draw on your slides to emphasize important points while a presentation is playing. You can set up to four different pens.

To set notation pen options

Astound provides four different pens that you can use while showing a presentation. For each pen, you can set the color, size, and effect.

1.	Choose File/Slideshow/Options...

The Slideshow Options dialog box will appear.

2.	Enable the Notation Pens option.

This will allow the pens to be used during playback.

3.	Click on the Set Pens... button.

The Set Notation Pens dialog box will appear. You can choose different colors, sizes and effects for the pens.

4.	Select the first pen by clicking on the pen number.

5.	Click on the color you want for that pen in the Quick Color bar.

The preview box of that pen will display the color you choose. You can access the color scheme palette by pressing and holding on the Pen Color box.

6.	Choose the pen size.

You can drag the pen size in the Pen Size preview box or type a number in the Pen Size edit box.

7.	Select the effect for the pen.

8.	Repeat steps 3 to 7 for the other pens.

9.	Click on the OK button.

As you show your presentation you can use the four pens by pressing 1 to 4 on your keyboard to enable one of the pens.

Related Topics:

Playback Options

Drawing with Notation Pens

Switching Notation Pens

Disabling Notation Pens


Purging Unused Resources

Before saving self-contained presentations, you should remove from memory any resources not used in the presentation. This will reduce the file size by ensuring that nothing unnecessary is saved as part of the presentation.

To purge unused resources

1.	Choose Edit/Purge Unused Resources...

The Purge Unused Resources dialog box will appear.

2.	Enable the checkboxes for the resources you want to purge from memory.

Only unused resources will be removed. You can remove any combination of unused sounds, pictures, actors, video, datasheets, and master slides.

3.	Click on the Purge button.

Related Topics:

Saving Presentations for Distribution


Saving Presentations for Distribution

There are several forms that you can save your presentation in for distribution.

To save a presentation for distribution

1.	Choose File/Save As...

The Save Presentation As dialog box will appear.

2.	Type your presentation's name in the Filename edit box.

If you will be playing the presentation from within Astound or from the Player application, the file should have the extension .asd. If you are saving your file as a self-running presentation the file should have the extension .exe.

3.	Specify the file type options for your presentation.

4	Click on the Select Icon button if you are creating a self running presentation and want to attach an icon to it.

This will display the Select Icon dialog box so that you can choose an icon to attach to the presentation file.

5.	If you are distributing your presentation on floppy disks, enable Segment for Multiple Disks/Files and the appropriate file size.

You can save in files that will fit on low density disks, high density disks, fill the disks, or you can specify a custom file size.

6.	Click on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Purging Unused Resources

Playback Options


Options Available During Playback

There are some options that are available while the presentation is in progress. When your presentation is playing, you can:

Use the notation pens to draw on your slides

Switch notation pens

Clear any marks made with the notation pens.

Pause the presentation

End the presentation

Play slides out of order

These options are available whether you are playing the presentation within Astound, from the Player application, or as a self-running presentation.


Drawing with Notation Pens

You can use the notation pens to draw on your slides while they are playing or paused. You can also switch between pens or remove any marks you have made on your slide while it is playing.

To draw on a slide during presentation playback

While the presentation is playing:

1.	Press the corresponding keyboard key (1 through 4) for the pen you want to use.

2.	Position the pointer where you want to start drawing.

3.	Drag the pointer to draw a freehand line.

The slide will pause while you have the mouse button pressed, resuming between drawing actions. You can press the [Spacebar] to pause the presentation while you are drawing and discussing a point. Press the [Spacebar] again to resume the presentation.

The drawing will be visible for the duration of that slide and will disappear when the slide does.

Related Topics:

Setting Notation Pens

Switching Notation Pens

Disabling Notation Pens

Playback Options


Switching Notation Pens

Switching pens during presentation playback is very simple. You just have to press the number on your keyboard that corresponds to the notation pen you want to use. For example if your third pen is a pink highlight, press [3] before drawing to highlight in pink.

To clear the screen of your pen notation

If your slide becomes too cluttered with notations, you can clear all of your notation marks.

1.	As your presentation is playing, press the [Del] key or the [Backspace] key.

The notation marks will clear from that slide.

Related Topics:

Setting Notation Pens

Drawing with Notation Pens

Disabling Notation Pens

Playback Options


Disabling the Notation Option During Playback
Disable the Notation Option During Playback

If you want to temporarily disable the notation feature during playback, press the [0] key on your keyboard. You will not be able to use any of the pens until you press one of the number keys assigned to the pens (1 through 4).

Related Topics:

Setting Notation Pens

Drawing with Notation pens

Switching Notation Pens

Playback Options


Pausing Presenations
Pausing Presentations

You can use the right mouse button to display a menu while playing your presentation. This menu contains options to pause or restart the slideshow, quit the slideshow, or to play a different slide. You can also use the [Spacebar] to pause a presentation or restart a paused presentation.

To pause the presentation with the pop-up menu

You can pause your presentation to discuss a point on the current slide or answer questions.

1.	Press the right mouse button.

A pop-up menu will appear.

2.	Choose Pause Show.

The presentation will pause.

3.	Press the right mouse button again, and choose Continue Show to resume the presentation.

To pause the presentation with the spacebar as you play it

1.	As your presentation is playing, press the [Spacebar].

Your presentation will pause.

2.	Press the [Spacebar] again to resume playing your presentation.

Related Topics:

Playback Options


Playing Slides Out of Order

You may want to replay a slide you have already played, or to skip to a different slide. You can do this while the presentation is playing by using the pop-up menu.

To play a different slide

1.	Press the right mouse button.

A pop-up menu will appear.

2.	Choose the name of the slide you want to play.

The slide you chose will begin to play.

Related Topics:

Playback Options


Stopping a Playing Presentation

To quit playing a presentation

1.	Press the right mouse button.

A pop-up menu will appear.

2.	Choose Quit Show.

The presentation will end and you will be returned to wherever you began playing the presentation from.

You can also end a presentation by pressing the [Esc] key or [Alt][F4].

Related Topics:

Playback Options


Shortcut Keys Drawing Objects
Shortcut Keys: Drawing Objects

[Shift]	Constrains all shapes to equal width and height. For example, it constrains rectangles to squares.

[Ctrl]	Draws from the center rather than the corner of an object and also keeps freehand and irregular polygons from closing.

[Alt]	Lets you move the object and then continue drawing.


Shortcut Keys Selecting Objects
Shortcut Keys: Selecting Objects

[Shift] click	Selects multiple objects by clicking on them one after another. Deselects multiple selected objects in the same manner.

Double-click	Selects an object one layer into a group.

[Alt] click	Selects a single object regardless of any groups.


Shortcut Keys Moving; Resizing; Cropping and Distorting Objects
Shortcut Keys: Moving, Resizing, Cropping and Distorting Objects

[Ctrl]	Leaves a copy of the object behind when you move an object.

[Shift]	Constrains movement of the object horizontally or vertically.

[Up] arrow	Moves selected objects upwards one pixel at a time.

[Down] arrow	Moves selected objects downwards one pixel at a time.

[Left] arrow	Moves selected objects to the left one pixel at a time.

[Right] arrow	Moves selected objects to the right one pixel at a time.

Cropping Objects

[Ctrl]	Crops an object rather than sizes it.

Resizing Objects

[Shift]	Maintains the aspect ratio while resizing.

Distorting Shapes	These modifiers work when you click on a point on the edge of a shape.

[Shift]	Keeps the same edge to the shape while elongating it.

[Ctrl][Shift]	Pulls that particular point with only a few others in the shape.

[Alt]	Stretches the shape and starts to pull all the points with it.

[Ctrl]	Stretches the object moving X and Y co-ordinates separately.


Shortcut Keys Dialog Boxes
Shortcut Keys: Dialog Boxes

Double-click on a picture 	Opens the Select Picture dialog box to select a picture.

Double-click on the Place Picture Tool	Opens the Open Picture dialog box to load a picture into memory.

Double-click on a button	Opens the Object Interaction dialog box.

Double-click on the Button Tool	Opens the Button Options dialog box so you can choose a button type.

Double-click on an actor	Opens the Select Actor dialog box to select an actor.

Double-click on the Place Actor Tool	Opens the Open Actor dialog box to load an actor into memory.

Double-click on a video object	Opens the Select Video dialog box to select a digital video clip or overlay video.

Double-click on the Place Video Tool	Opens the Open Video dialog box so you can load a video clip or specify overlay video.

Double-click on a chart	Opens the Chart Options dialog box.

Double-click on the Create Chart Tool	Opens a new datasheet in the Datasheet window. If you have already created a datasheet, this will display the Select Datasheet dialog box.

Click on the Sound tool	Opens the Sound dialog box.

Double-click on the Attributes Button	Opens the Object Display dialog box.

Double-click on the Star Tool	Opens the Number of Points dialog box, where you can select the default number of points for star shapes.

Double-click on the Polygon Tool	Opens the Number of Sides dialog box, where you can select the default number of sides you want for regular polygon shapes.

Double-click on an OLE object	Starts the server application so the OLE object can be edited.


Shortcut Keys Text Attributes
Shortcut Keys: Text Attributes

Double-click on text	Activates the Text tool and highlights the text, displaying the text ruler (if enabled) for the text editing mode.

Double-click Text tool	Opens the Type Specs dialog box.


Shortcut Keys Timelines
Shortcut Keys: Timelines

[Shift]	For sound timelines. drags out the timeline in multiples of the sound's length.

[Ctrl]	In the Timeline window, snaps timeline editing movements to key points in other object timelines on the slide.


Shortcut Keys Scrolling
Shortcut Keys: Scrolling

[Shift] Arrow keys	Scroll up, down, left, or right.

[Page Up]	Scrolls a full screen up.

[Page Down]	Scrolls a full screen down.

[Ctrl] [Page Up]	Scrolls a full screen left.

[Ctrl] [Page Down]	Scrolls a full screen right.

[Home]	Scrolls to the top/left corner of the slide.

[End]	Scrolls to the bottom/right corner of the slide.


Shortcut Keys During Playback
Shortcut Keys: During Playback

[Alt] [F4] or [Esc]	Aborts running the slideshow.

[Return]	Advances immediately to the next slide.

[Ctrl] [Return]	Restarts the current slide.

[Spacebar]	Pauses or resumes the slideshow.

[Up arrow]	Speeds up the animation in your slideshow.

[Down arrow]	Slows down the animation in your slideshow.

Right arrow	Goes to the previous slide.

Left arrow	Goes to the next slide.

[0]	Temporarily disables the notation option.

[1]-[4]	Selects which notation pen is used.

Right mouse click	Displays pop-up menu where you clicked, listing all slides, pause and quit options for impromptu navigation.


Actors (definition)
Actor

An animated object (contains its own inherent movements). These objects can be imported from other applications such as Gold Disks Animation Works, Animation Works Interactive, AddImpact!, Professional Draw, and ScreenCraze.


Amplitude (definition)
Amplitude

The Astound Sound Editor displays sound visually as a graph of amplitude vs. time. The amplitude of the graph data at any given point is the distance that the data point is above or below the zero center line. This is a representation of the actual voltage level that was measured at the moment in time when the sound was being recorded.


Animated Movie (definition)
Animated Movie

An animated movie is a file that plays back like a video file, but is created entirely by software. Animated movies contain backgrounds, actors, and objects that are generated by your computer.


Animating (definition)
Animation

Having motion. In Astound, you can animate objects so that they move across the screen, and use actors that contain inherent motion.


Axis (definition)
Axis

Lines labeled X, Y, and Z which orient the charts or graphs. The X axis displays the category, the Y axis displays the value, and the Z axis (on 3D charts) displays the series.

When you specify a rotation transition for an object, you will be allowed to rotate around the Screen or Objects X, Y, and Z axes.  These axes are placed through the center of the object, or screen. The X axis is horizontal, the Y axis is vertical, and the Z axis indicates depth.


Background (definition)
Background

A solid color, gradient, pattern, or picture file that covers the entire slide behind all other objects.


Bitmap (definition)
Bitmap

Any of several graphic file formats stored as an array of pixels representing a picture.


Bounce (definition)
Bounce

The Object Rotation Transition contains a bounce option. The bounce reverses the objects course briefly before it continues on the original path. Your object appears to bounce onto the screen.


Brightness (definition)
Brightness

The intensity of a color.  As you reduce the brightness, the color will become a darker shade, eventually turning black.


Bullet Text (definition)
Bullet Text

A point or paragraph of information indented and beginning with a bullet mark. Bullet text can be easily created using the text format levels.


Burst (definition)
Burst

You can create gradients in which the colors graduate from the center to the outer edges of the object or slide to create a color burst effect.


Button (definition)
Button

An object drawn with the Button tool. Buttons are designed to have interactivity added to them. For example, clicking on a button may display a different slide.


Categories (definition)
Categories

A related group of values on a chart, displayed along its X axis.  Categories are grouped on the chart, where Series are color coded.


Cell (definition)
Cell

One slot or entry in the datasheet. A cell is identified by its column and row; for example, the cell in the top leftmost corner of the data sheet is A1. Cells in Astounds datasheets can only contain numbers or text strings.


Channel (definition)
Channel

Channel status refers to whether a sound is recorded as a single channel, which results in monophonic sound, or as two channels, which results in stereophonic sound (stereo).


Chart (definition)
Chart

A pictorial presentation of numerical data in the form of charts or tables.


Chart Formats (definition)
Chart Format

Includes a chart type and other chart attributes or preselected options.  This provides a quick way of setting up your charts if you use the same format continually.


Color Schemes (definition)
Color Scheme

A set of complementary and contrasting colors designed to give your presentation a cohesive and professional look. Each of the major types of objects have several colors defined for them within a color scheme.


Column (definition)
Column

A vertical line of cells in the datasheet. Each column is assigned a letter name so that you can identify where you are within the datasheet.


Datasheet (definition)
Datasheet

A mini-spreadsheet that is included as part of the charting feature. Datasheets can contain numbers and text strings but do not support equations.


Decibels (definition)
Decibel

A decibel is a unit that expresses the loudness of sound. A decibel is not a physical unit, but rather a way of defining an increase or decrease in the sounds volume.


Digital Video (definition)
Digital Video

Digital video is a form of video that is stored in data files that your computer can read and play back. This type of video consists of bits of data, just like other data files used by your system.


Distribution Time (definition)
Distribution Time

The way time is broken up for an object or slide. Objects and slides are displayed for a specified length of time. This time is broken into entry time, on screen (or static) time, and exit time. The distribution time can be displayed as a percentage of the full slide time or in seconds.


Duration (definition)
Duration

The length of time a slide remains displayed on your computer during playback.


Entry Time (definition)
Entry Time

Sets the time the object enters the screen during a transition.


Exit Time (definition)
Exit Time

Sets the time the object exits the screen during a transition.


Gradient Fills (definition)
Gradient Fills

Color fills made up of a series of bands of colors that are blended together. The user can specify the colors to use.


Grid Lines Chart (definition)
Grid Lines (Chart)

A series of lines displayed on the chart that aid in the visual representation of data by making it easier for the eye to make the connection between the charted data and the value and category labels.


Grid Lines Slide View (definition)
Grid Lines (Slide View)

A series of non-printing lines that can appear in the Slide View to help you position objects accurately on your slide using the Snap To Grids command.


Handouts (definition)
Handouts

Notes about the presentation that are given to the audience. These notes may be based on the slides, on the speaker notes (Notes View) or on the slide outline. This option is available from the Print Options dialog box. You can print handouts displaying miniatures of your slide with room to take notes beside them.


Highlight (definition)
Highlight

To select text or data by dragging the pointer over it. The highlighted text will be affected by your next action.

Also, a type of notation pen setting used during on screen presentations to highlight text or objects on the screen.


Hue (definition)
Hue

The position of the color in the color spectrum.


Interactivity (definition)
Interactivity

The ability to cause the presentation to switch to a different slide or perform some other action such as playing a sound based on input from the user. For example, clicking the mouse button on an object may cause a graph to appear on the current slide.


Label (definition)
Label

Text placed on a chart in the charting function. There are series, category, value and legend labels.


Legend (definition)
Legend

An explanatory caption that accompanies charts and clarifies the meaning of colors in the chart.


Levels (definition)
Levels

A stored collection of user-created text-formatting definitions containing information such as type style, alignment, and line spacing specifications. You can use four different levels with different attributes.


Library (definition)
Library

A pictorial database of objects used in your presentation. A library can be opened in another presentation to make it easy to use common objects in several presentations. Objects can simply be dragged from the library onto the slide.


Loop (definition)
Loop

A set of instructions that execute repeatedly until a specific amount of time or some other condition is satisfied. In Astound, you can loop a sound or video so that it plays endlessly.


Marker (definition)
Marker

You can set markers in a sound sequence so that you can quickly locate a position within the sound. These markers are set in the Sound  Editor and are visible in the Timeline window, allowing you to synchronize events on the slide with a point in the sound.


Master Slides (definition)
Master Slide

A slide containing a background and common objects such as sounds and actors, as well as placeholders and interactive objects, that will be used as a base for several slides. Once a master slide is created, its components (except for placeholders) can only be altered as part of the master slide and not as part of individual slides.


MIDI Sound (definition)
MIDI Sound

MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface. MIDI sound is contained in sound files that consist of instructions to a hardware device to play sounds at specific volumes, tempos, pitches, etc. for specific lengths of time. MIDI sound files usually contain music and musical effects.


Mono (definition)
Mono

Mono is short for monophonic sound. This type of sound is recorded and played back on a single channel.


Narration (definition)
Narration

Narration is a voice recording that you can add to your slides if you have the required hardware. Narration is recorded as the slides play, allowing you to align your comments with events on the screen.


OLE (definition)
OLE (Object Linking and Embedding)

OLE (pronounced oh-lay) stands for Object Linking and Embedding. OLE allows you to insert information such as pictures, animations, or sounds created by other applications into any of your documents. Through OLE, your document remembers the connection between the information and the application which created it. OLE allows you to edit and manipulate the information from within the document or from within the original application. This shared information is called an OLE object. OLE requires Windows 3.1 or higher.


On Screen Presentation (definition)
On-Screen Presentation

A slide presentation shown on a computer monitor. The presentation can be self narrated or may require an external narrator.


Outline Views (definition)
Outline View

Displays outlines of the text contained within the slides of your presentation. You can use this to create an outline of your presentation first. You can edit existing text from this window or from within the Slide View.


Palette (definition)
Palette

The selection of  colors you have available within Astound. Your palette is dependent on your monitors color display capabilities.


Panels (definition)
Panels

Background pieces added behind a chart to create an impression of depth and set the graph apart from the rest of the slide. You can display panels for any combination of the X, Y, and Z axes.


Paths (definition)
Paths

The route an object takes to move onto and off of a slide during an on-screen presentation.


Patterns (definition)
Patterns

Used as a background or to fill an object on the slide. Patterns are chosen from a list accessed by using the Pattern pop-up menu at the bottom of the Astound window.


Pica (definition)
Pica

A unit of measurement equal to approximately 1/6 inch, or 12 points.


Player Application (definition)
Player Application

An application that will play disk based presentations and can be distributed. Does not allow any slide editing.


Point (definition)
Point

A unit of measurement equaling approximately 1/72 of an inch. Often used to refer to a font size, or the height of a printed character.


Presentation (definition)
Presentation

A talk or seminar etc., for which a slide or group of slides are created. A group of slides in a coherent unit.


Resources (definition)
Resources

Any object that is imported into a presentation, such as picture files, actors, video, and sound.  These objects remain stored in their original files unless you make the presentation into a self contained file from the Save As dialog box.


Rotation (definition)
Rotation

Choosing to make an object rotate onto or off of the screen in different ways.  You can choose the axes and angles it rotates around and add special effects like bouncing or growing onto the screen.  You cannot set rotation transitions for clipart, pictures, or other imported graphics.


Row (definition)
Row

A horizontal line of cells in the data sheet. Each row is assigned a number so that you can identify where it is within the datasheet.


Sample Rate (definition)
Sample Rate

The sample rate is the number of times each second a sound was sampled when it was recorded.


Sample Resolution (definition)
Sample Resolution

Sample resolution is the precision used to capture and store each sound sample. Astound supports 8-bit resolution, which results in 256 possible values for each sample, and 16-bit resolution, which results in 65, 536 possible values for each sample. 16-bit samples are twice as large as 8-bit samples, but yield clearer sound when played back.


Saturation (definition)
Saturation

The purity of a color, which can be any value from gray to the pure color.


Self Contained Presentation (definition)
Self-Contained Presentation

This type of presentation has all the resources it needs to run, such as sound, video, or animated movies, embedded within it.


Self Running Presentation (definition)
Self-Running Presentation

These presentations are played by double-clicking on them in the Windows File Manager or Program Manager. The player application is embedded within the presentation file. You can create a self-running presentation that will play on any computer running Windows 3.1.


Series (definition)
Series

A related group of values on a chart, displayed as color coded chart objects. The coding is explained in the legend that is created with the graph.


Slide (definition)
Slide

One page or screen and all of the objects it contains.


SlideView (definition)
Slide View

The main Astound window which allows you to create and edit individual slides.


Slide Sorter (definition)
Slide Sorter

A pictorial overview of all the slides in a presentation. Facilitates rearranging slides within a presentation.


Slideshow (definition)
Slideshow

Playing all of your slides in sequence is playing the slide show. You can have different types of slide shows, e.g., on-line, overhead, 35mm.


Sound Editor (definition)
Sound Editor

An editor in Astound that allows you to edit and record sounds for use with Astound slides.


Sound Sample (definition)
Sound Sample

Wave sound files are created by a process called sampling. Sampling is the computer equivalent of sound recording. To record a sound conventionally, a microphone is used to continuously convert small, rapid changes in air pressure (which is all sound is) into an electrical signal that mirrors these changes. As air pressure increases, the microphone outputs a voltage signal that also increases. As air pressure decreases, so does the output voltage. This continuously changing electrical signal (or wave) is then converted into a permanent magnetic charge on an audio tape.

If you were to constantly measure and graph the changing voltage coming out of a microphone, you would see a curve that looks just like a wave: a series of crests and troughs like ripples in water. Tall crests and deep troughs represent loud sound, and shallow crests and troughs represent soft sound. Crests that are close together indicate a high-pitched sound, and crests that are far apart reveal a low pitched sound.

Sampling hardware used by PC sound cards works by measuring the changing voltage coming out of a microphone (or any other piece of audio equipment) many thousands of times a second, and then passing all these measurements on to a computer where they are saved as a file. It is called sampling because, rather than recording the entire continuous sound, it records many individual samples of the sound at specific points in time.


Speaker Notes (definition)
Speaker Notes

A set of instructions that remind the speaker of what he wants to talk about. Can be produced within Astound, and printed for the speakers use.


Stereo (definition)
Stereo

Stereo is short for stereophonic sound. This type of sound is recorded and played back on two channels.


Template (definition)
Template

A series of master slides in the same style. You can quickly choose the masters you need for your presentation and create a cohesive presentation.


Timeline (definition)
Timeline

Specifies how long it takes an object to enter and exit a slide as well as how long it is displayed on the slide. The Timeline window allows you to set the sequence and timing of events and transitions within an individual slide of a disk based presentation.


Tools (definition)
Tools

Any of the icons within the Astound windows. Includes drawing tools, text tools, and import tools.


Transition (definition)
Transition

The way in which a slide or object appears, and leaves the screen of an on-screen slide presentation. It may fade in, appear in sections, etc.


Value (definition)
Value

The actual values of the charted elements. Value markers are displayed along the Y axis of the chart. This represents the actual data taken from the data sheet.


Wave Sound (definition)
Wave Sound

Wave sound files contain sampled sound data, and are usually used to store voice recordings and sound effects.


Add Marker Dialog Box

The options in this dialog box allow you to designate points in a sound or regions of sound as marked regions. Thes markers will be displayed in the Timeline Window so that you can align a portion of a sound wiht other activity on your slide.

Start Time field: Displays the time of the beginning of the selected region of sound.

End Time field: Displays the time of the end of the selected region of sound

Name edit box: You can enter a name for the selected region that you want to designate as a marker.


Apply Format Level Changes To Dialog Box
Apply Format Levels Changes To

This dialog box allows you to specify to what text you want to apply any changes made in the Format Text Levels dialog box.

Entire Presentation: Clicking on this button will apply the changes to all existing text in the presentation as well as using the changes as the new text format level defaults.

All Objects on Slide: Clicking on this button will apply the changes to all existing text on the current slide as well as using the changes as the new text format level defaults.

Default Text Attributes:`Clicking on this button will leave all existing text in the presentation as  it is currently, but changethe new text format level defaults for any future text that is added.


Button Options Dialog Box

The options in this dialog box allow you to change the appearance of buttons you have already created, or to define the appearance of buttons that you are going to create.

Shapes options: Clicking on one of the shapes in the Shapes box defines the basic shape of the button. You can choose a rectangle, rounded rectangle, rounded, or oval button shape.

Presets options: Clicking on one of the buttons in the Presets box selects one of the six preset button depth settings. The slide controls will be adjusted accordingly, and the button preview will reflect the chosen preset values.

Customize slide controls: Moving the handles up and down on the sliders changes the depth settings of the button. You can create custom buttons by moving the handles and watching the display in the Preview box.  Each slide control changes the appearance of the button based on what the control to its left is set at. Positive settings will raise the next section of the button above the previous, and negative settings will drop the section of the button deeper than the previous section. There are setting numbers displayed immediately below each slide control.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the current button settings.

Related Topics:

Creating Buttons

Interactivity


Change Link Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the server document you want to link the object to, or you can select the name from the drop-down list if the desired document has recently been linked to an Astound document.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box, that are located in the current directory.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the server document you want to link the object to is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. All available file extensions are contained in the dropdown list.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive you want.

Related Topics:

Paste

Paste Special

Links

OLE


Character Spacing Dialog Box

Enter Spacing edit box: You can enter a value for the character spacing, in percent of normal character spacing (100%).

Related Topics:

Chagning Attributes for Selected Text


Chart Format Name Dialog Box

Chart Format Name edit box: In this field, type the name under which you want to save the current group of chart option settings.

Related Topics:

Chart Formats

Loading Chart Formats

Creating Chart Formats


Chart Options Dialog Box

This dialog box contains options that allow you to choose the chart type, and to control chart attributes and settings.

Chart Type drop-down list box: Displays the current chart type. You can select the type of chart you want from the drop-down list, which includes both two and three-dimensional charts.

Chart Formats drop-down list box: Displays the current chart format, which is a chart type and all of the attributes that can be attached to it. You can select the chart format that you want from the drop-down list of currently loaded formats.

New... button: Clicking on this button displays the Chart Format Name dialog box, in which you can enter a name for the new chart format you want to create.

Load... button: Clicking on this button displays the Load Chart Format dialog box, from which you can select or specify the chart format you want to load.

Save... button: Clicking on this button displays the Chart Format Name dialog box, from which you can specify the name under which you want to save the current chart format.

Remove button: Clicking on this button causes the current chart format to be deleted from the Chart Formats drop-down list.

Datasheet... button: Clicking on this button displays the Datasheet window, in which you can enter or import the data you want to use in your chart.

Transpose Data checkbox: Enabling this option causes the orientation of the data to be changed. For example, if columns of data in your datasheet are charted along the X axis, enabling the Transpose Data checkbox will cause that data to be charted along the Y axis.

Cumulative checkbox: Enabling this option causes the data to be displayed cumulatively in each successive segment. For example, if a factory produced 1200 units the first year, and 1400 units the second year, the second year's data will be charted as 2600 units if the Cumulative checkbox is enabled.

100% checkbox: Enabling this option causes all data to be charted as a percentage of its total. This allows you to compare the data ratios easily.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the chart that reflects the selected options.

Display button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Display options. These options control the axis, plot range, division, and panel attribute settings.

Text button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Text options. These options control the text attributes of chart and axis titles, labels, and legends.

Numbers button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Numbers options. These options control the display of numbers themselves, as well as other numeric information such as currency and negative number notation.

Legend button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Legend options. These option control the placement and appearance of chart legends.

Color button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Color options. These options control the colors of backgrounds, data segments, and axis and grid lines.

Arrange button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Arrange options. These options control the placement and display of chart data segments.

3D View button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the 3D View options. These options control the rotation and perspective of three-dimensional charts. This button is disabled when any two-dimensional chart is selected from the Chart Type drop-down list.

Animation button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Animation options. These options control the timing distribution, order, and transition of your animated charts.

Related Topics:

Defining Timing for Animated Charts

Setting Segment Attributes

Changing Chart Colors

Three Dimensional Charts

Adding a Legend

Setting Attributes for Numbers on Charts

Setting Chart Text Specifications

Setting Chart Display Options


Animation Options

Clicking on the Animation button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the Animation options. These options control the timing distribution, order, and transition of your animation.

Timeline: You can use this timeline to specify entry and/or exit transition times for your chart, as well as static time for the chart as a whole.

Seconds/Percentage button: Clicking on this button toggles the scale display between seconds and percentage of the total slide duration.

Entry drop-down list box: Displays the selected chart segment entry distribution option. You can select an entry distribution option from the drop down list. This option controls the timing of the appearance of chart segments in relation to each other.

Exit drop-down list box: Displays the selected chart segment exit distribution option. You can select an exit distribution option from the drop down list. This option controls the timing of the disappearance of chart segments in relation to each other.

Entry buttons: Clicking on one of these buttons specifies the order in which the chart elements appear. You can specify that the chart elements appear by category, or by series.

Exit buttons: Clicking on one of these buttons specifies the order in which the chart elements disappear. You can specify that the chart elements disappear by category, or by series.

Never radio button: Enabling this option causes the chart to appear without pausing between the appearances of the data elements.

After Each Segment radio button: Enabling this option causes a pause between the appearance of each segment of the chart. The next segment will begin to appear as soon as the mouse button is clicked.

After Each Series/Category radio button: Enabling this option causes a pause between the appearance of each series or category (depending on what type of entry order you have chosen). The next series or category will begin to appear as soon as the mouse button is clicked.

After Entire Chart radio button: Enabling this option causes a pause after the entire chart has appeared. The slide will resume as soon as the mouse button is clicked.

Transition... button: Clicking on this button displays the Object Transition dialog box, from which  you can select an entry and/or exit transition for the chart segments.

Preview/Stop Animation button: Clicking on the Preview Animation button causes a preview of the specified chart animation to appear in the Preview box. While the preview is playing, the button changes to the Stop Animation button, which you can click on to stop the preview.

Related Topics:

Chart Transitions

Adding Pauses to the Chart's Entry

Selecting Chart Entry and Exit Distribution


Arrangement Attributes

Clicking on the Arrange button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the Arrange options. These options control the placement and display of chart data segments. Not all options are available for all chart types, and the options will change depending on what type of chart is currently selected.

Depth slide bar: You can set the depth of each bar, column, pie wedge, or scatter chart marker. Moving the handle to the far left will reduce the depth of the chart segments to zero. This attribute is disabled for all two-dimensional chart types, as well as for Pictographs.

Group/Data/Line Space slide bar: You can set the amount of space between each group, category of data, or line on your chart. This attribute is disabled for all two-dimensional chart types except 2D Column and 2D Bar, as well as for three-dimensional Area, Scatter, and Pie charts.

Segment/Series/Depth Space slide bar: You can set the amount of space between each data segment or series, or between the data areas in an Area chart. This function of this bar will change depending on what type of chart is  currently selected.

Thickness slide bar: You can specify the thickness of lines used in line-based charts.

Block Size slide bar: You can specify the size of the points used in a Scatter chart. .

Inner Radius slide bar: You can specify an inner radius for Pie charts, which will change your pie-shaped chart into a donut-shaped chart.

Explode All Segments radio button: Enabling this option causes all the pieces of a pie chart to move away from each other by the amount specified using the Explode % slide bar. This option is only available for Pie charts.

Explode Segments Individually radio button: Enabling this option causes selected pieces of a pie chart to move away from each other by the amount specified using the Explode % slide bar. When you select this option, the colors used for the pie chart segments appear in the box below. You can select the color(s) that correspond to the piece(s) you want exploded. This option is only available for Pie charts.

Explode % slide bar: You can set the amount by which the pieces of a pie chart are moved away from each other by sliding the handle or clicking on the slide bar.

Orientation dial: You can click on the dial or drag the indicator around to rotate the pie chart around its center. This allows you to customize the orientation of the chart segments.


Chart Color Options

Clicking on the Color button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the Color options. These options control the colors of backgrounds, data segments, and axis and grid lines.

Panels button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select a color for the chart's background panels.

Axis and Grids button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select a color for the chart's axes and grids.

Segments box: This box contains the current colors of the chart segments. To change a segment color, select it and click on the Segments button. A Color pop-up window will appear, from which you can choose or create a color for the selected segment.

Segments button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can choose a color for the selected segment.


Display Options

Clicking on the Display button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the Display options. These options control the placement of lables, gridlines, tickmarks, and panels, as well as specify a displayed range for the chart values.

Label 1 and Label 2 checkboxes: You can toggle the display of labels for two-dimensional charts (including pictographs) by selecting and deselecting the Label 1 checkboxes for the X and Y axes. 2D Pie charts have only a Y axis label. When you are creating three-dimensional charts, you can choose the placement of the labels along all three axes. Enabling Label 1 checkboxes place chart labels on the opposite side of the chart from that specified by enabling Label 2 checkboxes. 3D Pie charts have only Y axis labels.

Major Grids and Minor Grids checkboxes: You can toggle the display of major and minor grid lines along the chart axes. Checkboxes corresponding to grids that are unavailable for a specific chart type will be disabled.

Inside Ticks and Outside Ticks checkboxes: You can display tick marks inside and/or outside the actual chart axes. Checkboxes corresponding to axes that are unavailable for a specific chart type will be disabled.

Plot Min Range and Plot Max Range options: You can specify the minimum and maximum values displayed within the axes by enabling the appropriate checkbox and entering a value in the corresponding edit box. If you set a minimum plot range at a positive number, the chart will start plotting at that value. This allows you to see large values that are close together. You can set the maximum to be greater than the highest chart value.

# of Major Divisions options: You can specify how many value labels are added to your chart by enabling the appropriate checkbox and entering a value in the corresponding edit box.

# of Minor Divisions options: You can specify how many minor divisions to place between each set of major division labels by enabling the appropriate checkbox and entering a value in the corresponding edit box.

Panels checkboxes: Enabling any of these checkboxes displays the corresponding panels in your chart. You can choose to display side, floor, or back panels.

Show Frame checkbox: Enabling this checkbox will place a frame around your chart on the page.

Setting Chart Display Options

Charting Options


Legend Options

Clicking on the Legend button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the Legend options. These options control the layout and display of the chart's legend, including its frame and shadow.

Show Legend checkbox: Enabling this checkbox causes a legend to be displayed with your chart.

Location radio buttons: You can specify where the legend is placed on the slide - relative to the chart - by selecting one of these radio buttons.

Row Layout drop-down list box: Displays the currently selected layout option. The drop-down list contains the available legend layouts. If your legend is being added to either side of the chart, you can specify how many columns are in the legend. If the legend is being added to the top or bottom of the chart, you can specify how many rows are in the legend.

Show Frame checkbox: Enabling this option causes a frame to be displayed around the chart legend.

Corners options: You can control the appearance of the chart legend frame by selecting one of these radio buttons. You can make the frame's corners rounded or squared.

Show Shadow radio button: Enabling this options causes a shadow to be displayed around the chart legend box.

Offset options: You can control the location of the legend box shadow by entering the desired horizontal and vertical offset values in the edit boxes.


Chart Numbers Options
Chart Number Options

Clicking on the Numbers button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the Numbers options. These options control the display and style of numbers and associated symbols.

Apply/Show Options For list box: You can select the chart number element that you want to change the attributes of. The list contains all of the number categories that are available for the current chart type.

Number Style drop-down list box: From the drop-down list, you can select a number style for the currently selected chart number element. You can choose General, Percentage, or Currency.

Negative Style options: You can choose the display style of negative numbers by enabling one of the radio buttons. You can choose to display negative numbers with a minus sign, or inside parentheses.

Decimal Places edit box: You can enter the number of decimal places that are displayed for any decimal fractions that appear in the selected chart number element.

Separators options: In the appropriate edit box, you type the symbol you want to use to specify a decimal separator, or a thousands separator.

Sign edit box: This option is enabled when you select Currency from the Number Style drop-down list. You can enter the symbol you want to use to denote the specific currency values you are charting.

Position options: These options are enabled when you select Currency from the Number Style drop-down list. You can choose to position the currency symbol either before or after the number.


Text Options

Clicking on the Text button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the Text options. These options control the display of titles and labels, including fonts, styles, sizes, and colors.

Selected list box: In this box, you can select which portion of text you want to set attributes for. You can specify attributes for a main title, a subtitle, a footnote, a legend, and text along each axis.

Show Title checkbox: Enabling this option causes the title text element selected in the Selected list box to be displayed on the chart. This option is disabled when either Legend or multiple options are selected in the Selected list box.

Title edit box: You can enter the text you want to use as a title or footnote.

Font Name drop-down list box: Displays the current font used for the selected chart text element. You can select a font to apply to the text from the drop-down list box.

Font Size drop-down list box: Displays the size of the current font used for the selected chart text element. You can select a font size to apply to the text from the drop-down list.

Styles checkboxes: Enabling one of these checkboxes applies the corresponding style to the selected chart text element. You can choose Bold, Italic, or Underline.

Text Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color for the selected text element.

Preview checkbox: Enabling this option causes a text preview to appear in the preview box. The preview reflects the currently selected text options.

Preview box: Displays a text preview reflecting the currently selected text options.


3D View Options

Clicking on the 3D View button expands the Chart Options dialog box to include the 3D View options. These options control the perspective view and three-dimensional orientation of the chart.

Preview box: Displays an outline preview of the three-dimensional chart that reflects the current 3D settings.

Trackball: The trackball allows you to rotate your chart and change the angle from which you are looking at it. Arrows on the trackball indicate the direction you are angling the chart toward. The preview will show how far you have rotated the chart. Double clicking on the trackball will return your object to its original positioning. You can also rotate the outer ring of the trackball to rotate your chart.

Distance indicator: Moving the Distance Indicator allows you to specify how far you are from the chart, thereby indicating how much perspective to add to the chart. Moving the indicator upward places you closer to the chart and adds more extreme perspective.

Perspective checkbox: Enabling this checkbox allows you to add perspective to your rotated chart.

Update button: Clicking on this button updates the preview of your chart in the main portion of the dialog box so that you can get an accurate feel for what your chart will look like.


Chart Format Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to define a new chart format based upon the attributes of the selected chart by simply giving the format a name.


Color Mixer Dialog Box

Color Refiner box: This box contains a full display of the colors that can be defined using Red, Green, and Blue color values. You can click or place the color refiner cursor anywhere in the box to select a color. Your choice will be reflected in the Color/Solid box, in the Vertical Luminosity bar, and in the edit boxes below.

Vertical Luminosity bar: You can drag the marker along or click anywhere inside this bar to specify a luminosity value for the color you are creating. Your choice will be reflected in the Color/Solid box, and in the edit boxes below.

Color/Solid box: Displays the color you have selected in the left half of the box, and the nearest solid color to it in the right half of the box. This will depend on what color mode you are currently working in.

Hue edit box: Displays the hue of the currently selected color. You can enter any value from zero to 239. The hue of a color describes the actual color you are selecting.

Sat edit box: Displays the saturation of the currently selected color. You can enter any value from zero to 240. The saturation of a color describes how vivid or how dull the color is.

Lum edit box: Displays the currently selected luminosity value. You can enter any value from zero to 240. The luminosity of a color describes how light or how dark the color is. This edit box is linked to the vertical luminosity bar, and affects the range of color that you can select.

Red, Green, and Blue edit boxes: These edit boxes display the R,G,B values for the currently selected color. The values you can enter will be constrained by the luminosity value that you have selected.

Related Topics:

Using the Color Mixer

Color Schemes


Color Schemes Dialog Box

Name drop-down list box: Displays the name of the current color scheme. You can select an existing color scheme by choosing its name from the drop-down list.

Save... button: Clicking on this button displays the Save Color Scheme dialog box, which you can use to save the current color scheme.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the currently color scheme from memory. It will no longer be available in the Name drop-down list.

Colors box: The rectangles contain the colors of the current color scheme. You can choose a color by clicking on it.

Eyedropper button: Clicking on this button displays the Eyedropper dialog box and changes the cursor to an eyedropper tool. You can select any color displayed on the screen by clicking the eyedropper tool on it. The color you click on will be placed in the selected rectangle in the Colors box: in effect adding it to the color scheme.

Color Mixer button: Clicking on this button causes the dialog box to expand to include the Color Mixer options. You can create a color to place in the selected rectangle in the Colors box - in effect adding it to the color scheme - by clicking in the color refiner box or entering values in the edit boxes.

Color Spectrum button: Clicking on this button causes the dialog box to expand to include the Color Spectrum options. You can select a color to place in the selected rectangle in the Colors box - in effect adding it to the color scheme - by clicking on it in the Color Spectrum box.

Presentation radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected color scheme be applied to the entire presentation.

Slide radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected color scheme be applied to the current slide only.

Select button: Clicking on this button causes the selected color scheme to be applied to the presentation or to the current slide, depending on the option specified in the Apply To box.

Done button: Clicking on this button closes the dialog box without applying the selected color scheme. Any color schemes saved or removed since the dialog box was opened will remain saved or removed.

NOTE:  When you choose a new color scheme for a presentation, only those objects contained on the slides themselves will use the new color scheme.  Backgrounds and objects contained on any template you are using will retain the template's color scheme.

If you want to change ALL of the basic colors in your presentation, you must first use the Edit Master command in the Slide menu to access the template.  Then you can use the Color Scheme dialog box to choose a new scheme.  After choosing a new color scheme, you can return to editing your presentation.

Related Topics:

Using the Color Mixer

Using the Color Spectrum

Using the Eyedropper


Color Mixer Attributes

Color Refiner box: This box contains a full display of the colors that can be defined using Red, Green, and Blue color values. You can click or place the color refiner cursor anywhere in the box to select a color. Your choice will be reflected in the Color/Solid box, in the Vertical Luminosity bar, and in the edit boxes below.

Vertical Luminosity bar: You can drag the marker along or click anywhere inside this bar to specify a luminosity value for the color you are creating. Your choice will be reflected in the Color/Solid box, and in the edit boxes below.

Color/Solid box: Displays the color you have selected in the left half of the box, and the nearest solid color to it in the right half of the box. The number of solid colors available will depend on what color mode you are currently working in.

Hue edit box: Displays the hue of the currently selected color. You can enter any value from zero to 239. The hue of a color describes the actual color you are selecting.

Sat edit box: Displays the saturation of the currently selected color. You can enter any value from zero to 240. The saturation of a color describes how vivid or how dull the color is.

Lum edit box: Displays the currently selected luminosity value. You can enter any value from zero to 240. The luminosity of a color describes how light or how dark the color is. This edit box is linked to the vertical luminosity bar, and affects the range of color that you can select.

Red, Green, and Blue edit boxes: These edit boxes display the R,G,B values for the currently selected color. The values you enter may cause the luminosity value to change. Placing the color refiner cursor will be not affect the luminosity value that you have selected, although the R,G,B values will change within the range allowed by the current luminosity value.

Accept button: Clicking on this button causes the color specified in the Color Mixer box to be placed in the color rectangle selected in the Colors box.

Related Topics:

Color Schemes Dialog Box

Color Schemes

Selecting Colors

Using the Color Mixer


Color Spectrum Attributes

Color boxes: You can select a color by double-clicking on its color rectangle, or by clicking on it and clicking on the Accept button.

Accept button: Clicking on this button causes the color specified in the Color Spectrum box to be placed in the color rectangle selected in the Colors box.

Related Topics:

Using the Color Spectrum

Color Schemes

Color Schemes Dialog Box


Color Spectrum Dialog Box

Color boxes: You can select a color by double-clicking on its rectangle, or by clicking on it and then clicking on the OK button.

Related Topics:

Using the Color Spectrum

Selecting Colors


Column Width Dialog Box

Column Width edit box: You can enter a custom column width. When you click on the OK button, the selected column(s) will be adjusted to reflect the specified width.

Default Width checkbox: Enabling this option locks the default column width into the Column Width edit box.

Related Topics:

Creating a New Datasheet

Datasheet Window


Confirm Replacement Dialog Box

Replace button: Clicking on this button causes Astound to replace the selected occurrence of the search text and begin searching again.

Skip button: Clicking on this button causes Astound to skip the selected occurrence of the search text and begin searching again.

Replace Rest button: Clicking on this button causes Astound to replace all remaining occurrences of the search text without displaying this dialog box again.

Quit button: Clicking on this button causes the search to end without replacing the selected occurrence of the search text.


Continue Find Dialog Box

Find Next button: Clicking on this button continues the find operation, searching the designated text for the next occurrence of the specified text string.

Quit button: Clicking on this button end the find operation and closes the dialog box, returning you to the Find Text dialog box.

Related Topics:

Finding Text

Finding Occurrences of Selected Text


Convert Object to Bitmap Dialog Box

Opaque radio button: Enabling this option specifies that only the object itself be converted as a solid, and causes the hollow areas to be filled with white. Objects behind the selected object's bounding box, but not behind the actual object, will be visible if you set the transparent color to be white.

Solid radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the object be converted as a solid object, and fills the bounding box and hollow areas of the object with white. No other objects will be visible behind the area included in the selected object's bounding box.

Transparent radio button: Enabling this option allows you to specify a color in your object that will be made transparent. When the object has been converted, objects behind areas of the selected color in the bitmap will be visible.

Transparent Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can choose the color that will be transparent when the object is converted.

Related Topics:

Converting Objects to Bitmaps


Create Master Dialog Box

Master Slide Name combo box: You can select a standard name for the master slide you are creating from the drop-down list. This will allow Astound to convert one master slide to one with the same name in a different template. This allows you to easily switch templates.

Related Topics:

Creating Masters and Templates


Create New Slide Dialog Box

Master drop-down list box: From the drop-down list, you can select the master slide you want to base the new slide on, or you can select the No Master option, which will allow you to create a new slide without a master.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the master slide selected in the Master drop-down list box.

Name field: You can enter a name for the new slide(s).

No. of Slides edit box: You can specify the number of new slides you want to create.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides

Creating Slides with a Master Slide


Create Table Chart Dialog Box

Title edit box: You can add a title to the selected table by typing it in here.

Plot Rows Switched With Columns checkbox: Enabling this option allows you to create your table with the rows of data displayed as columns, and columns of data displayed as rows, without recreating your entire datasheet.

Calculate Best Table Size checkbox: Enabling this option causes the table to maintain the same aspect ratio as the cells have in the datasheet, ensuring that all titles and data fit correctly within the grid. The table will be placed starting in the top left corner of the previously specified rectangle. If this option is not enabled, the table will be scaled to fit within the rectangle.

Show Lines checkbox: Enabling this option causes the specified row and column grid lines to be displayed in the table.

Row Size and Color options: You can enter the size of both major and minor rows in the Size edit boxes, and you can select a color for the lines by clicking on the corresponding Color buttons. This will cause a Color Scheme pop-up window to be displayed.

Column Size and Color options: You can enter the size of both major and minor columns in the Size edit boxes, and you can select or create a color for the lines by clicking on the corresponding Color buttons. This will cause a Color Scheme pop-up window to be displayed.

Labels options: You can control the placement of the table labels by selecting one of the checkboxes. You can place the label in either the top row, or the left column.

Show Background checkbox: Enabling this option causes the specified borders and margins to be displayed in the table, including the selected color options.

Interior Color options: Clicking on the button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color for the interior of the table. To apply the selected color to the current table, enable the Interior Color checkbox.

Border Color options: Clicking on the button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color for the table borders. To apply the selected color to the current table, enable the Border Color checkbox.

Border Size drop-down list box: Displays the thickness of the table borders. You can enter a new value or select one from the drop-down list. Border size is specified in points.

Margin edit box: You can enter a value specifying the size of the margins in the table.

Number Format... button: Clicking on this button displays the Table Number Format dialog box, from which you can control the number style, currency symbol and placement, number of decimals displayed, negative number style, and other number options for the table.

Type Specs... button: Clicking on this button displays the Table Type Specs dialog box, from which you can set the title, row label, column label, and data text separately.

Related Topics:

Selecting Colors

Creating Tables from your Datasheet

Creating Charts


Define Arrowheads Dialog Box

Length edit box: You can enter a value for the front-to-back length of the arrowhead.

Span edit box: You can enter a value for the side-to-side width of the arrowhead.

Inset edit box: You can enter a value for the inset in the back of the arrowhead. Making this number negative will cause the inset to be reversed, creating a protrusion on the back of the arrowhead.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the arrowhead reflecting the currently specified settings.

Related Topics:

Modifying Arrowheads


Define Compact Disc Clip Dialog Box

The Clip Name field: You can enter a name for the CD clip you want to define.

The Start Track and Time edit boxes: You can specify the starting point of the CD clip you want to define by entering the track number, and the location within the track.

The End Track and Time edit boxes: You can specify the ending point of the CD clip you want to define by entering the track number and the location within the track.

The To End of Track button:  Clicking on this button causes the End Track and Time edit boxes to display the end time of the currently specified track on the CD.

The Position slider: Displays the currently specified location on the CD. You can drag the handle on the slider to choose a location, which will be displayed in the Track and Time fields.

The Transport Controls: You can use these controls to search through the CD for a specific location. They resemble and are used the same way as the transport controls on an audio CD player: play, stop, pause, skip forward and backward, and search forward and backward. The current location on the CD will be displayed in the Track and Time fields, and on the Position slider.

The Set Start button: Clicking on this button places the currently specified location on the CD into the Start Track and Time edit boxes, defining the location as the starting point of the CD clip.

The Set End button: Clicking on this button places the currently specified location on the CD into the End Track and Time edit boxes, defining the location as the ending point of the CD clip.

The Track and Time fields: Display the currently specified location on the CD. This may be changed by using the Transport controls, or by dragging the handle on the slider.

Related Topics:

Using Sound from a Compact Disc


Define Pictograph Dialog Box

Currently Loaded drop-down list box: You can select a pictograph object to use in your chart from the drop-down list of objects that are already defined as pictographs and loaded into memory.

Load... button: Clicking on this button displays the Load Pictograph dialog box, from which you can select a pictograph object to load into memory. The object will then be included in the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

Save... button: Clicking on this button displays the Save Pictograph dialog box, which you can use to save the current pictograph object.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the current pictograph object from the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

Vertical radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected pictograph object is oriented vertically in the chart.

Horizontal radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected pictograph object is oriented horizontally in the chart.

0% Display Level box: Displays a representation of what the object will look like at zero percent on the chart.

100% Display Level box: Displays a representation of what the object will look like at one hundred percent on the chart.

Related Topics:

Defining a Pictograph Object

Creating Pictographs


Delete Datasheets Dialog Box

This dialog box contains a list of all datasheets that are currently loaded into memory. You can remove one or more of these datasheets by selecting them and clicking on the Done button.

Datasheet list box: Displays a list of all datasheets that are currently loaded into memory.

Uses field: Displays the number of charts in the presentation which currently make use of the datasheet.

Delete button: Clicking on this button causes the currently selected datasheet to be removed from memory. It will no longer appear in the Datasheet list box.

Done button: Clicking on this button closes the dialog box. Any datasheets that have been deleted will remain deleted.

Related Topics:

Datasheet Window


Display Preferences Dialog Box

Show Status Bar checkbox:  When this checkbox is enabled, the status bar will be displayed along the bottom of the various view windows.

Show Tool Bar checkbox:  When this checkbox is enabled, the tool bar along the top of the various view will be displayed.

Inches radio button:  Selecting this option will cause all measurements to be displayed in inches.

Millimeters radio button: Selecting this option will cause all measurements to be displayed in millimeters.

Pels (Pixels) radio button:  Selecting this option will cause all measurements to be displayed in pixels.

Points radio button:  Selecting this option will cause all measurements to be displayed in points.

Picas radio button:  Selecting this option will cause all measurements to be displayed in picas.

Grid checkbox:  Enabling this checkbox displays a grid across your slides allowing you to show grid more accurately place objects on your slide. You can specify the space between grid lines in the Horizontal Spacing and Vertical Spacing fields.

Snap to Grid checkbox:  Enabling this checkbox causes your drawing and editing actions to be snapped to the grid lines on your page. The grid lines do not have to be visible for the Snap To Grid option to work.

Horizontal Spacing:  In this field you can specify the distance between horizontal grid lines.

Vertical Spacing:  In this field you can specify the distance between vertical grid lines.

Related Topics:

Display Preferences

File Preferences


Distribute Objects Dialog Box

Entry radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the distribution option you choose will apply to the appearance of the selected object(s).

Exit radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the distribution option you choose will apply to the disappearance of the selected object(s).

Distribution Options buttons: You can set the order of appearance and disappearance of the selected object(s) by clicking on one of these buttons.

Timeline: You can specify the total time taken for ALL selected objects to enter and exit by adjusting the timeline with the appropriate radio button enabled.

Related Topics:

Timelines

Distributing Timelines


Echo Dialog Box

Gain slider: You can specify the amount of gain for the echo by dragging the handle on the slide bar to the left or to the right.

Less and More Gain buttons: Clicking on these buttons decreases or increases the specified amount of gain for the echo. The slider will move to reflect the gain setting.

Decibels field: Displays the currently specified amount of gain for the echo, in decibels.

Delay slider: You can specify the delay between echoes by dragging the handle on the slide bar to the left or to the right. Clicking in the slide bar will cause the handle to move to the current location of the cursor.

Less and More Delay buttons: Clicking on these buttons decreases or increases the specified delay time for the echo(es). The slider will move to reflect the delay setting.

Seconds field: Displays the currently specified delay time for the echo(es), in seconds.

Repeats slider: You can specify the number of echoes you want to create by dragging the handle on the slide bar to the left or to the right. Clicking in the slide bar will cause the handle to move to the current location of the cursor.

Less and More Repeats buttons: Clicking on these buttons decreases or increases the number of echoes created. The slider will move to reflect the gain setting.

Number field: Displays the currently specified number of echoes to be created.

Related Topics:

Adding an Echo to a Sound


Edit Chart Options Dialog Box

This dialog box contains options that allow you to choose the chart type, and to control chart attributes and settings.

Chart Type drop-down list box: Displays the current chart type. You can select the type of chart you want from the drop-down list, which includes both two and three-dimensional charts.

Chart Formats drop-down list box: Displays the current chart format, which is a chart type and all of the attributes that can be attached to it. You can select the chart format that you want from the drop-down list of currently loaded formats.

New... button: Clicking on this button displays the Chart Format Name dialog box, in which you can enter a name for the new chart format you want to create.

Load... button: Clicking on this button displays the Load Chart Format dialog box, from which you can select or specify the chart format you want to load.

Save... button: Clicking on this button displays the Chart Format Name dialog box, from which you can specify the name under which you want to save the current chart format.

Remove button: Clicking on this button causes the current chart format to be deleted from the Chart Formats drop-down list.

Datasheet... button: Clicking on this button displays the Datasheet window, in which you can enter or import the data you want to use in your chart.

Transpose Data checkbox: Enabling this option causes the orientation of the data to be changed. For example, if columns of data in your datasheet are charted along the X axis, enabling the Transpose Data checkbox will cause that data to be charted along the Y axis.

Cumulative checkbox: Enabling this option causes the data to be displayed cumulatively in each successive segment. For example, if a factory produced 1200 units the first year, and 1400 units the second year, the second year's data will be charted as 2600 units if the Cumulative checkbox is enabled.

100% checkbox: Enabling this option causes all data to be charted as a percentage of its total. This allows you to compare the data ratios easily.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the chart that reflects the selected options.

Display button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Display options. These options control the axis attribute, plot range, division, and panel attribute settings.

Text button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Text options. These options control the text attributes of chart and axis title, labels, and legends.

Numbers button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Numbers options. These options control the display of numbers themselves, as well as other numeric information such as currency and negative number notation.

Legend button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Legend options. These option control the placement and appearance of chart legends.

Color button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Color options. These options control the colors of backgrounds, data segments, and axis and grid lines.

Arrange button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Arrange options. These options control the placement and display of chart data segments.

3D View button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the 3D View options. These options control the rotation and perspective of three-dimensional charts. This button is disabled when any two-dimensional chart is selected from the Chart Type drop-down list.

Animation button: Clicking on this button expands the dialog box to include the Animation options. These options control the timing distribution, order, and transition of your animated charts.

Related Topics:

Defining Timing for Animated Charts

Setting Segment Attributes

Changing Chart Colors

Three Dimensional Charts

Adding a Legend

Setting Attributes for Numbers on Charts

Setting Chart Text Specifications

Setting Chart Display Options


Edit Pictograph Dialog Box

Currently Loaded drop-down list box: You can select a pictograph object to use in your chart from the drop-down list of objects that are already defined as pictographs and loaded into memory.

Load... button: Clicking on this button displays the Load Pictograph dialog box, from which you can select a pictograph object to load into memory. The object will then be included in the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

Save... button: Clicking on this button displays the Save Pictograph dialog box, which you can use to save the current pictograph object.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the current pictograph object from the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

Vertical radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected pictograph object is oriented vertically in the chart.

Horizontal radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected pictograph object is oriented horizontally in the chart.

0% Display Level box: Displays a representation of what the object will look like at zero percent on the chart.

100% Display Level box: Displays a representation of what the object will look like at one hundred percent on the chart.

Related Topics:

Editing Pictograph Objects


Edit Table Chart Dialog Box

Title edit box: You can add a title to the selected table by typing it in here.

Plot Rows Switched With Columns checkbox: Enabling this option allows you to create your table with the rows of data displayed as columns, and columns of data displayed as rows, without recreating your entire datasheet.

Calculate Best Table Size checkbox: Enabling this option causes the table to maintain the same aspect ratio as the cells have in the datasheet, ensuring that all titles and data fit correctly within the grid. The table will be placed starting in the top left corner of the previously specified rectangle. If this option is not enabled, the table will be scaled to fit within the rectangle.

Show Lines checkbox: Enabling this option causes the specified row and column grid lines to be displayed in the table.

Row Size and Color options: You can enter the size of both major and minor rows in the Size edit boxes, and you can select or create a color for the lines by clicking on the corresponding Color buttons. This will cause a Color Scheme pop-up window to be displayed.

Column Size and Color options: You can enter the size of both major and minor columns in the Size edit boxes, and you can select or create a color for the lines by clicking on the corresponding Color buttons. This will cause a Color Scheme pop-up window to be displayed.

Labels options: You can control the placement of the table labels by selecting one of the checkboxes. You can place the label in either the top row, or the left column.

Show Background checkbox: Enabling this option causes the specified borders and margins to be displayed in the table, including the selected color options.

Interior Color options: Clicking on the button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color for the interior of the table. To apply the selected color to the current table, enable the Interior Color checkbox.

Border Color options: Clicking on the button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color for the table borders. To apply the selected color to the current table, enable the Border Color checkbox.

Border Size drop-down list box: Displays the thickness of the table borders. You can enter a new value or select one from the drop-down list. Border size is specified in points.

Margin edit box: You can enter a value specifying the size of the margins in the table.

Number Format... button: Clicking on this button displays the Table Number Format dialog box, from which you can control the number style, currency symbol and placement, number of decimals displayed, negative number style, and other number options for the table.

Type Specs... button: Clicking on this button displays the Table Type Specs dialog box, from which you can set the title, row label, column label, and data text separately.

Related Topics:

Selecting Colors

Creating Tables from your Datasheet

Creating Charts


Eyedropper Dialog Box

Color Preview box: Displays the color that the eyedropper tool is currently placed over.

R, G, and B fields: Display the Red, Green, and Blue values defining the color that is displayed in the Color Preview box.

Related Topics:

Using the Eyedropper


File Preferences Dialog Box

Save Files Compressed checkbox:  Enabling this checkbox will, by default, compress files when they are saved. Compressed files will be smaller than non-compressed files, but will take a bit longer to load. Compressed files cannot be opened in Astound version 1.0 for the Macintosh.

Backup Before Save checkbox:  Enabling this checkbox will cause Astound to create a backup copy of the existing saved file before it saves any changes to it. This file will be saved with the extension .bak.

Automatic Timed Backup checkbox:  Enabling this checkbox will cause Astound to automatically save your presentation at a specified interval. In the edit field below the checkbox you can specify how often presentations are automatically saved.

Preview Options: You can specify that a color, black and white, or no preview be saved with your file. You can also specify whether this preview is of the slide that is displayed when the presentation is saved, or of all slides in the presentation. This preview will be displayed in the Open Presentation dialog box.

Related Topics:

File Preferences

Display Preferences


Find and Replace Text Dialog Box

The options in this dialog box allow you to search for and replace selected text.

Find What combo box: You can enter the text string you want to replace, or select one of the previously entered strings from the drop-down list.

Replace With combo box: You can enter the text string you wish to use to replace the search text, or select one of the previously entered strings from the drop-down list.

Selected Objects radio button: Enabling this option causes Astound to search for the specified text string in the objects you have selected on the current slide. You can search a selection of text, text blocks, or buttons.

Current Slide radio button: Enabling this option causes Astound to search the current slide for the specified text string.

All Slides radio button: Enabling this option causes Astound to search the entire presentation for the specified text string.

Case Sensitive checkbox: Enabling this option causes Astound to search for the exact text string - including the case of the characters (upper or lower) - that is specified in the Find What box. If this option is disabled, Astound will search for the text regardless of case.

Maintain Case checkbox: Enabling this option causes Astound to maintain the case of the search text when inserting the replace text. For example, if you were replacing the word "balloon" and it was located in the selection with an upper case "B", the first letter of the replacement word would be upper case as well, even if you didn't enter it that way.

Confirm Replacement checkbox: Enabling this option displays the Confirm Replacement dialog box each time the search text is located during the replacement operation.

Forward: Enabling this radio button causes Astound to search forward from the cursor location to the end of the object, slide, or presentation.

Reverse: Enabling this radio button causes Astound to search backward from the cursor point to the beginning of the object, slide, or presentation.

All: Enabling this radio button causes Astound to search all your text in the specified area.

Replace button: Clicking on this button causes Astound to replace the first occurrence of the search text and then stop, or to notify you at the first occurrence of the search text if the Confirm Replacement checkbox is enabled.

Replace All button: Enabling this option causes Astound to replace all occurrences of the search text, or to display the Confirm Replacement dialog box at each occurrence of the search text.

Related Topics:

Finding and Replacing Text


Find Text Dialog Box

Find What combo box: You can enter the text string you want to search for, or select one of the previously entered strings from the drop-down list.

Selected Objects radio button: Enabling this option causes Astound to search for the specified text string in the objects you have selected on the current slide. You can search a selection of text, text blocks, or buttons.

Current Slide radio button: Enabling this option causes Astound to search the current slide for the specified text string.

All Slides radio button: Enabling this option causes Astound to search the entire presentation for the specified text string.

Case Sensitive checkbox: Enabling this option causes Astound to search for the exact text string - including the case of the characters (upper or lower) - that is specified in the Find What box. If this option is disabled, Astound will search for the text regardless of case.

Forward: Enabling this radio button causes Astound to search forward from the cursor location to the end of the object, slide, or presentation.

Reverse: Enabling this radio button causes Astound to search backward from the cursor point to the beginning of the object, slide, or presentation.

All: Enabling this radio button causes Astound to search all your text in the specified area.

Related Topics:

Finding Text

Finding Occurrences of Selected Text


Format Text Levels Dialog Box

Select Level to Define options: You can choose which format level you want to specify options for, or you can choose to specify options for all levels.

Type Font options: When the Font checkbox is enabled in the Type Specs box, you can choose a font for the format level(s) from the drop-down list of available fonts.

Type Size options: When the Size checkbox is enabled in the Type Specs box, you can specify a text point size for the format level(s) by entering a value or selecting one from the drop-down list.

Alignment options: When the Alignment checkbox is enabled, you can choose the justification option for the format level(s) from the drop-down list. You can make the text Left, Right, Center, or fully Justified.

Styles options:	You can select a text style for the format level(s) by enabling one of the checkboxes in the Styles box. You can choose Bold, Underline, Italic, or Strikeout text.

Bullet Font options: When the Font checkbox is enabled in the Bullets box, you can choose a font for the bullets in the format level(s) from the drop-down list of available fonts. This allows you to use a bullet that may not be available in the text font.

Bullet Size options: When the Size checkbox is enabled in the Bullets box, you can choose a point size for the bullets in the format level(s) by entering a value or selecting one from the drop-down list.

Bullet Color options: When the Color checkbox is enabled in the Bullets box, you can click on the button to display a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color for the bullets in the format level(s).

Bullet Mark options: When the Bullet Mark checkbox is enabled, you can choose a character to be used as a bullet in the format level(s). You can enter the character in the edit box, or select one from the drop-down list of characters available in the specified font.

Paragraph Spacing options: When the checkbox is enabled, you can specify the spacing between paragraphs by entering a new number in the edit box. Paragraph spacing is measured as a percentage of the point size you have selected for your font.

Character Spacing options: When the checkbox is enabled, you can specify the space between characters by entering a new number in the edit box. 100% is the normal character space. Numbers above 100 increase the spacing, and numbers below 100 decrease the spacing.

Line Spacing options:	When this checkbox is enabled, you can choose the space between lines by entering a new number in the edit box. Line spacing is measured as a percentage of the point size you have selected for your font.

Text Color options: When the Color checkbox is enabled, you can click on the button to display a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color for the text in the format level(s).

Show Slide Background Color checkbox: Enabling this option causes the slide's background color to be displayed in the background of the Preview box. This allows you to compare the slide color with the selected text color before you apply it.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the text, reflecting the currently specified options.

Related Topics:

Format Levels

Changing Format Levels


Go To Cell Dialog Box

Go To Cell edit box: You can enter the row and column of the cell you want to view. When you click on the OK button, that cell will appear in the top left corner of the Astound Datasheet window.


Gradient Dialog Box

Start Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color on which the gradient will be based. The selected color will then be displayed on the face of the button.

Multi-Color... button: Clicking on this button displays the Multi-Color Gradient dialog box, in which you can construct multi-color gradients.

End Color band: Displays a range of the selected gradient color, from its darkest to its lightest shades, from which you can select the end color of the gradient.

Direction buttons: You can select a blend direction for the gradient by clicking on one of these buttons. The preview buttons in the Type box will change to reflect the selected direction option.

Type options: You can select a blend type for the gradient by clicking on one of the preview buttons. You can choose gradients that are blended: from start color to end color, from end color to start color, from end color to start color and back to end color, or from start color to end color and back to start color.

Related Topics:

Creating and Editing a Gradient Fill

Creating Multi-color Gradients


Gradient Background Dialog Box

Start Color button: Clicking on this button displays the default or start color. Clicking on the button will display a color scheme pop-up so you can choose the start color for your gradient.

Multi-Color... button: Clicking on this button displays the Multi-Color Gradient dialog box where you can choose any intermediate colors to be used in the gradient.

End Color band: Displays the shade that will appear in the gradient. You can click anywhere on the band to specify the end color of the gradient.

Direction buttons: You can choose the gradient direction by clicking on one of these buttons. The gradient can be vertical, horizontal, diagonal in either direction, burst from the center, or burst from a corner.

Type options: You can select the gradient flow type by clicking on one of the buttons. The gradient can flow from: the start color to the end color, the end color to the start color, the end color to the start color and back to the end color again, or from the start color to the end color and then back to the start color again.

Burst From Selected Object checkbox: Enabling this checkbox will make your gradient blend out from the object(s)selected on your slide when you started to create the gradient background.

Related Topics:

Creating Gradient Backgrounds


Import Text File Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the text file you want to import, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select the text file you want to import.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display text (.txt), Rich Text Format (.rtf), or all (*.*) files .

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the text file you want to import is located.

Related Topics:

Adding Text to a Text Block


Insert OLE Object Dialog Box

Object Type list box: Displays a list of OLE object types that can be embedded in your document. The object types will be listed as applications that are currently registered on your system as OLE server applications.

Related Topics:

Embedding Objects in Astound

Embedding Objects with the Insert OLE Object Command


Insert Sound Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the sound file you want to insert, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box, that are located inthe current directory. From this list, you can select the sound file you want to insert.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the sound file you want to insert is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display Wave (.wav) or all (*.*) files .

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the sound file you want to insert is located.

Play button: Clicking on this button causes the currently selected sound to play.

Related Topics:

Inserting Sound Files


Insert Time Dialog Box

Insert edit box: You can specify the number of seconds you want to add to the selected timeline(s), at the location displayed in the Insert At edit box.

Insert At edit box: You can specify the location in the selected timeline(s) at which you want to add the number of seconds specified in the Insert edit box.

Related Topics:

Timelines

Inserting Time in a Slide


Line Spacing Dialog Box

Enter Spacing edit box: You can enter a value for the line spacing you want, in percentage of normal spacing (100%).

Related Topics:

Changing Attributes for Selected Text


Line Weight Dialog Box

Set Line Weight edit box: You can set the line thickness by entering a value, in points.

Related Topics:

Line Weights


Links Dialog Box

Links list box: Displays a list of all OLE objects in the presentation that are currently linked to server documents. You can select the object(s), for which you want to edit the links, from the list.

Done button: Clicking on this button closes the dialog box. Changes made to objects' links will still be in effect.

Automatic radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected link(s) are updated automatically, whenever the object is edited.

Manual radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the link(s) of the selected object(s) are updated only when you open the dialog box and update them yourself.

Update Now button: Clicking on this button causes the selected link(s) to be updated.

Cancel Link button: Clicking on this button causes the selected link(s) to be canceled. The object(s) with the canceled link(s) are pasted into the presentation.

Change Link... button: Clicking on this button displays the Change Link dialog box, from which you can choose the server document to which you want to link the object.

Activate button: Clicking on this buttonw will activate the main command associated with the linked object. For most objects, this will open the Server application so that you can edit the object. For animations and sounds, the Activate button will play the object.

Related Topics:

Linking Objects

Updating Linked Objects

Breaking a Link

Deleting a Link

Fixing a Broken Link


Datasheet Links Dialog Box

Links list box: Displays a list of all OLE objects in the presentation that are currently linked to server documents. You can select the object(s), for which you want to edit the links, from the list.

Done button: Clicking on this button closes the dialog box. Changes made to objects' links will still be in effect.

Automatic radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected link(s) are updated automatically, whenever the object is edited.

Manual radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the link(s) of the selected object(s) are updated only when you open the dialog box and update them yourself.

Update Now button: Clicking on this button causes the selected link(s) to be updated.

Cancel Link button: Clicking on this button causes the selected link(s) to be canceled. The object(s) with the canceled link(s) are pasted into the presentation.

Change Link... button: Clicking on this button displays the Change Link dialog box, from which you can choose the server document to which you want to link the object.

Activate button: Clicking on this button will open the Server application so that you can edit the datasheet.

Related Topics:

Linking Objects

Updating Linked Objects

Breaking a Link

Deleting a Link

Fixing a Broken Link


Load Chart Format Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the chart format you want to load into memory, or you can select a name from the drop-down list of currently loaded formats.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box, that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the chart format you want to load.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display either chart format (.asg) or all (*.*) files .

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the chart format you want to load is located.

Related Topics:

Loading Chart Formats


Load User Dictionary Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the dictionary file you want to load into memory, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box. From this list, you can select the dictionary file you want to load.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display either pictograph (.gpc) or all (*.*) files .

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the dictionary file you want to load is located.

Related Topics:

Loading User Dictionaries


Mix Dialog Box

Current Gain slider: You can specify the amount of gain by which the selected region will be increased or decreased before mixing by dragging the handle to the left or right. Clicking in the slide bar will cause the handle to move to the current location of the cursor.

Decibels field: Displays the currently specified amount of gain, in decibels.

Less and More Gain buttons: Clicking on these buttons decreases or increases the specified amount of gain for the region. The slider will move to reflect the gain setting.

Related Topics:

Mixing Sound


MultiColor Gradient Dialog Box
Multi-Color Gradient Dialog Box

Colors box: Displays the colors in the current color scheme for use in your gradient, as well as buttons that allow you access to the eyedropper, color mixer, and color spectrum.

Eyedropper button: Clicking on this button displays the Eyedropper dialog box, and changes the cursor to an eyedropper, which you can use to select any color currently displayed on your screen for use in your gradient.

Color Mixer button: Clicking on this button displays the Color Mixer dialog box, from which you can create a color to use in your gradient.

Color Spectrum button: Clicking on this button displays the Color Spectrum dialog box, from which you can choose a color to use in your gradient.

Dither Colors checkbox: Enabling this checkbox blends adjacent colors in the specified gradient, blurring the boundary lines between adjacent colors. When this option is disabled, colors in the gradient will tend to appear in distinct bands.

Use Intermediate Colors checkbox: Enabling this checkbox adds extra colors between the colors you select for the gradient, resulting in smoother transitions between colors. When this option is disabled, you may see stark transitions between adjacent colors that are dissimilar.

Selected Colors box: Displays the colors that are chosen for the gradient. You can select one or more colors in this box for removal or replacement.

Clear Color button: Clicking on this button clears the color(s) currently selected in the Selected Colors box from the gradient background.

Clear All button: Clicking on this button clears all colors from the gradient you are creating.

Flip button: Clicking on this button inverts the order of colors in the gradient that you are creating. The change will be reflected in the Selected Colors and Preview boxes.

Last drop-down list box: Displays the current gradient. You can open any of the gradients you have already created from the drop-down list.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the current gradient.

Related Topics:

Gradient Background Dialog Box

Creating Multi-Color Backgrounds

Adding a Solid Color Background

Adding A Patterned Background

Using a Picture as a Background

Removing Backgrounds


Name Pictograph Dialog Box

When you choose the Chart/Define Pictograph command, this dialog box appears. It allows you to enter a name for the object you are defining as a pictograph.

Enter Name for New Pictograph edit box: You can enter a name for the object you are defining as a pictograph.

Related Topics:

Defining a Pictograph Object


Number of Points Dialog Box

When you double-click on the Star drawing tool, this dialog box appears. It allows you to specify how many points will be on the stars that you draw.

Number of Points edit box: You can enter the number of points that you want your star to have when you draw them.

Related Topics:

Setting Sides and Points on Regular Polygons and Stars


Number of Sides Dialog Box

When you double-click on the Regular Polygon drawing tool, this dialog box appears. It allows you to specify the number of sides that your polygons will have when you draw them.

Number of Sides edit box: You can enter the number of sides that you want your polygons to have when you draw them.

Related Topics:

Setting Sides and Points on Regular Polygons and Stars


Object Display Dialog Box

This dialog box contains options that allow you to change the interior, border, and shadow attributes of one or more selected objects.

Interior radio button: Enabling this option causes the dialog box to display options that control the display and appearance of the interior of the selected object(s).

Border radio button: Enabling this option causes the dialog box to display options that control the display and appearance of the border of the selected object(s).

Shadow radio button: Enabling this option causes the dialog box to display options that control the display and appearance of the shadow of the selected object(s).

Pattern button: Clicking on this button displays a Pattern pop-up palette, from which you can select a pattern for the interior of the selected object(s).

Foreground Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a foreground color for the selected object(s).

Background Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a background color for the selected object(s).

Invert button: Clicking on this button switches the foreground and background colors. The change is reflected in the Preview box.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the currently selected pattern and colors.

Accept Changes button: Clicking on this button assigns to the selected object(s) only those attributes that have been changed since the dialog box was opened. Use this button if you want to change only a single attribute when you have selected multiple objects.

Accept All button: Clicking on this button assigns all of the currently displayed attributes to the selected object(s). If you have multiple objects selected, the attributes of the first object selected will be displayed in this dialog box. Clicking on this button will assign all of this object's attributes to all of the selected objects.

Related Topics:

Interior Attributes

Border Attributes

Shadow Attributes


Border Attributes

When the Border radio button is selected, the Object Display dialog box will change to include the object border options, which you can use to control the display and size of object borders.

Show Border checkbox: Enabling this option causes the border of the selected object(s) to be displayed. When this option is disabled, the object borders will not display.

Border Size radio buttons: You can select a thickness for the object borders by enabling any of the radio buttons in the Border Size box. You can choose 1 Point, 2 Point, 4 Point, or 8 Point. Your choice will be reflected in the Preview box.

Other radio button: Enabling this option uses the values displayed in the Width and Height fields to specify the object's border thickness.

Width and Height edit boxes: When the Other radio button is enabled, the values displayed in these edit boxes will be used to specify the border size of the selected object(s). You can enter a custom width and height, which will be reflected in the Preview box.

Border Size preview box: Displays a preview of the currently specified border size. You can click in this preview box, or drag out the border preview, to specify a border size. When you click or drag to specify border size, your choice is reflected in the radio buttons and fields of the Border Size box.

Related Topics:

Borders

Border Size

Border Color


Interior Attributes

When the Interior radio button is selected, the Object Display dialog box will change to include the object interior options, which you can use to control the color and pattern of object interiors.

Show Interior checkbox: Enabling this option causes the colors and pattern used to fill the interior of the selected object(s) to be displayed. When this option is disabled, the interior(s) of the selected object(s) will not display.

Gradient button: Clicking on this button displays a Gradient pop-up menu, from which you can select or create a gradient to apply to the interior(s) of the selected object(s).

Related Topics:

Solid Colors

Patterns


Shadow Attributes

When the Shadow radio button is selected, the Object Display dialog box will change to include the object shadow options, which you can use to control the display and placement of object shadows.

Show Shadow checkbox: Enabling this option causes the shadow of the selected object(s) to be displayed. When this option is disabled, the object shadows will not display.

Horizontal edit box: Displays the horizontal offset of the shadow. You can enter a value to specify the location of the shadow relative to the object in the horizontal direction. The specified value will be reflected in the preview box.

Vertical edit box: Displays the vertical offset of the shadow. You can enter a value to specify the location of the shadow relative to the object in the vertical direction. The specified value will be reflected in the preview box.

Shadow Offset preview box: Displays a preview of the shadow with the currently specified offset values. You can click in the preview box, or drag the shadow symbol to specify shadow location. Shadow placement in the preview box will be reflected in the Horizontal and Vertical edit boxes.

Related Topics:

Shadows

Specifying Shadow Offsets


Object Information Dialog Box

Type field: Displays the type of object selected.

Embedded field: Indicates whether the selected object is an embedded OLE object or not.

Associated File field: If the selected object is a linked OLE object, displays the path and name of the file to which it is linked.

Origin field: Indicates the source of the selected object.

Usage field: Indicates the number of times the object is used in the current presentation.

On Slides drop-down list box: The drop-down list contains the names of the slides on which the object is used.

Mouse field: If the object has interactivity, displays the mouse click designated as the interactive trigger.

Key field: If the object has interactivity, displays the keystroke designated as the interactive trigger.

Action field: If the object has interactivity, displays the interactive action response that is defined for the object.

Flow field: If the object has interactivity, displays the interactive flow control response that is defined for the object.

Show Interior field: Indicates whether the object's interior display is enabled or disabled.

Show Border field: Indicates whether the object's border display is enabled or disabled.

Show Shadow field: Indicates whether the object's shadow display is enabled or disabled.

Actual Position field: Indicates the horizontal and vertical location of the object on the page. The position is given in the currently selected units away from the top left corner of the slide.

Actual Size field: Displays the height and width of the object.

Total field: Displays the object's display duration as specified on its timeline.

Transition In field: Displays the name of any entry transition assigned to the object, as well as the length of the transition, in seconds and percentage of total display time.

Idle field: Displays the amount of static time that the object sits idle on the screen, as specified in its timeline.

Transition Out field: Displays the name of any exit transition assigned to the object, as well as the length of the transition, in seconds and percentage of total display time.


Object Interaction Dialog Box

Trigger drop-down list box: Displays the user action that triggers the interactive response. You can select an interactive trigger from the drop-down list. Options are single or double left or right mouse clicks.

Keystroke edit box: Displays the keystroke that triggers the interactive response. If you enter a keystroke in this field, it will be used as the interactivity trigger. If you do not, the edit box will display "None", and the trigger in the drop-down list box will be used.

Finish Slide Before Doing Action checkbox: Selecting this checkbox will cause the slide - including any sound, video, and animation placed on it - to play through its timeline before any interactive responses are initiated, but you can click on the object any time after its entry transition is finished. If you do not enable this option, the response will occur as soon as the trigger is detected during the interactive object's static time.

User Clicks on Interactive Object radio button: Enabling this option causes the slide's playback to pause at the point on the timeline where the object is fully displayed and finished any entry transition, until the user clicks the mouse button on an interactive object, or strikes the specified key.

Any Input Occurs radio button: Enabling this option causes the slide's playback to pause at the point on the timeline where the object is fully displayed and finished any entry transition, until the user clicks the mouse button or presses the specified keystrokes.

Do Not Pause Slide radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the slide does not pause its playback.

Action drop-down list box: Displays the selected interactive action response. This type of response involves the playback or display of specific objects, sounds, actors, videos, or animated movies. When you select an interactive action from the drop-down list, the Setup area will contain options to specify what object to use, a preview box or button, and the option of having the object displayed on the slide or hidden until it is triggered.

Flow Control drop-down list box: Displays the selected interactive flow control response. This type of response involves directing the order of slide playback in the presentation. You can go to a specific slide, the next slide, previous slide, first slide, last slide step back one slide, or play a range of slides.	You can also restart the current slide or stop the slideshow playback. When you select an interactive flow control from the drop-down list, the Setup area may contain options to specify pages or page ranges.

There is a difference between Step Back One Slide and Go to Previous Slide. Step Back One Slide causes the last slide that played, immediately before the current slide, to be played again. Go to Previous Slide causes the previous slide in the normal order of the presentation to play. For example, suppose you create a presentation that is twelve slides long. On the third slide, the user clicks on an interactive object that takes him to the ninth slide. The ninth slide plays, and the user then clicks on an interactive object that specifies Go to Previous Slide. The next slide to play will be the eighth slide. If the interactive object on the ninth slide had specified Step Back One Slide, the next slide to play would have been the third slide.

Setup area: This area contains options for the selected interactive response.

No Interaction button: Clicking on this button removes all interactive responses from the selected object(s).

Related Topics:

Interactivity

Removing Interactivity

Redirecting Playback Order


Object Path Animation Dialog Box

This dialog box contains options that allow you to place entry and exit path animations for the selected object(s), as well as specifying timelines for these options.

Entry Path checkbox: Enabling this option displays an entry path icon and an image of the entry path routing to appear in the Preview box. This represents the entry path animation that will be applied to the selected object.

Exit Path checkbox: Enabling this option displays an exit path icon and an image of the exit path routing to appear in the Preview box. This represents the exit path animation that will be applied to the selected object.

Show Slide checkbox: Enabling this option causes all objects on the slide, including the slide background, to be displayed in the Preview box. If this option is disabled, only the object for which you are setting a path animation will be displayed.

On checkbox: Enabling this option causes the timeline settings specified in the timeline box to be applied to the selected object's path animation.

Timeline: You can use the timeline to specify entry and exit path animation times, as well as the object's static time between these events.

Seconds/Percentage button: Clicking on this button toggles the scale displayed on the timeline between seconds and percentage. The face of the button changes to display the scale option not currently selected.

Preview box: Displays the selected object and, depending on the options you have selected, the contents of the slide on which the object is located, an entry path icon and routing line, and an exit path icon and routing line. You can adjust the object's position on the slide and the entry and exit path routings by dragging the object and the entry and exit path icons to the desired locations.

Related Topics:

Timelines

Object Paths


Object Transition Dialog Box

Entry radio button: Enabling this option enables the Entry list box, from which you can select a transition for the selected object's entry.

Entry transition list: Displays a list of available entry transitions. You can select an entry transition by clicking on its name in the list. Any options associated with the selected transition will appear in the Transition Options box.

Exit radio button: Enabling this option enables the Exit list box, from which you can select a transition for the selected object's exit.

Exit transition list: Displays a list of available exit transitions. You can select an exit transition by clicking on its name in the list. Any options associated with the selected transition will appear in the Transition Options box.

On checkbox: Enabling this option causes the timeline settings specified in the timeline box to be applied to the selected object's entry and/or exit transition(s).

Timeline: You can specify entry and exit times for the transitions you select for the object. If you have selected the Preview option, a marker below the timeline will move along the specified entry/exit portions of the timeline as the preview animates, indicating the progress of the transition as it plays.

Seconds/Percentage button: Clicking on this button toggles the scale displayed on the timeline between seconds and percentage. The face of the button changes to display the scale option not currently selected.

Transition Options box: Displays the transition options associated with the selected transition. You can use these options to further define the transition you have selected. The options can include: list boxes, direction button palettes, slide controls, and other items.

Preview checkbox: Enabling this option displays an animated preview of the object in the Preview box, as well as a progress marker below the timeline. The preview reflects the selected transition(s) and specified timeline, and the animation is continuous, following the progress of the marker through the entry and/or exit transition times.

Preview box: When the Preview option is enabled, displays an animated preview of the object which reflects the selected transition(s) and specified entry/exit times.

Apply Independently to Grouped Objects checkbox: If you are selecting transitions for grouped objects, enabling this option causes the transitions to be applied to each object in the group individually. If this option is disabled, the grouped objects will be considered as a single object, and the transitions will be applied to the group as a whole.

Entry checkbox: Enabling this option causes the selected entry transition and options to be applied to the selected object(s).

Exit checkbox: Enabling this option causes the selected exit transition and options to be applied to the selected object(s).

Related Topics:

Object Transitions

Adding Transitions to Objects Within a Group

Changing Transition Attributes for Multiple Objects


Open Actor Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the actor file you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the actor file you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the actor file you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display either actor or all files .

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the actor file you want to open is located.

Preview button: Clicking on this button causes a single-frame preview of the actor in the selected file to be created and displayed in the Preview box.

Preview box: Displays a single-frame preview of the actor in the selected file when you click on the Preview button.

Related Topics:

Loading Actors

Importing Actors


Open Datasheet Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can enter the name of the datasheet file that you want to open, or you can select it from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently selected drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the datasheet file that you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the subdirectories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the datasheet file you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. From the drop-down list, you can select the type of datasheet files you want displayed. You can choose to display Astound Datasheet, Microsoft Excel (Ver 2,3), Lotus 1-2-3 (Ver 1,1A,2), Tab/Return Delimited (spreadsheet data saved as text files), or all files.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the file containing the datasheet file you want to use is located.

Related Topics:

Datasheet Window

Opening Datasheets and Importing Spreadsheet Data

Importing Datasheets


Open Library Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the library file which you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the library file you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the library file you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display Astound library (.asl), Astound presentation (.asd), or all (*.*) files .

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the library file you want to open is located.

Related Topics:

Opening Libraries


Open Master Slide Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the master slide which you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the master slide you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the master slide you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display bitmaps (.bmp), Astound master slides (.asm), or all files (*.*).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the master slide you want to open is located.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides


Open Object Dialog Box
Open Object

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the file containing the object you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the file containing the object which you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the file containing the object you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display Astound Objects (.aso), or all files (*.*).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the file containing the object you want to open is located.

Related Topics:

Importing Objects


Open Pictograph Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the pictograph file which you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory and the files contained therein.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the file you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the file you want to open is located.

Related Topics:

CreatingPictographs


Open Picture Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the picture file you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the picture file you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the picture file you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display bitmap, PCX, GIF, TIFF, Photo CD, CGM, PICT, TARGA, or all files (*.*).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the picture file you want to open is located.

Preview button: Clicking on this button causes a preview of the picture in the selected file to be created and displayed in the Preview box.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the picture in the selected file when you click on the Preview button.

Related Topics:

Loading Pictures


Open Presentation Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the presentation file you want to open, or you can select it from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the presentation file you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory which contains the file you want to open.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the file you want to open is located.

Preview checkbox: Selecting this option causes a preview of the selected presentation file to appear in the Preview box.

Preview box: Contains a preview of the selected presentation file when the Preview checkbox is enabled.

Related Topics:

Opening a Presentation Within Astound


Open Slide Dialog Box
Open Slide

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the slide which you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed here will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select the slide you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the slide you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display Astound Slides (.asv), or all files (*.*).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the slide you want to open is located.

Related Topics:

Importing

Importing a Slide


Open Sound Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the sound file you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the sound file you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the sound file you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display Wave (.wav), MIDI (.mid), or all (*.*) files .

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the sound file you want to open is located.

Play button: Clicking on this button causes the currently selected sound to play.

Related Topics:

Loading Sounds into Memory


Open Video Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the video file you want to open, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box that are located in the current directory. From this list, you can select the video file you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the video file you want to open is located.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display QuickTime (.mov), Gold Disk Anims (.awm, .awa, .aim, .scm), or all (*.*) files.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the video file you want to open is located.

Preview button: Clicking on this button causes a single-frame preview of the currently selected video to be displayed in the Preview box.

Preview box: Displays a single-frame preview of the selected video when you click on the Preview button.

Related Topics:

Loading Video and Animated Movies

Importing Video and Animated Movies


Page Setup Dialog Box

This dialog box contains options that allow you to define the page orientation, size, margins, and headers and footers for printing.

Format options: You can select the presentation output that you want to format for printing by enabling one of these radio buttons. You can choose to set up the slides, handouts, speaker notes, or outline.

Sizes drop-down list box: Displays the currently specified page size for printing. You can select a predefined page size from the drop-down list, or select Custom, which allows you to specify your own page size in the edit boxes.

Width and Height edit boxes: When you select the Custom option from the Sizes drop-down list, these edit boxes are enabled. You can enter the width and height of the pages at which you want the slides, handouts, speaker notes, or outline printed.

Margins edit boxes: You can specify the page margins by entering values in the edit boxes in the Margins box.

Portrait radio button: Enabling this option causes the printed pages to use a portrait orientation, which uses the longer page dimension as the page height.

Landscape radio button: Enabling this option causes the printed pages to use a landscape orientation, which uses the longer page dimension as the page width.

Print Header options: You can specify a header that will be printed with each page by enabling the checkbox and entering the text of the header in the edit box.

Print Footer options: You can specify a footer that will be printed with each page by enabling the checkbox and entering the text of the footer in the edit box.

Related Topics:

Page Setup


Paragraph Spacing Dialog Box

Enter Spacing field: You can enter the desired paragraph spacing, in percent of normal (100%).

Related Topics:

Changing Attributes for Selected Text


Paste Special Dialog Box

Source field: Displays the source and filename of the clipboard contents if the contents are a saved file and have been copied from an OLE registered server application.

Data Type list box: Displays a list of available data formats in which you can paste the clipboard contents.

Paste button: Clicking on this button causes the selected source object to be placed on the slide, and embedded in your current presentation.

Paste Link button: Clicking on this button causes the selected OLE object to be placed on the slide, and linked to its source application from your current presentation.

Related Topics:

Linking Objects


Pattern Background Dialog Box

Pattern button: Clicking on this button displays a Pattern pop-up palette, from which you can choose a pattern to use as a slide background.

Foreground Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select a pattern foreground color for use in the slide foreground.

Background Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select a pattern background color for use in the slide background.

Invert button: Clicking on this button causes the selected foreground and background colors to be switched.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the slide background, reflecting the currently selected pattern, and foreground and background colors.

Related Topics:

Adding a Patterned Background


Pause Dialog Box

Pause At edit box: You can specify the point in the slide's timeline at which you want to pause playback. The default value is where you clicked on the ruler.

Pause For options: Enabling the radio button allows you to specify the duration of the pause, in seconds, in the edit box.

Pause Indefinitely radio button: Enabling this option causes the presentation to pause, and resume only when you click on an object with interactivity. If you also have the Continue on Mouse Click checkbox enabled, the presentation will restart whenever the mouse is clicked.

Continue on Mouse Click checkbox: Enabling this option causes the presentation to resume whenever the mouse is clicked, when you have the Pause Indefinitely option enabled.

Related Topics:

Timelines

Inserting Pauses in Timelines

Moving Pauses on a Timeline

Removing Pauses


Picture Background Dialog Box

Currently Loaded drop-down list box: You can choose a picture to use as a slide background from the drop-down list of pictures that are already loaded into memory.

Open... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Picture dialog box, from which you can choose a picture file to load into memory for use as a slide background.

Replace... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Picture dialog box, from which you can choose a picture file to globally replace the currently selected picture.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the currently selected picture from memory. The picture will no longer be available in the drop-down list, and will not display if you have used it elsewhere in the same presentation.

Tile radio button: Enabling this option causes the picture to be tiled, at its original size, to fill the entire slide.

Center radio button: Enabling this option causes the picture to be centered on the slide, at its original size. If the picture is smaller than the slide, a black border will appear around the picture.

Make Fit radio button: Enabling this option causes the picture to be scaled to fit the entire slide.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the currently selected picture.

Related Topics:

Using a Picture as Your Background

Removing Backgrounds


Playback Parameters Dialog Box

Output Device drop-down list box: Displays the device through which the sound will play. You can select the device you want from the drop-down list of available devices.

Playback Rate radio buttons: You can select the playback rate of the sound, in Hz, by selecting the appropriate radio button. When you select Other, the Playback Rate slider and Less and More radio buttons will be enabled.

Playback Rate field: Displays the currently specified playback rate.

Playback Rate slider: When the Other radio button is selected, you can specify the playback rate by moving the handle to the left or right on the slide control. Clicking on the slide bar will cause the handle to move to the current location of the cursor.

Less and More rate buttons: Clicking on these buttons causes the specified playback rate to decrease or increase. The Playback Rate slider and field will change to reflect the new rate.

Volume slider: You can increase or decrease the playback volume of the sound by moving the handle to the left or right on the slide control. Clicking on the slide bar will cause the handle to move to the current location of the cursor. You must have a sound card that supports this type of volume control in order to make use of it.

Less and More volume buttons: Clicking on these buttons decreases or increases the specified playback volume of the sound. The volume slider will change position to reflect the new volume setting.

Preview/Stop button: Clicking on the Preview button causes the sound to play according to the specified parameters. When the sound is playing, the Preview button becomes the Stop button, which you can click on to end the preview playback.

Related Topics:

Setting Sound Playback Parameters


Print Dialog Box

Current Printer field: Displays the currently selected printer.

Setup... button: Clicking on this button displays the Printer Setup dialog box, from which you can select a different printer, and display dialog boxes that allow you to set other printer options.

Slides radio button: Enabling this option causes the slides specified in the Print box to be printed as slides, according to the layout selected.

Speaker Notes radio button: Enabling this option causes the speaker notes attached to the slides specified in the Print box to be printed, according to the layout selected.

Outline radio button: Enabling this option causes the outline for your presentation, including only the text on the slides specified in the Print box, to be printed. Enable the Print Visible Text Only checkbox in the Options box if you want only visible items to print. If you want all the text on the outline to show, you should disable the Print Visible Text Only checkbox.

Handouts radio button: Enabling this option causes the slides specified in the Print box to be printed as handouts, according to the layout selected. Handouts can be used by your audience as a record of the presentation on which they can make notes.

Page Setup... button: Clicking on this button displays the Page Setup dialog box, in which you can set the page size, page orientation, margins, and headers/footers.

All Slides radio button: Enabling this option causes all of the slides in the presentation to be included in the printed output, as specified in the Format box.

Current/Selected Slide radio button: Enabling this option causes only the current or selected slide(s) in the presentation to be included in the printed output, as specified in the Format box.

Changed Since Last Print radio button:  Enabling this option causes only the slides in the presentation that have been changed since the last time they were printed to be included in the printed output, as specified in the Format box.

Range options:  Enabling the radio button causes the range of slides specified in the From and To edit boxes to be included in the printed output, as specified in the Format box.

Page Layout buttons: You can select the number of slides, speaker note pages, or miniatures for handouts that are printed per page. You can select from one to six items per page, which will be arranged according to the symbols on the buttons.

Reverse Slide Order checkbox: Enabling this option causes the order of the slides included in the printed output to be reversed.

Omit Backgrounds checkbox: Enabling this option causes the backgrounds to be excluded from the slides in the printed output.

Omit Gradients checkbox: If you select this option, Astound will not print any gradients in your presentation. Gradients take longer to print and may not print satisfactorily with some objects on certain printers.

Print Visible Text Only checkbox: Enabling this option causes only visible text in collapsed text outlines to be included in the printed output. If this option is disabled, all of the text in the outline will be printed whether it is visible or not. This option is only available when you are in the Outliner when you open the Print dialog box..

Print To File checkbox: Enabling this option specifies the creation of a file that can be printed at a later date, or sent to an output service to be printed on slides, in color etc.

Print Text As Options: These control the color of text in your printed presentation.

Actual: Astound attempts to print text in its actual color. Choose this setting for true output on color printers. Many black-and-white printers, including PostScript and HP LaserJet models, will also print a black-and-white representation of the color. If text disappears on your black-and-white printer, use one of the other settings instead.

Black:  All text will print in black. If the text appears on a very dark background, it may not be visible in the output.

White: All text will print in white. If the text appears on a very light background or no background, it may not be visible.

Related Topics:

Printing

Printing 35mm Slides

Handouts and Thumbnails


Printer Setup Dialog Box

Select Printer list box: Displays a list of available printers, from which you can select the one you want to print to.

Setup... button: Clicking on this button displays the Windows Printer Setup dialog box, from which you can control your system's printing options.

Related Topics:

Setting Up a Printer

Printing


Purge Unused Resources Dialog Box

Sounds checkbox: Enabling this option causes all sounds that are loaded into memory but not in use in the current presentation to be removed.

Pictures checkbox: Enabling this option causes all pictures that are loaded into memory but not in use in the current presentation to be removed.

Actors checkbox: Enabling this option causes all actors that are loaded into memory but not in use in the current presentation to be removed.

Video checkbox: Enabling this option causes all video that is loaded into memory but not in use in the current presentation to be removed.

Datasheets checkbox: Enabling this option causes all datasheets that are loaded into memory but not in use in the current presentation to be removed.

Master Slides checkbox: Enabling this option causes all master slides that are loaded into memory but not in use in the current presentation to be removed.

Purge button: Clicking on this button causes the selected resources to be purged from system memory.

Related Topics:

Purging Unused Resources


Record Sound Dialog Box

Input Device drop-down list box: Displays the device that is currently designated as the recording device. You can select any device that is available from the drop-down list. Only recording devices that have been properly installed on your system will be available.

Sample Rate radio buttons: You can select the sample rate at which the recording will be made by enabling one of these radio buttons.

Channels radio buttons: You can select the number of channels on which the recording will be made by enabling one of these radio buttons.

Resolution radio buttons: You can select the sample resolution at which the recording will be made by enabling one of these radio buttons.

Record button: Clicking on this button causes the recording process to begin. The time displayed in the Recorded field will begin increasing, and the Pause and End buttons will be enabled.

Pause/Resume button: When you are recording, clicking on the Pause button halts the recording temporarily. The button then becomes the Resume button, which you can click on to continue recording.

End button: When you are recording, clicking on this button ends the recording.

Recorded field: Displays the elapsed time of the current recording.

Estimated Max field: Displays an estimated maximum length for the current recording, based on the amount of memory available.

Related Topics:

Recording Sound in the Sound Editor


Remove Marker Dialog Box

Select Marker list box: Displays a list of markers that are defined in the current sound.

Start Time field: Displays the start time of the selected marked region.

End Time field: Displays the end time of the selected marked region.

Remove button: Clicking on this button causes the selected marker(s) to be removed from the regions in the sound, and from the list of currently defined markers.

Related Topics:

Removing Markers from Sounds

Toggling the Display of Sound Markers


Remove Overrides Dialog Box

The options in this dialog box allow you to remove text attributes which you have applied to selected text on top of its format level attributes.

Misc options: You can choose to remove the font, size, and/or color attributes that you have applied to the selected text by enabling the appropriate checkboxes. The text will assume the attributes that are defined for its format level.

Styles options: You can choose to remove the bolding, italicizing, underlining, and overstriking attributes that you have applied to the selected text by enabling the appropriate checkboxes. The text will assume the attributes that are defined for its format level.

Spacing options: You can choose to remove the character, line, or paragraph spacing that you have applied to the selected text by enabling the appropriate checkboxes. The text will assume the attributes that are defined for its format level.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes only the specified override attributes from the selected text.

Remove All button: Clicking on this button removes all override attributes from the selected text.

Related Topics:

Changing Attributes for Selected Text

Removing Text Formatting that is not Part of a Format Level


Remove Time Dialog Box

Remove edit box: You can enter the number of seconds that you want to remove from the slide's timeline, at the location displayed in the Remove At edit box..

Remove At edit box: You can specify the point in the slide's timeline at which you want to remove the number of seconds indicated in the Remove edit box.

Related Topics:

Timelines

Removing Time from a Slide


Rename Sound Dialog Box

Enter Sound Name edit box: You can type in the desired name for the sound.

Related Topics:

Renaming a Sound


Resample Dialog Box

New Sample Rate radio buttons: You can specify a new sample rate for the sound by enabling the appropriate radio button. When you select Other, the Sample Rate slider and Less and More radio buttons will be enabled.

New Rate field: Displays the currently specified sample rate.

Sample Rate slider: When the Other radio button is selected, you can specify the sample rate by moving the handle to the left or right on the slide control. Clicking on the slide bar will cause the handle to move to the current location of the cursor.

Less and More buttons: Clicking on these buttons causes the specified sample rate to decrease or increase. The Sample Rate slider and New Rate field will change to reflect the new rate.

Related Topics:

Changing the Sample Rate of a Sound File


Resize Object Dialog Box

Current Size fields: Display the width and height of the selected object.

Best Size radio button: Clicking on this button causes the object to be resized to the width and height displayed in the Best Size fields.

Best Size fields: Display the width and height of the selected object at which it was saved.

Units radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected object be resized according to the absolute width and height values displayed in the Units edit boxes.

Units edit boxes: You can specify the absolute size to which you want the selected object scaled, in the units that are currently selected.

Percentage radio button: Enabling this option specifies that the selected object be resized according to the relative width and height values displayed in the Percentage edit boxes.

Percentage edit boxes: You can specify the relative size to which you want the selected object scaled, in percentage of its current size.

Maintain Aspect Ratio checkbox: Enabling this option causes the object's aspect ratio to be preserved when it is resized. The percentage and unit values you enter will be constrained to values that specify the same aspect ratio.

Related Topics:

Resizing and Reshaping Objects

Resizing Objects with the Menu


Row and Columns Dialog Box
Row and Column Layout Dialog Box

1st Row Contains options: You can specify what the first row in your datasheet will contain. You can select an option by clicking on the appropriate radio button. The first row This box contains options to specify that the first row in your datasheet contains either labels for the chart or data values.

1st Column Contains options: You can specify what the first column in your datasheet will contain. This box contains options to specify that the first column in your datasheet contains either labels for the chart or data values.

Related Topics:

Charting Options


Row Height Dialog Box

Row Height edit box: You can enter a custom row height. When you click on the OK button, the selected row(s) will be adjusted to reflect the specified height.

Default Height checkbox: Enabling this option locks the default row height into the Row Height edit box.

Related Topics:

Datasheet Window


Save Color Scheme Dialog Box

Color Scheme Name edit box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the color scheme.

Related Topics:

Editing Color Schemes


Save Library As Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the library, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed here, will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the library you want to save.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the library.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display library files (.asl).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the library.

Related Topics:

Saving Libraries

Opening Libraries

Creating Libraries


Save Datasheet Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the datasheet, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed here, will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the datasheet you want to save.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the datasheet.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the datasheet.

Related Topics:

Datasheets


Save Chart Format Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the chart format, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed here, will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the chart format you want to save.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the chart format.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display chart format files (.asl).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the chart format.

Related Topics:

Chart Formats


Save Object As Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the selected object(s), or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed here, will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the file in which you want to save the selected object(s).

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the selected object(s).

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display bitmaps (.bmp) or Astound objects (.aso).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the selected template.

Save As Version 1.0 checkbox: Enabling this checkbox will save the file so that it can be read by Astound version 1.0 on the Macintosh. You will need to use a file exchange program like Apple File Exchange to open the file on the Macintosh computer. For more information on saving a file to be opened on a Macintosh, see the Readme.txt file included with Astound.

Make Self-Contained checkbox: Enabling this checkbox will cause your file to include all the resource files that are used in your presentation. Resources are external files like sounds, actors, video, and pictures that are used in your presentation.

Related Topics:

Exporting Selected Objects

Exporting

Importing


Save Pictograph Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the selected pictograph, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed here, will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the file in which you want to save the selected pictograph.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the selected pictograph.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display pictograph (.gpc) or all (*.*) files.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the selected pictograph.

Related Topics:

Saving Pictograph Objects


Save Presentation As Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the current presentation.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory.

Files list box: Displays files in the currently specified drive and directory. From this list, you can select a filename under which you want to save your presentation.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the current drive, and the sub-directories in the current directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which you want to save the current presentation.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which you want to save the presentation.

Save As Version 1.0 Presentation checkbox: Enabling this option causes the presentation to be saved in a format which will play back on Astound version 1.0 for the Apple Macintosh.

Make Self-Contained Presentation checkbox: Enabling this option causes the presentation to be saved as a single presentation file which includes all resources, such as sounds, pictures, actors, and videos.

Make Self-Running Presentation checkbox: Enabling this option causes the presentation to be saved with the Windows Player, which allows the presentation to run on its own through Windows. When this option is enabled, the Select Icon button will also be enabled.

Select Icon button: This button will be disabled until you enabled the Make Self-Running Presentation checkbox. Clicking on this button displays the Select Icon dialog box, from which you can select an icon to include with your self-running presentation file.

Segment For Multiple Disks/Files options: Enabling this checkbox makes the segment size radio buttons active. You can choose one of them to save your presentation in chunks. You can choose to Fill Disks, which will save the file until the specified disk is full, then prompt for another; to save in chunks that will fill 3 1/2" diskettes; to save in chunks that will fill 5 1/4" diskettes; or to save in chunks that are some Other size, which you can specify in the Size edit box.

Related Topics:

Saving


Save Slide As Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the selected slide, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed here will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the slide you want to save.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the selected slide.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display bitmaps (.bmp) or Astound slides (.asv).

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the selected slide.

Save As Version 1.0 checkbox: Enabling this option causes the slide to be saved in a format that can be used in Astound version 1.0 for the Apple Macintosh.

Make Self-Contained checkbox: Enabling this option causes the slide to be saved in a single file that includes any resources place on the slide, such as sounds, actors, pictures, and video.

Related Topics:

Exporting

Exporting Slides


Save Sound As Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the file in which you want to save the displayed sound, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed here will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the file in which you want to save the displayed sound.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the displayed sound.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display Wave (.wav) or all (*.*) files.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the displayed sound.

Related Topics:

Opening and Saving Sound Files

Saving Sounds in the Sound Editor


Save Template As Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name under which you want to save the selected template, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files in the location displayed here will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the template you want to save.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the selected template.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the selected template.

Save As Version 1.0 checkbox: Enabling this option causes the template to be saved in a format that can be used in Astound version 1.0 for the Apple Macintosh.

Make Self-Contained checkbox: Enabling this option causes the template to be saved in a single file that includes any resources used in it, such as sounds, actors, pictures, and video.

Related Topics:

Creating Templates

Using Templates


Save User Dictionary Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in a name for the dictionary you want to save, or you can select a name from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed here will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select a name for the dictionary you want to save.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which to save the dictionary.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display Wave (.wav) or all (*.*) files.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive to which you want to save the dictionary.

Related Topics:

Loading User Dictionaries

Saving User Dictionaries


Select Actor Dialog Box

Currently Loaded drop-down list box: You can choose an actor from the drop-down list of actors that are already loaded into memory.

Open... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Actor dialog box, from which you can choose an actor file to load into memory.

Replace... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Actor dialog box, from which you can choose an actor file to globally replace the currently selected actor.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the currently selected actor from memory. The actor will no longer be available in the drop-down list, and will not display if you have used it elsewhere in the same presentation.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the currently selected actor.

Number of Frames field: Displays the number of frames in the actor. Each frame is one image of the actor. When these images are displayed one after the other, the actor appears to animate. If, for example, the selected actor has 21 frames, you know that there are 21 images making up the actor's motion.

Speed (frames per second) edit box: You can specify the number of frames of the actor to play each second. A higher number will result in a faster playback speed. This allows you to ensure your actor does not animate too quickly or too slowly. If Astound cannot display the frames as fast as you have specified, frames will be skipped to ensure that your actor is at the appropriate point in its animation at the correct time on your slide.

Loop checkbox: Enabling this option causes the actor to animate continuously, for as long as the slide is displayed. If this option is disabled, the actor will play through once only.

Select button: Clicking on this button causes the currently displayed actor to be selected and placed at the specified location on the current slide.

Done button: Clicking on this button causes the dialog box to close without placing the currently selected actor, although the Currently Available list will reflect the changes you have made - actor files opened, replaced, or removed will still be opened, replaced, or removed.

Related Topics:

Placing Actors

Importing Actors

Replacing Actors and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of an Actor

Removing Actors from Memory


Select Datasheet Dialog Box

When you are creating a chart, this dialog box appears whenever there are any datasheets currently loaded into memory. You can choose one of the datasheets from the list, or choose to use a new datasheet.

Datasheet list box: Displays a list of all datasheets that are currently loaded into memory.

Uses field: Displays the number of charts in which the datasheet is currently used in the presentation.

Select button: Clicking on this button displays the Astound Datasheet window, with the values from the selected datasheet entered into the corresponding cells.

New button: Clicking on this button displays the Astound Datasheet window, with no values entered into its cells.

Related Topics:

Datasheet Window


Select Icon Dialog Box

The Filename combo box: You can enter the name of the file that contains the icon you want to use, or you can select a file from the drop-down list.

The Directory field: Displays the currently selected drive and directory.

The Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types list box, in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select the file that contains the icon you want to use.

The Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the subdirectories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory in which the file containing the icon you want to use is located.

The File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed. You can choose to display programs (.bmp), libraries (.dll), or all files.

The Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the file containing the icon you want to use is located.

The Available Icons box: When a file is selected in the Files list, all icons contained in that file will be displayed here. You can choose the icon you want to use from this list.

Related Topics:

Saving Presentations for Distribution


Select Marker Dialog Box

Select Marker list box: Displays a list of markers that are defined in the current sound. You can select a marker that you want to designate as the currently selected region by clicking on its name in the list.

Start Time field: Displays the start time of the currently selected marker.

End Time field: Displays the end time of the currently selected marker.

Select button: Clicking on this button causes the marker that is currently selected in the Select Marker list box to be designated as the currently selected region in the sound.

Related Topics:

Selecting Sound Marker Regions


Select Pictograph Dialog Box

Currently Defined drop-down list box: You can choose a pictograph object to use in the chart from the drop-down list of pictograph objects that are already defined.

Load... button: Clicking on this button displays the Load Pictograph dialog box, from which you can choose a file containing a pictograph object to load into memory.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the currently selected pictograph object from memory. The object will no longer be available in the drop-down list, and will not display if you have used it in other graphs in the same presentation.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the currently selected pictograph object.

Stack checkbox: Enabling this option specifies that the chart which uses the pictograph object will stack images of it to represent the value in the datasheet. When this option is disabled, a single copy of the object will be sized to represent chart data.

Units Per Object edit box: When you are creating a stacked pictograph chart, you can enter the number of data units represented by each copy of the object in the chart.

Last Object options: When you are creating a stacked pictograph chart, you can choose how values that do not equal full objects are displayed. You can specify that the final copy of the object is either cropped or scaled by enabling the appropriate radio button.

Related Topics:

Creating a Pictograph

Creating Pictographs


Select Picture Dialog Box

Currently Loaded drop-down list box: You can choose a picture from the drop-down list of pictures that are already loaded into memory.

Open... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Picture dialog box, from which you can choose a picture file to load into memory.

Replace... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Picture dialog box, from which you can choose a picture file to globally replace the currently selected picture.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the currently selected picture from memory. The picture will no longer be available in the drop-down list, and will not display if you have used it elsewhere in the same presentation.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the currently selected picture.

Related Topics:

Loading Pictures

Placing Pictures

Replacing Pictures and Filling Picture Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of a Picture

Removing Pictures from Memory


Select Sound Dialog Box

Currently on Slide drop-down list box: Displays the name of the currently selected sound that has been placed on the slide. The drop-down list contains the names of all sounds that have been placed on the current slide.

Volume slider: You can set the playback volume of the sound by moving the handle up or down. In order to use this volume control, it must be supported by the playback hardware you are using.

Play/Stop button: Clicking on the Play button causes the currently selected sound to play back according to the options set in the Sounds on Slide box. When the sound is playing, the button becomes the Stop button, which you can click on to end the preview playback.

Remove button: Clicking on this button causes the currently select sound to be removed from the slide. The sound will still be available in the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

Add Narration... button: Clicking on this button displays message and dialog boxes that allow you to add narration to the current slide or the entire presentation, while it is playing. You must have a sound card that supports recording and a microphone in order to use this function.

Make Best Timeline button: Clicking on this button causes the timeline of the currently selected sound to be adjusted so that it is the same length as that of the slide. The sound will play continuously if you have enabled the Loop option.

Loop checkbox: Enabling this option causes the sound to play over the entire length of its specified timeline, regardless of its length. If this option is not enabled, the sound will play through once at most, regardless of the length of its timeline.

Seconds/Percentage button: Clicking on this button changes the scale displayed on the timeline from seconds to percentage, or from percentage to seconds.

Timeline: You can adjust the timeline of the currently selected sound, specifying start and end times, and fade in/fade out times.

Sound Info field: Displays the name, type, sample rate, channel status, and playback length of the currently selected sound.

Currently Loaded drop-down list box: Displays the name of the currently selected available sound. This drop-down list contains the names of all sound files that are currently loaded into memory.

Add to Slide button: Clicking on this button places the sound selected in the Currently Loaded list box onto the current slide. The sound will then be included in the Currently on Slide drop-down list.

Open... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Sound dialog box, from which you can select a sound file to load into memory.

Remove button: Clicking on this button causes the currently selected available sound to be removed from memory. It will no longer appear in the Currently Loaded drop-down list.

Edit button: Clicking on this button displays the Sound Editor window with the currently selected available sound displayed. In the Sound Editor, you can control all sound attributes, and edit the sound based on its graphical display.

New button: Clicking on this button displays the Sound Editor window with no sound displayed. You can then record or load a sound, edit it, and save it for use in your presentation.

Play/Stop button: Clicking on the Play button causes the currently selected available sound to play back. When the sound is playing, the button becomes the Stop button, which you can click on to end the preview playback.

Rename button: Clicking on this button displays the Rename Sound dialog box, from which you can enter a new name for the currently selected available sound.

Define CD Clip... button: Clicking on this button displays the Define Compact Disc Clip dialog box, from which you can define a CD clip to use as a sound in your presentation.

Done button: Clicking on this button closes the dialog box. Any sounds that have been loaded, opened, removed, placed on slides, renamed, edited, or had volume or timeline adjustments made will remain in their new state.

Related Topics:

Loading Sounds into Memory

Adding Sound to a Slide

Sound Timelines

Setting a Timeline to Play a Sound Once

Looping a Sound

Setting the Volume for a Sound on a Slide

Removing Sounds from Memory

Removing Sound from Slides


Select Template Dialog Box

Filename combo box: You can type in the name of the template you want to apply to the current presentation, or you can select it from the drop-down list.

Directory field: Displays the currently specified drive and directory. Files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed here will be displayed in the Files list box.

Files list box: Displays all files of the type specified in the File Types drop-down list box, in the location displayed in the Directory field. From this list, you can select the template you want to open.

Directories list box: Displays the directories in the currently selected drive, and the sub-directories in the currently selected directory. From this list, you can select the directory which contains the template you want to apply.

File Types drop-down list box: Specifies the type of files to display in the Files list box. Only files with the selected extension will be displayed. From the drop-down list, you can select the file extension of the files you want displayed.

Drives drop-down list box: Displays the current drive. From the drop-down list, you can select the drive on which the template you want to apply is located.

Preview checkbox: Selecting this option causes a preview of the selected template to appear in the Preview box.

Preview box: Contains a preview of the selected presentation file when the Preview checkbox is enabled.

No Template button: Clicking on this button specifies that no (new) template be applied to the current presentation.

Related Topics:

Using Templates

Applying a Template to an Existing Presentation

Creating a New Presentation with a Template

Switching Templates


Select Video Dialog Box

File-Based Digital Video radio button: Enabling this option enables the options in the File-Based Digital Video box, and disables the options in the Overlay Analog Video box. You must enable this option is you want to load or place file-based video or animated movies.

Overlay Analog Video radio button: Enabling this option enables the options in the Overlay Analog Video box, and disables the options in the File-Based Digital Video box. You must enable this option is you want to use overlay video.

Currently Loaded drop-down list box: You can choose a video or animated movie file from the drop-down list of those that are already loaded into memory.

Open... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Video dialog box, from which you can choose a video or animated movie file to load into memory.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the currently selected file from memory. The video or animated movie will no longer be available in the drop-down list, and will not play or display if you have used it elsewhere in the same presentation.

Replace... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Video dialog box, from which you can choose a video or animated movie to globally replace the currently selected file.

Loop checkbox: Enabling this option causes the video or animated movie to play through more than once, if the display time of the slide exceeds that of the video, and if the video's timeline is extended as necessary. If this option is disabled, the video or animated movie will play through once only.

Installed Drivers drop-down list box: You can choose a device driver from the drop-down list of those installed and available on your system. The driver you choose must match the device that will be delivering your overlay video.

Fill Rectangle with Key Color checkbox: Enabling this option causes the specified video rectangle to be filled with the current key color.

Key Color button: Clicking on this button displays a pop-up color palette, from which you can choose a key color.

Preview box: Displays a single-frame preview of the selected video or animated movie.

Top-Left Corner radio button: Enabling this option causes the video or animated movie file to be aligned with the top-left corner of the video rectangle you have dragged out, and played at its original size.

Center radio button: Enabling this option causes the video or animated movie file to be centered in the video rectangle you have dragged out, and played at its original size.

Make Fit radio button: Enabling this option causes the video file to be stretched or shrunk to fit into the video rectangle you have dragged out. However, animated movies and some types of video cannot be stretched or shrunk. This option will be disabled when you use those types of files.

Related Topics:

Loading Video

Placing Video

Importing Video

Overlay Video

Replacing Video and Filling Placeholders

Replacing All Occurrences of Video


Set Next Slide Dialog Box

Select Next Slide list box: Contains a list of options for redefining the playback order of the presentation. You can designate any slide in the presentation as the slide that plays after the currently selected slide, or you can have the presentation stop after the currently selected slide.

The options are:

Default: Selecting this item causes the next slide in the natural playback order to be played after the current slide has finished playing. This is equivalent to removing any redirection that has been specified.

Stop Slideshow: Selecting this item causes the playback of the presentation to stop after the current slide has finished playing.

Slide Names: Selecting any of the slide names in the presentation causes the corresponding slide to play after the current slide has finished playing.

Reset All Slides button: Clicking on this button causes the redirection to be removed from all slides in the presentation. The slides will follow their natural playback order.

Related Topics:

Redirecting Playback Order

Interactivity


Set Notation Pens Dialog Box

Pen Color options: Clicking on one of the Pen Colors places a selection cursor in the color. When you select a color from the Quick Color bar, it becomes the pen color for the pen that currently has this selection cursor.

Quick Color bar: You can choose a color for the selected notation pen by clicking on the color in this bar.

Pen Size options: These options allow you to specify the size at which the selected notation pen will appear on the screen when the presentation is playing. You can click in the Size box or drag to specify a pen size. You can also enter a size directly in the Size edit box.

Solid radio button: Enabling this option causes the selected notation pen's lines and marks to appear as opaque solids overtop of objects and backgrounds on the screen.

Highlight radio button: Enabling this option causes the selected notation pen's lines and marks to appear as see-through highlighting overtop of objects and backgrounds on the screen.

Related Topics:

Setting Notation Pens Within Astound


Slide Dimensions Dialog Box

Available Dimensions drop-down list box: You can select a height and width setting for the slides in the current presentation from the drop-down list.

Width and Height fields: Displays the height and width for the dimension that is displayed in the Available Dimensions drop-down list box.

Remove button: Clicking on this button causes the dimension that is displayed in the Available Dimensions drop-down list box to be removed from the list of available dimensions.

Name field: You can type in a name for the custom slide dimension that is defined by the values entered in the Width and Height edit boxes.

Width and Height edit boxes: You can enter a custom height and width for presentation slides.

Add button: Clicking on this button causes the slide dimensions currently entered in the Width and Height edit boxes to be added to the list of Available Dimensions under the name specified in the Name field.

Adjust Object Positions checkbox: When you select a new slide dimension for existing slides, enabling this option causes the position of objects currently on the slide to be proportionally adjusted. Both their position and size will be adjusted.

Related Topics:

Setting Slide Sizes

Setting Custom Slide Sizes

Removing Dimensions from the Slide Dimension List


Slide Duration Dialog Box

In this dialog box, you can set a playback time for the current slide.

Enter Slide Duration edit box: You can enter a value for the playback length of the slide, in seconds.

Related Topics:

Slide Duration


Slide Magnification Dialog Box

Magnification edit box: You can enter a value for the magnification of the display.

Related Topics:

View Magnification


Slide Name Dialog Box

Enter Slide Name field: You can enter a name for the selected slide(s).

Related Topics:

Adding Slides

Renaming Slides


Slideshow Options Dialog Box

Entire Presentation radio button: Enabling this option causes the entire presentation to begin playing back when the Play button in this dialog box is clicked.

Current Slide radio button: Enabling this option causes the current slide to begin playing back when the Play button in this dialog box is clicked.

From Current Slide radio button: Enabling this option causes the presentation to begin playing back from the current slide when the Play button in this dialog box is clicked.

Sound checkbox: Enabling this option causes any sounds used in the presentation to play when the presentation plays. When this option is disabled, the presentation will play without sound.

Animation checkbox: Enabling this option causes any transitions and paths specified in the presentation to take effect when the presentation is played. When this option is disabled, the path animation options are ignored.

Video checkbox:  Enabling this option causes any video included in your presentation to play when the presentation plays. When this option is disabled, the presentation will play without video.

Fit to Screen checkbox:  Enabling this option plays the presentation over the full screen no matter what size or resolution your monitor is. When this option is disabled, the presentation will play at its authored size.

Loop Back to Start checkbox: Enabling this option causes the slideshow to play repeatedly.

Notation Pens checkbox:  Enabling this option allows you to use the notation pens during playback of the presentation.

Set Pens... button:  Clicking on this button displays the Set Notation Pens dialog box, from which you can set the pens' colors, sizes, and effect.

Hide 'Playing' Objects radio button: Enabling this option causes all OLE objects with a primary command of "Play" to be hidden during playback of the presentation.

Display All Objects radio button: Enabling this option causes all OLE objects to be displayed on-screen during playback of the presentation.

Normal radio button: Enabling this option causes the slides in the presentation to play back according to their timelines.

No. of Seconds options: Enabling this option allows you to specify the length of time each slide is to be displayed in the edit box. This will override any other slide duration settings. The entire slide will be displayed fast enough to finish within the allotted time, rather than being cut off.

Whenever Mouse is Clicked checkbox: Enabling this option causes the presentation to advance to the next slide when the current slide has been shown for its full duration or when you click the mouse button.

Wait For Mouse Click checkbox: Enabling this option causes the presentation to advance only when you click the mouse button. This will override any slide duration set for the presentation. Once the slide reaches the end of its duration, it will remain static on your screen.

Always radio button: Enabling this radio button specifies that the cursor will always be visible while you are playing your slides.

Never radio button:  Enabling this radio button specifies that the cursor will never be visible while you are playing your slides.

During Mouse Movement radio button: Enabling this radio button specifies that the cursor will only appear when you move the mouse.

During Possible Interaction radio button: Enabling this radio button specifies that the cursor will only be displayed on slides that contain interactivity, so that you can perform the appropriate mouse clicks.

Play button: Clicking on this button causes the current presentation to begin playback.

Related Topics:

Options Available During Playback

Saving Presentations for Distribution

Setting Slide Preview Options


Slide Transition Dialog Box

Transitions list: You can select the transition you want to apply to the current slide by clicking on its name in the list. Any options associated with the selected transition will then appear in the Transition Options box.

Transition Options box: Displays the options associated with the currently selected slide transition. You can select the options you want to further refine your transition.

Preview checkbox: Enabling this option causes an animated preview of the slide's entry, reflecting the currently selected transition and options, to be displayed in the Preview box.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the slide's entry, reflecting the currently selected transition and options, when the Preview checkbox is selected.

Related Topics:

Transitions Between Slides


Solid Color Background Dialog Box

Colors box: The rectangles contain the colors of the current color scheme. You can select a color for the slide background by clicking on it, and then clicking on the OK button.

Eyedropper button: Clicking on this button displays the Eyedropper dialog box and changes the cursor to an eyedropper tool. You can select any color displayed on the screen by clicking the eyedropper tool on it. The color you click on will be placed in the selected rectangle in the Colors box, from which you can select it as the slide background.

Color Mixer button: Clicking on this button causes the dialog box to expand to include the Color Mixer options. You can create a color to place in the selected rectangle in the Colors box by clicking in the color refiner box or entering values in the edit boxes.

Color Spectrum button: Clicking on this button causes the dialog box to expand to include the Color Spectrum options. You can select a color to place in the selected rectangle in the Colors box by clicking on it in the Color Spectrum box.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the currently selected color.

Related Topics:

Adding a Solid Color Background


Sound Editor Window

The File menu: This menu contains commands that you can use to open and save sound files, insert one file into another, record sound files, and change the format of sound files.

The Edit menu: This menu contains editing and selecting commands that you can use to select regions or loops; cut, copy, and paste sections of sounds; delete sound sections; place and remove markers; and undo and redo operations.

The View menu: This menu contains commands that allow you to adjust the magnification of the displayed sound.

The Modify menu: This menu contains commands that you can use to make changes to the sound itself, like reversing or flipping sections, adding echoes, making amplitude changes, and using overlay effects.

The Play menu: This menu contains commands that allow you to control the playback of the displayed sound.

The Help menu: This menu contains commands that give you access to the Sound Editors help functions.

The Open File button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Sound dialog box, from which you can select a sound file to display in the Sound Editor.

The Save File button: Clicking on this button displays the Save Sound dialog box, which you can use to save the currently displayed sound file.

The Undo button: Clicking on this button once only results in the last operation executed to be undone. Repeatedly clicking on this button causes the status of the displayed sound file to go back one step per click in the list of previously executed operations.

The Redo button: Clicking on this button once only results in the last undone operation to be redone. Repeatedly clicking on this button causes the status of the displayed sound file to go forward one step per click in the list of previously executed operations.

The Cut button: Clicking on this button causes the selected region of the displayed sound to be removed and stored in the paste buffer.

The Copy button: Clicking on this button causes a copy of the selected region of the displayed sound to be placed in the paste buffer.

The Paste button: Clicking on this button causes the region stored in the paste buffer to be placed in the displayed sound at the insertion point.

The Zoom In button: Clicking on this button causes the magnification of the displayed sound to increase.

The Zoom Out button: Clicking on this button causes the magnification of the displayed sound  to decrease.

The Play button: Clicking on this button causes the displayed sound to play.

The Play Selected button: Clicking on this button causes the selected region of the displayed sound to play.

The Stop button: Clicking on this button stops the playback of the displayed sound or selected region.

The Looping button: Clicking on this button enables and disables the playback of the specified loop region.

The Playback Parameters button: Clicking on this button displays the Playback Parameters dialog box, from which you can set playback options for the displayed sound.

The Record button: Clicking on this button displays the Record Sound dialog box, which you can use to record sounds - if you have the necessary hardware.

Quick Help: The largest field in the status bar displays brief descriptions of the currently selected menu command, or the tool button that the cursor is currently over. When a lengthy operation is being performed, this field will contain a progress bar, indicating graphically how much of the operation remains, and how long it will take to complete.

Sampling Rate: This field displays the sampling rate of the currently displayed sound file.

Sampling Resolution: This field displays the sampling resolution of the currently displayed sound file.

Length: This field displays the playback length of the currently displayed sound file.

Selection: This field displays the start point and length of the currently selected region.

Loop: This field displays the start point and length of the currently specified loop.

Related Topics:

Loading Sounds into Memory

Adding Sound to a Slide

Sound Timelines

Setting a Timeline to Play a Sound Once

Looping a Sound

Setting the Volume for a Sound on a Slide

Removing Sounds from Memory

Removing Sound from Slides


Spell Checker Dialog Box

Misspelt Word field: Displays the word or text that Astound has identified as incorrectly spelled.

Replace With edit box: Displays the first suggestion that Astound has to correct the misspelled word. If Astound has no suggestions, the misspelled word is displayed here, and you can type in the correct spelling.

Suggestions list box: Displays any suggestions that Astound has to correct the misspelled word. You can click on the suggestion you want to place it in the Replace With edit box.

Recheck button: Clicking on this button causes the spelling of the word in the Replace With edit box to be checked so you can make sure the correction you have typed in is spelled correctly.

Accept/Replace button: Clicking on this button causesWhen this button says Replace, the current selection in the list box will replace the currently flagged word. When this button says Accept, the text in the edit box will replace the currently flagged word.

Recheck button: Clicking on this button causes

Skip button: Clicking on this buttonTo skip the currently flagged occurrence of the word, click on the Skip button. If the same spelling appears elsewhere, it will still be flagged.

Learn button: Clicking on this button causes If you use a word frequently (e.g., your name), but the spell checker flags it all the time, you may want the dictionary to learn the word and never flag it again. By clicking on Learn, your word gets stored in the current Astound user dictionary and will not be flagged again during this work session. If you want to save all of your learned words in a user dictionary so they can be accessed in other work sessions, see To save a user dictionary later in this chapter.

Related Topics:

Spell Checking Selected Text

Spell Checking a Text Block

Spell Checking a Slide

Spell Checking a Presentation


Switch Master Dialog Box

Master drop-down list box: From the drop-down list, you can select the new master slide you want to base the slide on, or you can select the No Master option, which will allow you to remove the existing master from the current slide.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the master slide selected in the Master drop-down list box.

Select button: Clicking on this button causes the master slide selected in the Master drop-down list box to be applied to the selected slide.

Done button: Clicking on this button closes the dialog box without switching masters.

Open... button: Clicking on this button displays the Open Master Slide dialog box, from which you can open a master slide to apply to the current presentation slide.

Remove button: Clicking on this button removes the master slide currently selected in the dialog box. It will no longer be available in the Master drop-down list.

Related Topics:

Using Master Slides

Switching Masters


Table Number Dialog Box
Table Number Format Dialog Box

Number Style drop-down list box: From the drop-down list, you can select a number style for the currently selected chart number element. You can choose General, Percentage, or Currency.

Decimal Separator edit box: In this box, you can specify what symbol you want to use to specify a decimal separator.

1000's Separator edit box: In this box, you can specify what symbol you want to use as a thousands separator.

Negative Style options: You can choose the display style of negative numbers by enabling one of the radio buttons. You can choose to display negative numbers with a minus sign, or inside parentheses.

Decimal Places edit box: You can enter the number of decimal places that are displayed for any decimal fractions that appear in the selected chart number element.

Currency Sign edit box: This option is enabled when you select Currency from the Number Style drop-down list. You can enter the symbol you want to use to denote the specific currency values you are charting.

Currency Sign Position options: These options are enabled when you select Currency from the Number Style drop-down list. You can choose to position the currency symbol either before or after the number by selecting the appropriate radio button.

Related Topics:

Editing Tables


Table Type Specs Dialog Box

Define options: You can select which portion of text you want to set attributes for by enabling the appropriate radio button. You can specify attributes for a the Row Titles, Column Titles, Values, or Title.

Font options: Displays the current font used for the selected table element. You can select a font to apply by typing its name in the edit box, or selecting it from the list box.

Font Style options: Displays the current font style used for the selected table element. You can select a style by typing its name in the edit box, or selecting it from the list box.

Font Size options: Displays the size of the current font used for the selected table element. You can select a font size to apply by typing it in the edit box, or selecting it from the list box.

Strikeout checkbox: Enabling this option causes the text to appear with a horizontal line through the middle.

Underline checkbox: Enabling this option causes the text to appear with a single underline.

Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can choose or create a color for the selected table element.

Sample box: Displays a text preview reflecting the currently selected options.

Related Topics:

Editing Tables


Text Color Dialog Box

Colors box: You can select a color for the selected text by clicking on the appropriate rectangle.

Eyedropper button: Clicking on this button displays the Eyedropper dialog box and changes the cursor to an eyedropper. You can use the eyedropper to select any color that is displayed on the screen to apply to the selected text.

Color Mixer button: Clicking on this button causes the Color Mixer dialog box to appear, from which you can create a color to apply to the selected text.

Color Spectrum button: Clicking on this button displays the Color Spectrum dialog box, from which you can select a color to apply to the selected text.

Preview box: Displays a preview of the color that is selected to be applied to the selected text.

Related Topics:

Changing Attributes for Selected Text

Using the Color Mixer

Using the Color Spectrum

Using the Eyedropper


Text Size Dialog Box

Enter Size edit box: You can enter a size for the text, in points.

Related Topics:

Changing Attributes for Selected Text


Typeface Dialog Box

Font options: You can enter a font name in the edit box, or select one from the drop-down list of available fonts.

Font Style options: You can enter a font name in the edit box, or select one from the drop-down list of available fonts.

Strikeout checkbox: Enabling this option causes the text to appear with a horizontal line through the middle.

Underline checkbox: Enabling this option causes the text to be underlined.

Sample box: Displays a sample of the text with the currently specified options.

Related Topics:

Changing Attributes for Selected Text


Type Specs Dialog Box

Font options: You can enter a font name in the edit box, or select one from the drop-down list of available fonts.

Font Style options: You can enter a font name in the edit box, or select one from the drop-down list of available fonts.

Size options: You can enter a point size for the type in the edit box, or select one from the drop-down list.

Strikeout checkbox: Enabling this option causes the text to appear with a horizontal line through the middle.

Underline checkbox: Enabling this option causes the text to be underlined.

Sample box: Displays a sample of the text with the currently specified options.

Color button: Clicking on this button displays a Color Scheme pop-up window, from which you can select or create a color to apply to the text.

Related Topics:

Changing Attributes for Selected Text


New (command)
New...

This command displays the Select Template dialog box which allows you to start a new presentation and choose a template if you wish.

Related Topics:

Basics


Open (command)
Open...

This command lets you open an existing presentation file. It displays the Open Presentation dialog box which allows you to choose a presentation file to open.

Related Topics:

Basics


Save (command)
Save

This command automatically saves a presentation that has previously been saved.

Related Topics:

Basics


Save As (command)
Save As...

This command lets you save your document in the folder of your choice. It displays the Save Presentation As dialog box in which you can enter a name for your presentation and the folder in which you want to store it.

When you save a presentation, you can specify if you want to save it with resources and if you want to save it as a self-running presentation. If you save it with resources, you do not have to worry about loading any files that are incorporated in the presentation when you run the presentation again.

Resources are objects that are saved in their own files such as actors, sounds, or pictures that you use within your presentation. If you save your presentation with resources, you don't  need to distribute any resource files except videos. Videos cannot be saved as part of the main presentation file. Saving with resources creates a larger file than saving without resources. If you save without resources, you need to distribute all resource files with your presentation and place them in the same folder as the presentation on the playback machine.

Saving the presentation as a self-running presentation means you do not have to have Astound or the Player Application installed to play the presentation on your computer. A self-running presentation creates a larger file than the same presentation when it is not self-running.

If you are distributing your presentation on floppy disks, you can save your it in multiple files or disks. You can specify file sizes for low density or high density disks, or you can specify a custom file size.

Related Topics:

Basics


Revert To Saved (command)
Revert To Saved

This command reloads the most recently saved version of the presentation, sound, movie or library you are working on. Any changes made to the presentation since it was last saved will not be retained. If the presentation has never been previously saved, this command will be unavailable.

Related Topics:

Basics


Template (command)
Template

When you are using a template to create a presentation, this command displays a submenu that allows you to switch to another template, apply a template or save a template.

The Apply... command displays the Select Template dialog box which allows you to apply a template to a presentation that does not currently have a template.

The Reapply command reapplies the current template to your presentation. When you choose this command, all text, pictures, etc., that you have added to the presentation will not be lost. However, the text format levels from the master slides will be reapplied to all text blocks originating from the master slides. Furthermore, any color schemes and enhanced palettes contained in the master slides will be reapplied to the associated presentation slides.

The Switch... command displays the Select Template dialog box in which you can choose a new template. The new template will take the place of the one you are presently using. Data will be placed in the appropriate placeholders in the corresponding master slides if both templates have master slides with the same names.

The Save Template command displays the Save Template As dialog box in which you can save the template.

Related Topics:

Basics


Import (command)
Import

This command displays a submenu that lets you import a presentation, slide, master slide, object, datasheet, text, picture, video, actor or sound. Each of the commands in the submenu will display an import dialog box that allows you to load the appropriate resource.

Related Topics:

Importing


Export (command)
Export

This command displays a submenu allowing you to export the current slide or selected object(s).

Related Topics:

Exporting


Slideshow (command)
Slideshow

This command displays a submenu of commands allowing you to set options for playing the slideshow. You can play the entire presentation , the current slide, or play the presentation from the current slide to the end of the presentation.

The Options... commands will display the Slideshow Options dialog box in which you can specify playback parameters such as playing sound or animations, or using Notation Pens.

Related Topics:

Playback and Distribution


Print (command)
Print...

This command displays the Print dialog box in which you can choose to print slides, notes, handouts, and text outlines. The radio buttons you select affects the kind of checkboxes that are accessible.

Related Topics:

Printing


Printer Setup (command)
Printer Setup...

This command displays the Printer Setup dialog box, allowing you to specify the printer orientation. The Setup... button within this dialog box displays the setup of the selected printer.

Related Topics:

Printing


PageSetup (command)
Page Setup...

This command displays the standard Page Setup dialog box, allowing you to specify the orientation (portrait or landscape), page size, margins, and headers and footers you want to use for printing. This dialog box will change depending on what printer you have selected.

Related Topics:

Basics


Exit (command)
Exit

This command will exit your Astound session and close down all the Astound windows that are currently open. If you haven't saved your presentation, Astound will ask you if you want to save it or not.

Related Topics:

Basics


Undo (command)
Undo

This command will undo your most recent action (if possible). The Undo menu item changes to reflect the last editing function performed. Some actions such as converting an object to a bitmap cannot be undone.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Cut (command)
Cut

This command cuts the selected object from the presentation and places it on the Clipboard. You can paste the object somewhere else if you want to.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Copy (command)
Copy

This command copies the selected object and places it on the Clipboard, leaving the original in position. You can then paste copies to another position, slide, presentation, or application.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Paste (command)
Paste

This command pastes the most recent object that was placed on the Clipboard  to another position, slide, presentation, or application.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Paste Special (command)
Paste Special...

This command allows you to link or embed OLE objects from other applications by displaying the Paste Special dialog box.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Clear (command)
Clear

This command removes the selected object from the presentation. It is not placed on the Clipboard and therefore cannot be pasted elsewhere.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Select All (command)
Select All

This command selects all objects on the current slide.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Duplicate (command)
Duplicate

This command duplicates the selected objects and places the duplicates beside the originals on the slide.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Links (command)
Links...

This command displays the Links dialog box which lets you edit OLE objects which have been placed with OLE links.

Related Topics:

OLE


Insert OLE Object (command)
Insert OLE Object...

This command displays the Insert OLE Object dialog box, so that you can add more OLE objects to your OLE list.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Object (command)
Object

This command allows you to edit or play linked or embedded OLE objects.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Purge Unused Resources (command)
Purge Unused Resources...

This command displays the Purge Unused dialog box listing the types of resources. From here, you can delete any resources that have been loaded into memory but have not been used in the presentation. It is a good idea to choose this command before saving the presentation with resources. Otherwise, all resources that are loaded into memory will be saved as part of the presentation regardless of whether they have been used in the presentation, thereby creating a larger file than necessary. If you purge unused resources before saving, only necessary resources will be saved as part of the presentation.

Related Topics:

Playback and Distribution


Slide View (command)
Slide View

This command displays the Slide View.

Related Topics:

Basics


Outline View (command)
Outline View

This command displays the Outline View.

Related Topics:

Outlines


Sorter View (command)
Sorter View

This command displays the Slide Sorter.

Related Topics:

Basics


Show Frames (command)
Show Frames

This is a toggle command that displays or hides the bounding boxes around selected objects. The bounding box frames will not be displayed when you run the slideshow even if they are displayed in the Slide View.


Show Rulers (command)
Show Rulers

This is a toggle command that displays or hides the Rulers along the top and left edge of the slide window.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Show Path (command)
Show Paths

This is a toggle command. When it is enabled, any entry or exit paths that have been set will be displayed. The paths will not show when you run the slideshow.

Related Topics:

Transitions and Paths


Show Grid (command)
Show Grid

This is a toggle command that allows you to display or hide grid lines on your slide. Grids are a series of equally spaced dotted lines that run horizontally and vertically across your screen. Each dot represents a grid line. Grid lines are useful for accurately positioning objects on slides. You can set the grid dimensions using the View/Preferences... command. You can cause objects being drawn, moved or resized to snap to these grid lines by enabling View/Snap To Grid. The grid lines will not show when you run the slideshow.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Snap To Grid (command)
Snap To Grid

This is a toggle command that, when enabled, will cause objects to automatically snap to the nearest grid line. You do not have to have View/Show Grid enabled to use this command.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Preferences (command)
Preferences

This command displays a submenu which contains options to either display or file your preferences and save screen layout preferences so that it will display the same preferences in your next presentation instead of displaying the default values.

Choosing the Preferences/Display... command will display the Display Preferences dialog box which contains options concerning window layout and functions.

Choosing Preferences/File displays the File Preferences dialog box which contains options allowing you to customize auto save capabilities, backups and previews that are saved with the presentation.

The Save Settings on Exit will save your screen configuration settings for use the next time you run Astound.

Related Topics:

Preferences


Magnification (command)
Magnification

This command displays a submenu containing a list of magnifications to choose from so that you can see a portion of the slide in detail, or look at the entire slide.

Related Topics:

Basics


New Slide (command)
New...

This command displays the Create New Slide dialog box in which you can specify the number of slides you want to add to your presentation, if you want to use a master, and the name of the slide.

Related Topics:

Basics


Name (command)
Name...

This command displays the Slide Name dialog box in which you can enter a new name for the current slide. The name will appear in the Side pop-up menu and in the slide sorter.

Related Topics:

Basics


Duplicate (command)
Duplicate

This command duplicates the current slide.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Delete (command)
Delete

This command deletes the current slide from your presentation.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Dimensions (command)
Dimensions...

This command displays the Slide Dimensions dialog box in which you can choose one of the existing slide dimensions or enter your dimensions in the edit boxes. You can choose from standard monitor dimensions, paper dimensions, and 35mm slides.

Related Topics:

Basics


Color  Scheme (command)
Color Scheme...

This command displays the Color Scheme dialog box in which you can choose a new color scheme for your slide or presentation, or you can create or change a color scheme.

Related Topics:

Color


Background (command)
Background

This command displays a submenu of commands that allow you to choose the background for your slide.

Choosing the None command will make the background of the current slide white.

Choosing the Solid Color... command displays the Solid Color Background dialog box in which you can choose a color for your background from the Color Scheme.

Choosing the Gradient...  command displays the Gradient Background dialog box in which you can choose a blend color from the End Color band, the direction of color flow from the Directions box, and the type of gradient from the Type box.

If you want to use a multi-color gradient as your background, you can click on the Multi-Color... button and the Multi-Color Gradient dialog box will appear. In this dialog box you can choose whether you want a gradual transition and intermediate colors to be used.

Choosing the Pattern... command displays the Pattern Background dialog box in which you can choose background colors, foreground colors, and a pattern.

Choosing the Picture... command displays the Picture Background dialog box in which you can choose a picture file for your background. You can choose to scale the picture to fill the entire slide, center the picture on the slide, or tile it to fill the slide if the picture is not the same size as the slide.

Related Topics:

Backgrounds


Duration (command)
Duration...

This command displays the Slide Duration dialog box in which you can set the length of time you want the current slide displayed for an on-screen presentation.

Related Topics:

Timelines


Transition (command for slide transitions)
Transition...

A transition dictates how a slide changes into the next during an on-screen presentation. This command displays the Slide Transition dialog box in which you can select the entry transition for the slide. In this dialog box, you can preview different transitions to help you decide which one you want to use.

Related Topics:

Transitions


Set Next Slide (command)
Set Next Slide...

This command displays the Set Next Slide dialog box in which youc can specify what slide will be played after the current slide.


Go To (command)
Go To

This menu option lets you go to different slides in your presentation. Choosing one of the submenu options lets you jump to the selected slide.

Related Topics:

Basics


Add Placeholder (command)
Add Placeholder

You can add placeholders on your slides to signify that you want something to appear there. This is handy when you are creating master slides and know that you will place something different in that space on individual slides. When you choose Slide/Add Placeholder, a submenu will appear and you can choose any of the placeholders for your slide.

Related Topics:

Masters and Templates


Edit Master (command)
Edit Master

This command allows you to edit a master slide in your presentation or create a new master. The submenu will also contain a list of all masters currently loaded in memory so that you can easily choose which master you wish to edit.

Related Topics:

Masters and Templates


Switch Master (command)
Switch Master...

This command displays the Switch Master dialog box in which you can select a master to use with the current slide. The dialog box will list master slides that have been exported on their own. You cannot open a master that is contained in another template with this option.

Related Topics:

Masters and Templates


Make Into Master (command)
Make Into Master...

Master slides are used as bases for slides in your presentations. If you have created a slide and you want to make it into a master slide, you can choose this command and the Create Master dialog boxh will appear. In this dialog box, you can choose a name for the master or type in an original name for the master. It is useful to choose a name from the list as this will allow masters with the same name to easily transfer their information when you switch a template.

Related Topics:

Masters and Templates


Remove Master (command)
Remove Master

If you are using a master slide with your slide but you decide that you no longer want to use it, you can remove the master with this command. The master slide will disappear from your slide and only the objects that were not part of the master slide will remain.

Related Topics:

Masters and Templates


Unlink Master (command)
Unlink Master

When you choose a master slide, it automatically becomes linked to the slide it accompanies. All of the master slide attributes will be part of the slide but only the placeholders will be editable. If you decide that you want to keep the master slide objects on your presentation slide, then you can unlink the master by choosing this command. Changes to the master slide made after you unlink the slide, will not affect the unlinked slide.

Related Topics:

Masters and Templates


Information (command)
Information...

This command displays the Object Information dialog box. This box contains information about the size, location, color, etc., of the selected object.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Transition (command for object transitions)
Transition...

Object transitions affect the way an object appears and disappears from the screen during an on-screen presentation. The duration of a transition is determined by the object's timeline.

This command displays the Object Transition dialog box. In this dialog box you can set the selected object's timeline, and choose entry and exit transitions.

Some transitions allow you to choose what screen edge or object edge the transition will occur from.

Related Topics:

Transitions and Paths


Path Animation (command)
Path Animation...

This command displays the Object Path Animation dialog box in which you can choose where the object will enter and exit the slide during an on-screen presentation.

Related Topics:

Transitions and Paths


Interaction (command)
Interaction...

Interactivity is the ability to guide the presentation from slide to slide, add pauses, and play sounds based on an action by the user. You can perform actions such as returning the presentation to the first slide, or causing a sound to play with a mouse click during an on-screen presentation.

This command displays the Object Interaction dialog box in which you can choose what will happen when the selected object is clicked on during presentation play back. You can choose to have another slide displayed, replay the current slide, play a sound, etc.

Related Topics:

Interaction


Edit (command)
Edit...

This command displays the appropriate dialog box to allow you to edit the selected object. For example, if an actor is displayed, the Select Actor dialog box would be displayed, or if there is a button selected, the Button Attributes dialog box will be displayed.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Resize (command)
Resize...

This command displays the Resize Object dialog box in which you can accurately resize the selected objects. You can specify the height and width of the object as a percentage of the current size or as exact measurements.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Display (command)
Display...

This command displays the Object Display dialog box that lets you choose whether to display the Interior, Border, and Shadow of objects as well their colors and attributes.

Related Topics:

Color and Object Attributes


Layer (command)
Layer

This command allows you to alter the layer selected objects are placed on. Each object that is drawn or placed, is on a new layer, with the most recently placed object on the top. The Layer command allows you to alter the order of the layers on your slide in order to overlap objects to achieve a desired effect.

Choosing this command displays a submenu where you can choose how your selected objects are to be layered.

Bring to Front:	Brings the selected object(s) to the front layer(s). If more than one object is selected, they will retain their relative layer order, but will be in front of all other objects on the slide.

Send to Back:	Sends the selected object(s) to the back layer(s). If more than one object is selected, they will retain their relative layer order, but will be behind all other objects on the slide.

Up One Layer:	Brings the selected object up one layer from its current position.

Down One Layer:	Sends the selected object down one layer from its current position.

Related Topics:

Layering Objects


Line (command)
Line

This command displays a submenu of line weight options. You can choose the line weight for selected objects, or set a default line width by choosing a width when no objects are selected. A custom line weight can be set using the Other... command.

You can also select arrowheads for your lines choosing what end(s) the arrow head(s) are placed on. The Define Arrows... command displays the Define Arrowheads dialog box in which you can define the size of the arrowheads by clicking on and typing in the corresponding field boxes.

Related Topics:

Color and Object Attributes


Align (command)
Align

This command displays a submenu of commands that allow you to align two or more selected objects to each other in a variety of ways.

Both Axes	Aligns both axes of selected objects  centering them on top of each other.

Vert Axes	Aligns the vertical axes of selected objects.

Horz Axes	Aligns the horizontal axes of selected objects.

Top Edges	Aligns the top edges of selected objects.

Bottom Edges	Aligns the bottom edges of selected objects.

Left Edges	Aligns the left edges of selected objects.

Right Edges	Aligns the right edges of selected objects.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Center On Slide (command)
Center On Slide

This command displays a submenu of commands that will center selected object(s) on the slide.

Both	Centers the selected object(s) both horizontally and vertically on the slide.

Vertically	Centers the selected object(s) vertically on the slide.

Horizontally	Centers the selected object(s) horizontally on the slide.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Flip (command)
Flip

This command displays a submenu which allows you to flip selected shapes drawn with the drawing tools horizontally or vertically.

Vertically	Flips a shape vertically so that the side that was facing up will be facing down.

Horizontally	Flips a shape horizontally so that the side facing left will be facing right.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Group (command)
Group

Takes all selected objects and groups them so that the group can then be selected and moved or altered as one object. You can double click on an item in a group to select the single item and affect only its attributes. This command is useful to keep parts of a complex object, such as a logo, together so that you do not accidentally alter parts of it.

You can group groups of objects to create nested groups.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Ungroup (command)
Ungroup

Takes a selected group and returns it to its individual components.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Convert To Bitmap (command)
Convert To Bitmap...

Converts selected objects to a bitmap image format. This is useful if you have complex objects that contain elements such as graduated fills that take a while to redraw. Bitmap images will redraw much faster than the complex object would in its normal state.

This command displays the Convert To Bitmap dialog box, in which you can decide to have the interior of an object filled with white, left transparent, or use its interior fill.

Once you have converted an object to a bitmap, you will not be able to alter any of its attributes except size and placement.

Related Topics:

Editing Objects


Type Specs (command)
Type Specs...

This command displays the Type Specs dialog box in which you can select the different specifications such as typeface, alignment, etc., thereby allowing you easy access to all general specifications.

Related Topics:

Text


Typeface (command)
Typeface

This command displays a submenu of the fonts installed in your system, thereby allowing you to quickly choose a font for your text.

Also, if you choose the Typeface/Other... command the Typeface dialog box is displayed in which you can select a fonts, type sizes, styles and effects.

Related Topics:

Text


Size (command)
Size

Displays a submenu of the sizes available for the selected font, allowing you to choose the font size you require for your text.

Other...	Displays the Text Size dialog box in which you can specify a custom size for your text through the Enter Size field box.

Related Topics:

Text


Style (command)
Style

Displays a submenu of standard text attributes.

Plain	Automatically disables all other styles.

Bold	Your text will be bolded.

Italic	Your text will be italicized.

Underline	Your text will be underlined.

Strikethrough	A line will cross through your text to strike it out.

Related Topics:

Text


Color (command)
Color

Displays a submenu of all the colors in your standard Color palette.

Choosing the Other... displays the Text Color dialog box from which you can choose a color for your text. You can open the Color Picker from here to create a custom color for your text.

Related Topics:

Text


Format Text Levels (command)
Format Text Levels...

This command allows you to change or add any type specifications to your text format levels, through the Format Text Levels dialog box.

Related Topics:

Text


Remove Overrides (command)
Remove Overrides...

This command removes any type specifications that have been added to any format text levels, through the Remove Overrides dialog boxh.

Related Topics:

Text


Paragraph Spacing (command)
Paragraph Spacing

This command displays a submenu of commands which allow you to change the paragraph spacing of your selected text.

Normal:	Choosing this command will change the paragraph spacing to the default setting.

Increase:	Choosing this command will increase the paragraph spacing one level above the default setting.

Decrease:	Choosing this command will decrease the paragraph spacing one level under the default setting.

Other...	Choosing this command displays the Paragraph Spacing dialog box where you can type in the spacing setting you want in percentile units.

Related Topics:

Text


Character Spacing (command)
Character Spacing

This command displays a submenu that allows you to change the space between selected text characters. Character spacing is measured as a percentage (between 75 and 500 percent) of the width of the original space. Choosing to increase or decrease the spacing will change the character spacing by 10%.

Normal	Uses the default character spacing for the selected font and point size.

Increase	Increases the character spacing by 10% of a normal space.

Decrease	Decreases the character spacing by 10% of a normal space.

Other... 	Displays the Character Spacing dialog box, which allows you to enter the exact spacing between characters as a percentage of a normal space.

Related Topics:

Text


Line Spacing (command)
Line Spacing

This command displays a submenu that allows you to change the space between lines from the submenu. Line spacing is measured as a percentage (between 0 and 1000 percent) of the height of the tallest character for the font and type size you have selected. Choosing to increase or decrease the spacing will change the line spacing by 10%.

Normal	Uses the default character spacing for the selected font and point size.

Increase	Increases the line spacing by 10% of a line space.

Decrease	Decreases the line spacing by 10% of a line space.

Other... 	Displays the Line Spacing dialog box, which allows you to enter the exact spacing between lines as a percentage of the height of the tallest character for the font and point size you have chosen.

Related Topics:

Text


Alignment (command)
Alignment

Displays a submenu of justification options, allowing you to decide how to align blocks of text.

Left	Justifies the text with the left margin.

Right 	Justifies the text with the right margin.

Center	Centers each line of text between the margins.

Justify	Justifies the text with both the left and right margins, adding space between words as necessary.

Related Topics:

Text


Show Text Ruler (command)
Show Text Ruler

A toggle command that displays or hides the text ruler above selected text blocks.

Related Topics:

Text


Find (command)
Find

Displays a submenu of commands that allow you to find and replace text in your presentation.

The Find... command displays the Find Text dialog box in which you can type the text you want to find, specify where to search, and in what direction to search in the presentation.

The Find Again command searches again for the last text found.

The Find Selection command finds the next occurrence of the text currently selected on your slide.

The Replace... command displays the Find and Replace dialog box in which you can type the text you want to find and what you want to replace it with. You can specify where to search, in what direction, and whether to maintain the case of the text found in the presentation. You can replace one instance of the text or replace all instances, with or without notification before the change.

The Replace Again... command replaces the next occurrence of the text last found.

Related Topics:

Text


Spell Check (command)
Spell Check

This command displays a submenu of options allowing you to spell check an entire slide or a portion of text, and load or save dictionaries. Each of the Spell Check commands will display the Spelling dialog box if any mistakes are found.

Selected Text	Checks the spelling of the text currently selected on your slide.

Current Object	Checks the spelling of all the text in your selected object.

Current Slide 	Checks the spelling of all text on the current slide.

All Slides	Checks the spelling of all text in the current presentation.

Load Dictionary...	Displays the Load Dictionary dialog box allowing you to open other dictionaries to use during a spell check.

Save Dictionary...	Displays the Save Dictionary dialog box allowing you to save any changes made in a user dictionary.

Related Topics:

Text


New Chart (command)
New Chart...

This command displays the Datasheet window, allowing you to enter your data so that you may create a new chart.

Related Topics:

Charts


Edit Chart (command)
Edit Chart...

Displays the Edit Chart dialog box for the selected chart, allowing you to select a chart style, a chart type, the chart attributes, the chart's type and animation.

Related Topics:

Charts


Edit Data (command)
Edit Data...

Displays the datasheet for the selected chart so that you can edit the data. Clicking on the Rechart button in the data sheet will allow you to alter the chart's attributes. Clicking on the Rechart button will rechart the data in the same chart format. The components in the Astound Datasheet window has been discussed earlier in this chapter.

Related Topics:

Charts


Edit Animation (command)
Edit Animation...

Displays the Chart Options dialog box with the Animation options displayed for the selected chart.

Related Topics:

Charts


Chart Type (command)
Chart Type

Displays a sub menu of chart types (for example, 2D Column, 3D Bar(X), etc.), so that you can quickly choose a new chart type for the selected chart.

Related Topics:

Charts


Format (command)
Format

Displays a submenu, which in turn, display specific dialog boxes that allow you to define, remove, load, or save a graph format for the selected graph.

Define... displays the Chart Format dialog box which allows you to enter or select the graph style you want.

Remove... displays the Remove Chart Format dialog box which allows you to enter or select the graph style you want to remove.

Load... displays the Load Chart Format dialog box which allows you to load the graph style that you want.

Save... displays the Save Chart Format dialog box which allows you to save or find the graph style that you want.

Related Topics:

Charts


Define Pictograph (command)
Define Pictograph...

Displays the Name Pictograph dialog box, which allows you to enter the name of your new pictograph. Then, after clicking on the OK button the Define Pictograph dialog box will display. This dialog box will display the currently selected object(s) so that you can scale them to represent the largest and smallest version that you want displayed in a pictograph.

Related Topics:

Pictographs


Edit Pictograph (command)
Edit Pictograph...

Displays the Edit Pictograph dialog box. This box allows you to change the attributes of your pictograph.

Related Topics:

Pictographs


AutoReplot (command)
Auto-Replot

This is a toggle command that specifies that a chart or table will be replotted whenever data is changed. Select the chart before enabling this command. You can have several charts and tables attached to a datasheet. This command allows you to have some update automatically and others use the original data.

Related Topics:

Charts


Timeline  Window (command)
Timeline Window

This window shows the duration of the selected timeline and of the timelines of all the functions connected with the presentation, (for example, the sound timeline, object timelines, etc.).

Related Topics:

Timelines


Speaker Notes (command)
Speaker Notes

This command displays the Speaker Notes window which allows you to add speaker notes to your presentation.

Related Topics:

Creating Speaker Notes


Datasheet (command)
Datasheet

This command opens the Datasheet window to either create a new datasheet or edit an existing one. Any loaded datasheets will be displayed at the bottom of the submenu so that you can quickly open of them.

New:	This command will display the Datasheet window where you can enter your data.

Edit Chart Data:	This command will display the Datasheet window with your most recent graph data so that you may edit it.

Delete Datasheets	This command will delete the selected datasheet and its data.

Any bolded filename in submenus are files that are currently open.


Sound Editor (command)
Sound Editor

Displays a submenu allowing you to open the Sound Editor to edit an existing sound or record an existing one. Any sounds loaded into memory will be listed at the bottom of the submenu so that you can select them for editing.

New:	Opens the Sound Editor window so that you can record a new sound.

Related Topics:

Sound


Library (command)
Library

This command displays a submenu allowing you to create, open, or display a library. You can open a presentation as a library, and each object on a slide will be displayed in a separate cell of the library, or you can open a library of clipart.

New 	Displays a new, empty library into which you can place objects by dragging them from another open library or the presentation you are working on. You can also import or paste objects into a library.

Open ...	Displays the Library dialog box so that you can choose an existing library or presentation to open as a library.

Related Topics:

Libraries